Home

user manual - Warehouse Sound Systems

1. 21103443 YOLINOW WNUALNI 91 pueg 2 i c E us 1 ae 7 avg a Jt 91 91 ANNI S T lt ini NI 15 1811 oaas woy NI 088315 Naisn 10389 4 109100 193185 1SOd 3ud lt inaino TU pueg xnv W H JaN PN Mes On 1343 A IvXnv wet 1501 4 C Vi Naisn nO 103138 NO 0 inaino nS Ht sna oad H sna 199W peer ANNI H pueg p L E 4 HO gt h 10 S NO O3u3ls 15 INOW Lo Eme 9 1naino Oo CS E i 1SOd 3ud Q ino 3saixnv gt O3uais 18440 T ZH 4 T 532 0 1 4 soiueu g pueg r T i 1no ___ Q
2. Release ms 226 Threshold dB 13 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 58 Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 8 Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 2 Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 4 Release ms 35 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 8 Out gain dB 8 0 Knee hard Release ms 354 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 20 Attack ms 15 Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 15 Release ms 163 Threshold dB 20 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 31 Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 1 Release ms 342 Description A variation on program 23 intended for string instruments with a very low range such as cellos or contrabass Compressor program intended for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack Compressor program for synth pad intended to prevent diffu sion of the sound Compressor program for sam pled sounds making them as powerful as real acoustic drums This program is for percussion sounds A variation on program 28 intended for sampled bass drum sounds A variation on program 28 intended for sampled snare drum sounds A variation on program 28 intended for sampled sound loops Compressor program suited for use with solo vocals Preset Dynamics Program Settings 181 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Title Solo
3. Serial port DAT recorder wordclock slave MIDI IN Digital in 00 00 00 00 MIDI DIGITAL STEREO interface COAXIAL Digital out MIC LINE inputs 1 16 Drum machine Oooses MIDI INJos 600888 Q0000000 Guitar processor He 2 oooo Tone generator MIDI IN Bass processor Htc OOOO EH Hj MIDI keyboard 000000 Vocals 01V Owner s Manual 248 Chapter 18 5 Examples Two 01Vs amp two Tascam Interface Recorders This example shows how two 01Vs can be used with two 8 track digital tape recorders or 8 track hard disk recorders featuring Tascam Digital Audio Interface TDIF 1 con nections to create a 32 input 16 track fully digital recording system with the 32 mic line inputs and 16 digital tape returns providing up to 48 inputs during mixdown 01V A and 01V B cascaded together using the Stereo Digital In and Stereo Digital Out connections 01V B audio signals are combined into a stereo mix which is then fed to 01V A via the Digital Stereo Coaxial connections and mixed with the audio signals of 01V A The TO HOST connection links the two 01Vs together for simultaneous operation so when for example th
4. Model MIDI Implementation Chart version 1 0 Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default X OMNI off OMNI on Mode Messages X X Memorized Altered KKKKKKKKKKKKKK xX Note X 0 127 Number True Voice KERE RRAK X Note On X O Vel eloCitY Off X After Keys X X Touch Ch s X X Pitch bend X X Control 0 95 102 119 Assignable Change Prog 0 127 0 127 Assignable Change True EM CL LE LE 0 99 System Exclusive O O xI Song Pos X X Syst PA Song Sel X X Tune X X System Clock X X Real Time Commands X X Local ON OFF X X Aux All Notes OFF X X Messages Active Sense X O Reset X O MTC quarter frame message is recognized Notes 1 Bulk Dump Request Parameter Change Request and MMC For MIDI Remote ALL messages can be transmitted Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No Appendix D Resources 291 Appendix D Resources Books Introducing Digital Audio Ian R Sinclair second edition PC Publishing 1992 A good all around introduction to digital audio Second edition explains oversampling and bitstream techniques Principles of Digital Audio Ken C Pohlmann Howard W Sams amp Co 1989 Covering all aspects of digital audio this book is ideal for newcomers who want to know the basics plus a bit more The Art
5. Cascading Two or More 01Vs Three or more 01Vs can be linked as shown below although in this case only settings made on 01VA are reflected to the other 01Vs Adjustments made on 01V B or 01V C do not affect the other 01Vs The LINK PORT parameters on MIDI page 1 should be set to MIDI See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information System Examples 241 System Examples In this chapter 01V amp ADAT Interface Recorder 242 Two 01Vs amp two ADAT Interface Recorders 244 01V amp Tascam Interface Recorder 246 Two 01Vs amp two Tascam Interface Recorders 248 01V amp Pro Tools AES EBU sd uade d acp ua SOON sents REM 250 01V Owner s Manual 242 Chapter 18 5 Examples 01V amp ADAT Interface Recorder This example shows how the 01V can be used with an 8 track digital tape recorder or 8 track hard disk recorder featuring ADAT optical connections to create a 16 input 8 track fully digital recording system with the 16 mic line inputs and eight digital tape returns providing up to 24 inputs during mixdown System Components 01V Digital Mixing Console MYS8 AT Option I O card 8 track digital tape recorder or 8 track hard disk recorder such as Alesis ADAT Ale sis ADAT XT Alesis M20 Akai DR8 Akai DD8 Fostex D 90
6. NO ak xnv B Nusn i T Nvd zixnv Ww X A aH Ava ZI L HO 1S 444 XNV sna poured 2 pue spues xne siy poured eje spues xne ueuM 91 yno Sjeuueuo uo sjodued pues 01V Owner s Manual Bus Outs 107 Bus Outs In this chapter Aboutthe Bus eR eS 108 Option I O amp the Bus Outs c neni is ciara 108 Omni Outs amp the Dus Quis ive eaten exten wenn C SC de 108 Monitoring Bus OUES conoce sene Aet NC NN 108 Metering BusOuts do deu does bae a SE ace 108 Routine Signals to the Bus Outs tae Or C P RA roter oa 108 Setting Bus Out Master Levels cu vcio tatc Race Da eX e A e te Rs 109 BUS Outs RUE NR DAE 109 Routing Bus Signals to the Stereo Bus 110 Paine Bus QUIS xu sa D ADD EROR Cm VE AOL i QR Ra CERE REOR 111 Bus Out Block idc d er DOR D UR De AC 112 Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram 113 01V Owner s Manual 108 Chapter 10 Bus Outs About the Bus Outs The 01V s
7. te reet EEEE 76 Monitor Output qx es ae UAL base bt BUE 77 PHONES urre cease tonite ee E 77 Two track Input 2TRIN 77 Monitor un bau diia 78 Usine NM fey cee re end pe ovatae ee Roe a DEOR RC 78 Monitor Block Diagram 79 Solo cio ME 80 Using Solo af cok HEN cea oper 81 Solo Block Diagrams ewww Rd bee ne a AN Mer 82 Metering Signal Levels iene eda aca pa aO A b wee 83 Main Stereo ir o a dE atado 84 Hold ccce adt ym De E a GP 84 Setting the Metering Point 85 Option I O Meters input channels 17 24 85 Effects Send Meters exo aah aea dea raus suae 86 Stereo 87 About the Stereo Output S i teet Eee p an aar dics 88 Analog Stereo 3 Pedo Roe CNN 88 2TR Out amp the Stereo 88 Coaxial Digital Out amp the Stereo Output 88 Option I O amp the Stereo Output 88 Omni Outs amp the Stereo Output 88 Solo amp the Stereo Output 88 Monitoring the Stereo Output 25 d v
8. 270 01V Dimensions cux er ax e RR 271 Appendix 1 273 Scene Memory to Program Change Table 273 Parameter to Control Change Table 274 03D amp Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table 277 MIDE Data Format gee eee ca ee we etka 280 Appendix D Resources 291 Athlone ae 291 Yamaha Web Site ovx uuo o ette x 291 Glossary ie eub EE SEE be eee 293 Index oua cis wat ew dera iata Quique Spec qt aridus 297 01V Owner s Manual Welcome to the 01V 1 Welcome to the 01V In this chapter Welcome tothe OIV wate Vd Bela i Ct ee ark oer ac wpe ae 2 About this Owner s 2 OLV TiS CAG ate ver Run Rae te en Sa FR ORS Te ER 2 Features comen eee CDs e ATH RON RI ERR ace Tee 3 Pedture Discussion 142 Rar lah Erica eR ERROR RE RC RE ds 4 01V Owner s Manual 2 Chapter 1 Welcome to the 01V Welcome to the 01V Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 01V Digital Mixing Console Based on the highly successful Yamaha digital mixer series the Yamaha 01V has been designed with MIDI musicians and small sound reinforcement applications in mind although its versatility compactness and ease
9. 15 _ ED 01V Owner s Manual 64 Chapter 6 EQ The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param eters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them For Effects Returns 1 amp 2 Use the effects returns SEL buttons to select effects returns 1 and 2 Use the HIGH HI MID LO MID and LOW buttons to select EQ bands and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain respec tively If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Prefer ences on page 203 the EQ page shown below appears and the Home fader mode is selected This page can also be located using the EQ ATT button LETNI Ea i UR LO MID HALL CHORUS Fl 125 1 00k a adB a adE 6 73 The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param eters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them For Aux Sends 1 4 Use the Fader Mode AUX buttons to select an aux send Press the MASTER SEL button Use the HIGH HI MID LO MID and LOW buttons to select EQ bands and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain respec tively If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Prefer ences on page 203 the EQ page shown
10. co ton es JL ae D 0 006 amp e SHELF miki a 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the ATT control and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to adjust it 01V Owner s Manual 44 Chapter 5 Input Channels Applying EQ to Input Channels Input channels 1 through 16 feature four band parametric EQ while input channels 17 through 24 feature two band parametric EQ See EQ on page 61 for more informa tion EQ can be turned on or off and the EQ curve viewed on the EQ page and VIEW page See Viewing Input Channel Settings on page 57 for more information Input Channels Dynamics Processors Input channels 1 through 16 feature a dynamics processor See Dynamics Processors on page 161 for more information The dynamics can be turned on or off and the dynamics curve viewed on the Dynamics page and VIEW page See Viewing Input Channel Settings on page 57 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Delaying Channel Signals 45 Delaying Channel Signals The Channel Delays available on input channels 1 through 16 can be used to compen sate for microphone placement input channels 1 through 8 are or simply as delay effects The delay parameters for on DELAY page 2 while those for input channels 9 though 16 are on DELAY page 3 Both pages ar
11. 130 Muting Effects osea et eec Ge ey ic onde ews 130 Setting Effects Returns Levels 131 Panning Effects 131 Routing Effects Returns edes p qeu t 131 Monitoring Effects Returns FREUE Roa E ee Ea oS 131 Effects Returns amp Aux Sends cocks rd how een ODER ONU ROC OR AGI 131 Effects MIDE ALY ecd Dean Cp o a pe OC recta C ena eec a 132 Storing Effects Programs o3 a o aes oed e eus et a Bes 133 Recalling Effects Programs ue eR cre Ha Y BO RARUS CR QN 134 Editing Effects Program Titles sina vedo pa x exo E ROCA ra CURA UR USE 135 Editing Effects a go Spem ade vi d Pag RN ace T addu te 136 Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters 137 Effects Pata meters co ende Cte slate d ace fe ta b Mele ie eae 138 Effects Block Diagrami voe Crib inch de a uda ag 159 01V Owner s Manual 120 Chapter 12 Effects About the Onboard Effects The 01V s two onboard stereo multi effects processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 provide a wide range of high quality effects including reverb delay chorus flange amp simula tor and freeze There are 42 different types of effect available Effects processors 1 and 2 are fed by Effect buses 1 and 2 respectively and processed signals are returned via effect returns 1 and 2 Effects can be applied to input channels 1 through 24 and
12. 6 0dB 8 5dB 4 5 48 4 0dB A variation on program 315Hz 1 05kHz 4 23 kHz 12 6 kHz 18 10 4 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 1 0dB 4 0dB Emphasizes the bright 20 A G Stroke 1 tones of an acoustic gui 105 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 88 kHz 5 33 KHz tar 0 9 4 5 3 5 01V Owner s Manual Preset EQ Program Parameters 73 Parameter Title Description LOW L MID H MID HIGH L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF A variation on program G 3 5 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0dB 20 You can also use it 21 A G Stroke 2 F 297 Hz 749Hz 2 00kHz 3 56 kHz With a gutsy guitar Q B d sound L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 Corrects arpeggio tech 22 1 nique of an acoustic gui F 223 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 6 72 kHz tar Q 4 5 4 5 0 12 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 0 0 dB 5 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB iati 23 AG Arpeg 2 A variation on program F 177 2 354 400kHz 4 23 kHz 22 Q 7 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use with trumpets G 20dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 3 0dB trombones or sax With 24 Brass Sec one instrument adjust F 88 Hz 841 Hz 2 11 kHz 4 49 kHz the HIGH or H MID fre Q 2 8 2 0 7 7 quency G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 2 0dB 3 5 male vocal Adjust the 25 Male Vocal 1 HIGH or H MID setting F 187 Hz 1 00 kHz 2 00 kHz 6 72 kHz according to the voice Q
13. BUS MASTER J BUS1 Busz BUSS TO ST TO ST TO ST TO ST i i PAN i PAN i PAN G 00 un 16 ris 16 ris HALL CHORUS 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the bus out master faders and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them When bus outs are paired Pairing Bus Outs on page 111 their master faders are linked Bus out master levels can be controlled using regular faders on REMOTE page 1 See Assigning Faders amp On Buttons on page 194 for more information Muting Bus Outs Bus outs are muted using the virtual ON switches on PAN ROUT page 3 1 Usethe PAN ROUTING button to locate PAN ROUT page 3 a shown below BUS MASTER J BUs1 Busz Bussi Bus4 TO ST TO ST TO ST TO ST i PAN i i i G 00 Q9 0 G e O cic ric cic ris 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the bus out ON switches and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them When bus outs are paired Pairing Bus Outs on page 111 their ON switches are linked Bus outs can be muted using regular ON buttons on REMOTE page 1 See Assigning Faders amp On Buttons on page 194 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 110 Chapter 10 Bus Outs Routing Bus
14. 216 MY8 TD Tascam 216 N Naming See Titling Noise gate definition 295 Nominal fader indicator 30 Nominal Level definition 295 Normal phase 42 Nyquist theorem definition 295 O Omni definition 295 OMNI OUT 22 Omni out select page 116 Omni outs about 116 assigning 116 aux sends 94 block diagram 118 bus outs 108 connectors 22 D A converters 116 delay 117 input channels 50 meter page 84 metering 84 specifications 265 stereo output 88 ON buttons about 18 aux sends 100 effects send masters 129 fader modes 34 input channels 46 master 90 reassigning 194 Operating level definition 295 Option I O about the cards 216 assigning outputs 219 aux sends 94 block diagram 220 bus outs 108 card specs 217 control page 43 63 95 97 123 126 input channels 50 input specifications 264 installing cards 218 metering 85 output specifications 266 select page 219 stereo output 88 summary 6 swapping inputs 51 OPTION I O slot about 23 available cards 216 installing cards 218 Option in meter page 85 Option out meter page 85 OPTION page 1 85 OPTION page 2 43 47 49 58 63 95 97 123 126 OPTION page 3 85 OPTION page 4 219 OPTION page 5 51 Oscillator 202 Oscillator page 202 Output delay page 91 117 Oversampling definition 295 PAD switch about 15 using 41 Page area display 29 Pages aux pan 102 aux pre post 95 96 97 99 100 bulk 232 bus master 109 110 CH copy 59
15. HALL b 811 Comp CC Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a user program from 41 through 80 The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 Use the cursor buttons to select the STORE switch and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the Title Edit dialog box does not appear and the dynamics program is stored Title the dynamics program See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information Select OK and then press the ENTER button The dynamics program is stored 01V Owner s Manual Recalling Dynamics Programs 175 Recalling Dynamics Programs Dynamics programs 1 through 80 can be recalled 1 Select the channel to which you want to recall the dynamics program Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select the input channels 1 through 16 To select an aux send use the AUX buttons to select an aux send and then press the MASTER SEL button To select the stereo output press the HOME button and then the MASTER SEL button 2 Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the Library page as shown below DYNAMICS LIBRARY J No TITLE TYPE 3 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select pro
16. 90 Applying EQ to the Stereo Output cs a eau RN 90 Stereo Output Dynamics Processors 90 Stereo Output Delay eoo eric kd COO 91 Stereo Output Block Diagram oci eO eee wa ween 92 01V Owner s Manual 88 Chapter 8 Stereo Output About the Stereo Output The stereo output features four band parametric EQ a dynamics processor balance control and variable output delay of up to 300 milliseconds The stereo signal is output via analog XLR type connectors analog 2TR OUT connectors Coaxial digital outputs and can be assigned to the Option I O digital outputs or omni outs Analog Stereo Output The stereo output signal is converted to analog using 20 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters and then output via balanced XLR 3 32 type connectors with a 4 dB nominal output level STEREO OUT R 4dB BAL L 2TR Out amp the Stereo Output In addition to the XLR connectors the stereo output signal is output to the 2TR OUT connectors These are phono jacks with 10 dBV nominal output level and are typically connected to the analog inputs of a stereo cassette deck DAT or MiniDisc deck for stereo mix recording 10dBV UNBAL IN OUT 2TR Coaxial Digital Out amp the Stereo Output The stereo output signal is output digitally in Coaxial format from the digital stereo out connector Typically this is connected to the d
17. Use the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select programs As each program is selected its type is displayed The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL switch and then press the ENTER button The effects program is recalled If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 a confirmation dialog box appears In this case select OK and then press the ENTER button to confirm the recall Editing Effects Program Titles 135 Editing Effects Program Titles User program titles can be edited using the Title Edit function 1 Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to locate the library page as shown below LEFFECT1 LIBRARY J 6 1 No TITLE TYPE B2 Reuerb Room 8 REUERB ROOM HRLL t bal Reuerb Hall 4 REVERB HALL 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 and 1 INC buttons to select a user program from 43 through 99 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT switch and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears 4 Edit the program title See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information 5 Select OK and then press the ENTER button The program is stored with its new title 01V Owner s Manual 136 Chapter 12 Effec
18. 01V Owner s Manual 280 MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format 1 TRANSMIT RECEIVE DATA 1 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1 1 1 NOTE OFF 8n Reception Received if Rx CH matches Used for EFFECT control See below for details STATUS 1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity ignored 1 1 2 NOTE ON 9n Reception Received if Rx CH matches Used for EFFECT control See below for details A velocity of 0x00 is the same as NOTE OFF STATUS 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message DATA Onnnnnnn nn Note No Ovvvvvvv vv Velocity 1 127 On 0 off Using Note data for EFFECT control 1 Dynamic Flange Dynamic Phase Dynamic Filter When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI Velocity will be used together with Note On Off to control the frequency width of Modu lation 2 Freeze When PLAY MODE is MOMENT or CONTINUE a Note On mes sage will start play However this is only when the note number spec ified for MIDI TRG is received Also play will not occur if there is no recorded data Regardless of the Note Number a Note Off message will stop play if PLAY MODE is MOMENT 1 1 3 CONTROL CHANGE Bn Reception Received when Control Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches However if OMNI is ON this message is received regard less of the channel When Control Change ECHO is ON this message will be echoed Parameters will be controlled according to the settings of the control assign t
19. 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 7 Solo Monitors amp Meters 82 Solo Block Diagram sjouueuo ayes ojos peojos u ym peuun 1no peuunj Jey suJnjeJ Sjo9jje HOLINOW pue pz eke ap C 9191 t za 121 15 443 XAY sna O10S XIN sanoki ____ ta9 4 _ _____________ 1353 pabueyoun 91 91 1010 viel YOLINOW Ha 0105 walsn 4 aiga peBueuoum vez zi H oos 0105 41 INOW YIZLvEZLvEZHL 15 443 XNV sna JO S pue sjno snq spuas 0919 S 5 eq pue pz 01V Owner s Manual Metering Signal Levels 83 Metering Signal Levels Signal level meters for input channels 1 through 16 the effects returns aux sends bus outs omni outs and stereo output are provided on the HOME pages The signal source points for input and output meters can be set on HOME page 5 Stereo output levels can be metered using th
20. 2 Use the SEL buttons or cursor buttons to select the PRE POST switches and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them The PRE POST switches on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are perma nently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their PRE POST switches are linked 01V Owner s Manual 126 Chapter 12 Effects For Input Channels 17 24 1 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 as shown below CHI CONTROL J Q md FADER AUR EFFECT i Ea InitDatas aa has 00 E E EL MIR HRLL CHORUS Ln a Treo 8dB 9 698 BdB 3 SHELFIH S 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the EFFECT PRE POST switches and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them 01V Owner s Manual Viewing Effects Send Settings 127 Viewing Effects Send Settings Settings for the effects sends can be viewed and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW pages 1 and 2 1 Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to select an effects send and then press the MASTER SEL button EFF1 or EFF2 appears on the display indicating that an effects send is selected 2 Use the VIEW button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below LEFFi SEND RIN MUTE HA
21. 01V Owner s Manual 164 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Using the Dynamics Processors Input channels 1 through 16 the aux sends and the stereo output all feature dynamics processors To recall a program from the dynamics library see Recalling Dynamics Programs on page 175 To edit a dynamics processor see Editing the Dynamics Processors on page 166 For Input Channels 1 16 Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select channels Use the DYNAMICS button to locate DYNAMICS page 1 as shown below CH1 DYNAMICS EDIT MEME THRESHOLD G OUT GAIN p B 8dB RTTRCK RELEASE 258 HALL CHORUS i3 Io Press the ENTER button to turn on the dynamics processor The ON OFF switch appears highlighted when the dynamics processor is on While DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed the ENTER button turns the dynamics processor on or off regardless of the cursor position Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them The dynamics processors on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are perma nently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their dynamics processors are linked so adjustments can be made with either channel selected For Aux Sends 1 4 Use the AUX buttons to select an aux send and then press the MASTER SEL
22. 1 e 1 zxnv 9092 pes 1xnv pueg p NO Hey WV H ONO Aejaq HM o HO INANI t iud Hl2lv ZILI Noir ere ASv x N 1919 0 15 333 xnv sna 7 01V Owner s Manual 25 Block Diagram S3NOHd SE 91 SL LAdNI ino Foy HOLINOW u lt HOLINOW T INOW 91 HO SLHO LHO ino eh v xnv NO INNO vsna 5 103uais LEE LLL LGGGGGLGG GL x54 1 __ 9L HO SLHO __ LHO Jug nM Xxnv E 1no 109 5 9 on uondo uondo id 1 uodo lt Lxnv t __ Y 1 1 t sna tJ lt uoauais 1038315 ANI ONVOS IVNGIAIGNI NVd NO 19943 se ewes 1093 s 5 pueg y 15808 O7HMOL 26001 950 2333 15 444 XAV sna Nyd 4 jeujeiu Dad L pueg y PAG Od sae ter ci Ux 3da xnv NO Liv 3d NE puegz
23. _ ce 2 28 DynaPhaser DYNAPHASER Note On velocity when SOURCE set to MIDI Combined Effects Title Type Description 29 Rev Chorus REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 30 Rev gt Chorus REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev Flange REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev gt Flange REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series 33 Rev Sympho REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in parallel 34 Rev gt Sympho REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic in series 35 Rev gt Pan REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan in parallel 36 Delay ER DELAY ER Delay and early reflections in parallel 37 Delay ER DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections in series 38 Delay Rev DELAY REV Delay and reverb in parallel 39 Delay gt Rev DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb in series 40 Dist gt Delay DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay in series Other Effects Title Type Description Three band parallel filter 24 dB octave Easily setup 41 Multi Filter MULTI FILTER when used with the Internal Parameter function on REMOTE page 1 see page 194 42 FREEZE Basic Sampler 01V Owner s Manual Using the Effects 123 Using the Effects There are two stages to applying effects 1 Sending the input channel signal to an effects processor 2 Returning the processed si
24. EQ programs are recalled on the EQ Library page You can recall any one of the 40 pre set and 40 user programs Use the EQ ATT button to locate the EQ Library page shown below EHI LIBRARY J No TITLE 82 55 Drum 2 EA CURVE 5 Drum 1 P Use the SEL buttons to select the channel to which you want to recall the EQ program HALL CHORUS You can select input channels 1 through 16 the effects returns aux sends or stereo out You cannot select input channels 17 through 24 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select programs As each program is selected its EQ curve is displayed in the EQ CURVE window The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 Use the cursor buttons to select RECALL and then press the ENTER but ton The EQ program is recalled If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 a confirmation dialog box appears In this case select OK and then press the ENTER button to confirm the recall 01V Owner s Manual 70 Chapter 6 EQ Editing EQ Program Titles 1 01V Owner s Manual The titles of stored EQ programs can be edited using the Title Edit function Use the EQ ATT button to locate the EQ Library page shown below 1 E amp g LIBRARY J Ho TITLE
25. HALL CHORUS CRE aux 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 4 gt Stout 2 Usethe cursor buttons to select the TIME control and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set it The Fade Time can be set from 0 to 25 seconds in 0 1 second steps 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the FADE ENABLE switches and the ENTER button to enable channels for fading FADE ENABLE switches appear highlighted when channels are enabled for fading 4 Store the current mix scene in a scene memory See Storing Mix Scenes on page 186 for more information Note The Fade Time settings must be stored with a mix scene before they have any effect 5 Recall the mix scene See Recalling Mix Scenes on page 187 for more information When the mix scene is recalled enabled faders move to their new positions over the specified time With a 5 second fade time for example it takes the enabled faders 5 sec onds to reach their new positions In a typical crossfade one channel would fade out while another channel fades in 01V Owner s Manual 192 Chapter 14 Scene Memories Recalling Scene Data Safely When a mix scene is recalled all mix settings are updated so that they match those of the recalled mix scene In some cases it may be necessary to retain mix settings of cer tain channels This can be achieved using the Recall Safe function Safe channels remain the same when
26. Transmission If Parameter Change TX is ON this message will be transmitted on the Tx CH Device Channel when a parameter that is not specified in the Control Assign Table is modified STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000000 00 byte operation for edit buffer type DATA 341 address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address dd2 address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address 0000dddd data H high 4 bits of 8 bits data 0000dddd data L low 4 bits of 8 bits data E continuous address datas EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The valid range of addresses is 0x0000 0x03FF 01V Owner s Manual 282 MIDI Data Format PARAMETER CHANGE 7bit operation for type Ox10 edit buffer Reception This message is received if Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS This is echoed if Parameter Change ECHO is ON When this is received the specified parameter will be controlled Transmission If Parameter Change TX is ON this message is transmitted on the Tx CH Device Channel when a parameter not specified in the Control Assign Table is modified STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 0
27. An incorrect signal may have been input to the TO HOST connector TO HOST Data Overrun An incorrect signal may have been input to the TO HOST connector TO HOST Data Parity Error An incorrect signal may have been input to the TO HOST connector TO HOST Rx Buffer Full The 01V is probably receiving too much MIDI data at the TO HOST connector TO HOST Tx Buffer Full WRONG WORD CLOCK The 01V is probably transmitting too much MIDI data from the TO HOST connector The received wordclock is not correct and the 01V cannot synchronize correctly Select a suitable wordclock or use the AUTO NAVIGATE function on the SETUP page 1 01V Owner s Manual Security Cover 259 Security Cover For certain applications you may wish to fit a protective cover over the 01V s GAIN con trols and PAD switches Although Yamaha do not make such a cover the 01V has four fixing holes to affix a custom made cover If you fit such a cover make sure that the fix ing screws do not protrude inside the 01V by more than 10 mm The fixing holes accept M3 size machine screws and are spaced 40 0 mm vertically 414 mm horizontally Rack mounting Kit The 01V can be rack mounted using the optional RK124 Rack Mount Kit See your Yamaha dealer for details Attach the rack mount brackets as shown below 01V Owner s Manual 261 General Appendix B Specifications General Intern
28. DYNAMICS LIBRARY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0010nnnn FORMAT No 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000010 00110011 00110100 DATA NAME 01011001 Ommmmmmm EOX 11110111 FO 43 2n 4C 4D 20 20 38 42 33 34 59 mm 7 System Exclusive Message Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 Universal Bulk Dump m 0 79 Dynamics Library No 1 80 96 114 ch1 12 13 14 15 16 AUX1 4 ST MAS End Of Exclusive EFFECT LIBRARY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000000 00 104 944 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 01101000 68 01001100 4C 01001101 4 MU 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01000101 45 Ommmmmmm mm m 0 98 Effect Library No 1 99 112 113 Effet1 Effect2 Receive is effective 42 98 112 113 DATA Oddddddd ds Effect Library Memory 12 41 2 bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The first twelve bytes are the title and are 7 bit data The following 41 bytes are all split into 4 bit data EFFECT LIBRARY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message
29. When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be ech oed When this message is received the same processing will be performed as when the specified key refer to the table below is pressed released Transmission When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be trans mitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 01000011 43 controller DATA 00000000 00 control no 0 key remote Oddddddd dd No 0 10 99 102 key 1 11 100 103 0000dddd dd data bitO 2 change bit no 0 7 bit3 0 reset 1 5 0 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive KEY key no bitO bitl bit2 bit3 bit4 bit bit6 bit7 keyl ONI ON2 ON3 ON4 ONS ON6 ON7 ON8 key2 1 ON9 ONIO ONII ONI2 ON13 14 ONI5 16 ONSTOUT key3 2 SOLOI SOLO2 SOLO3 SOLO4 SOLOS SOLO6 SOLO7 SOLOS key4 50109 80010 800011 501012 SOLO13 14SOLO15 16 4 SELI SEL2 SEL3 SEL4 SELS SEL6 SEL7 SEL8 key6 5 SEL9 10 SELI1 SELI2 SELI3 14 SELI5 16 5 key7 6 ONRTNI ONRTN2 SOLORT2 SELRTNI SELRTN2 HOME MEMORY key8 T 1 AUX2 AUX3 AUX4 EFFECT EFFECT2 OPTION REMOTE key9 8 LOW L MID H MID HIGH 5 keyl0 9 LEFT RIGHT DOWN ENTER INC DEC 11 10 DYNAMIX EQ DELAY PAN UTILITY MIDI VIEW
30. difference between the loudest and quietest signal levels in a system In an audio device usually the difference between the maximum output level and the residual noise floor In a digital system the available dynamic range is deter 01V Owner s Manual 294 Glossary mined by the data resolution about 6 dB per digital bit Hence a 16 bit system theo retically provides a 96 dB dynamic range Edit buffer The memory area used to store the current mix settings When a mix scene 15 stored the Edit Buffer data is stored to the selected scene memory When mix scene is recalled the data of the selected scene memory is copied into the Edit Buffer EFF Abbreviation for effect Emphasis A technique used to improve the noise performance of first generation AD DA converters by boosting analog signals above 3 5 kHz by 6 dB octave prior to A D conversion Emphasis was subsequently detected by the D A converter and de emphasis applied after D A conversion Although not used anymore emphasis functions are often provided for compatibility with old digital recordings EQ snapshot A set of EQ settings Fade time The time it takes faders to move to new positions when a mix scene is recalled Can be used for crossfading between channels Fs Abbreviation for sampling frequency General MIDI GM An extension to the MIDI Standard that among other things states that a General MIDI tone generator must be at least 24 note pol
31. olo SELECTED CHANNEL For Input Channels 1 16 amp the Effects Returns 1 Use the SEL buttons to select channels To select input channel 13 or 14 likewise 15 or 16 press SEL button 13 14 15 16 repeatedly The number of the currently selected channel appears on the display To select the left or right channel of effects return 1 likewise effects return 2 press SEL button RETURN 1 RETURN 2 repeatedly As these channels are selected the letter or 17 appears on the display next to the panpot icon 2 Usethe PAN control to pan the selected channel If the PANPOT AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the PAN ROUT page shown below appears and the Home fader mode is selected This page can also be located using the PAN ROUTING but ton et MODE NOTUTOUAL 5 amp 6 i 7 CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER 725 1i 12 2 14 5 1 IRIN IRINZ T HRLL CHORUS GG Panpots can be adjusted on this page by using the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons In addition to the SEL buttons panpots on the PAN ROUT page can be selected using the cursor buttons CENTER CENTER CENTER CEHTER 4 16 R16 L 16 P16 L 16 R16 L16 R16 For Input Channels 17 24 1 Press the OPTION 1 0 button 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels 3 Use the PAN cont
32. on page 232 for more information MIDI Machine Control 237 In the following example an MMC compatible hard disk recording system running on a personal computer is remotely controlled from an 01V using MMC commands The device number on REMOTE page 2 of the 01V should match that of the hard disk recorder 01V Personal computer with audio card Digital audio OPTION In the following example an MMC compatible digital multitrack recorder is remotely controlled from an 01V using MMC commands The device number on REMOTE page 2 of the 01V should match that of the digital multitrack recorder 01V Digital multitrack DIGITAL IN OPTION DIGITAL OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI Machine Control 01V Owner s Manual 238 Chapter 17 MIDI User Defined MIDI Controllers The SOLO buttons ON buttons and faders of channels 1 through 16 and Master can be used as MIDI controllers for remote MIDI device control A MIDI data string up to 16 bytes long can be assigned to each control and assignments are active only when REMOTE page 3 is displayed Select another page and these controls perform their regular functions Four assignment sets can be stored in banks 1 through 4 U
33. 1333 si uondo jeuondo ue Ajuo sr SIYL 1 1 3q 10 NI siseuduie eq oj uondo 7 amp 7 1 1 1 1 8 1 01V Owner s Manual Getting Around the User Interface 27 Getting Around the User Interface In this chapter About the User wn Rata whee ane seas 28 Display a 20 28 Display Elements zw cuc wer Ox oce areae e ine Ma CE OC NON iR 30 Cursor rs ee OR DEDOS RET ee hee CA QURE 31 PARAMETER Wheel chatte DU eese nS cd x dott Bolle 31 DEC amp 1 INC Buttons 2 0 0 0 cece cece nce 31 ENTER BUON ake Uu 31 Facer ea vieta when Ae a OR ae 32 Title Edit Dialog BOX eect wed ort ne Soe een oe ae uet 37 01V Owner s Manual 28 Chapter 4 Getting Around the User Interface About the User Interface Thanks to a user friendly interface 01V operation is both logical and intuitive The 320 x 80 dot LCD display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating status while dedicated SELECTED CHANNEL controls allow for quick EQ and pan adjust ments Operation of the multifunction faders depends on the selected Fader mode Mixing functions and configuration settings are organized into dis
34. Control Change Parameter Control on page 229 System Exclusive messages for parameter control System Exclusive Parameter Control on page 231 System Exclusive Bulk Dump for data backup and transfer between 01Vs Bulk Dump on page 232 e MMC MIDI Machine Control for remote recorder contro MIDI Machine Control on page 236 MIDI Link for simultaneous operation Linking 01Vs on page 239 MIDI Local Control for remote 01V operation Local Control on page 234 User defined MIDI controllers for remote operation User Defined MIDI Control lers on page 238 MIDI Note On for Freeze effect playback and Note On velocity for the DYNA FIL TER DYNA FLANGE and DYNA PHASER effects Effects Parameters page 138 MIDI Ports The MIDIIN port receives MIDI messages while the MIDI OUT port transmits them The MIDI THRU port transmits all MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port In addition to regular MIDI ports the 01V features a TO HOST port for connecting to a personal computer without a MIDI interface MIDI THRU OUT IN Apart from being a bidirectional connection that can transmit and receive MIDI data the TO HOST port functions in the same way as the regular MIDI ports Whether you use the regular MIDI ports or TO HOST port will depend on your particular system and application The PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 is used to select the port for reg ular MIDI transmission See MIDI Setup
35. EFF1 SEND RETURNO CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 CH17 24 EFF2 SEND RETURNI CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 STO S H1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 ST OUT L ST DELAY MIx OUT R OMNI1 4 FB GAIN F LOW CH1 12 CH13 14 15 16 CH17 24 RETURN1 RETURN2 AUX1 4 ST OUT Q LOW F L MID GIMD CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 RETURNI RETURN2 AUX1 4 ST OUT Q L MID EQ F G Q FH MID EBMID CH1 12 CH13 14 15 16 RETURN1 2 1 4 ST OUT Q H MID F HIGH CHICA CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 CH17 24 RETURN1 RETURN2 1 4 ST OUT Q HIGH ATT CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 17 24 RATIO KNEE HOLD THRESHOLD DYNAMICS CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 AUX1 4 ST OUT ATTACK G RANGE REL DECAY EFFECT1 EFFECT PARAM1 19 EFFECT2 CHANNEL 1 24 RETURN1 L RETURN1 R RETURN2 L AUX1 2 RETURN2 R CH1 16 RETURN1 L RETURN1 RETURN2 1 PIS RETURN2 R BUS TO ST BUS1 4 BALANCE ST OUT 01V Owner s Manual 196 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 15 Other Functions On Button Assignments On buttons 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to the following parameters Parameter Channel NO ASSIGN CH1 12 13 14 CH15 16 CHANNEL CH17 24 RETURN1 RETURN2 ON channel on off MASTER AUX1 4 BUS1 4 EFFECT1 EFFECT2 ST OUT BUS TO ST BUS1 4 PHASE CHANNEL CH1 16 normal reverse PRE POST pre post AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND CH1 12
36. XLR pins 3 and 1 linked Tip hot 2 hot 1 4 phone plug Sleeve ground 1 ground DIGITAL STEREO OUT This phono jack outputs the main stereo mix as Coaxial format 24 bit digital audio allowing digital transfer to a DAT MiniDisc deck or other digital recorder DIGITAL STEREO IN This phono jack accepts 24 bit Coaxial format digital audio Signals input here can be fed directly to the Stereo bus for stereo cascade operation 1 two mixers working together or to input channels 13 and 14 MIDI IN OUT THRU These are standard MIDI IN OUT and THRU ports and are used to connect the 01V to other MIDI equipment for remote control and data backup The MIDIIN port receives MIDI messages while the MIDI OUT port transmits them The MIDI THRU port transmits all MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port TO HOST This 8 pin mini DIN port is used to connect the 01V to a personal computer for use with MIDI software It eliminates the need for a computer MIDI interface and together with the MIDI ports allows the 01V to be used as a MIDI interface for other MIDI equipment POWER switch This switch is used to turn on and off the 01 It s recessed to prevent accidental oper ation OPTION 1 slot An Option I O card can be installed here providing access to the 01V s eight digital inputs and outputs See About Option I O Cards on page 216 01V Owner s Manual Nvd NI HZ
37. Yeu EE c ee a nita o 101 Aux Send Block Facta I AERE 104 Stereo Pair Aux Send Block 1 1 105 01V Owner s Manual 94 Chapter 9 Aux Sends About the Aux Sends The 01V s four aux sends which can be used individually or in stereo pairs feature four band parametric EQ and dynamics processors Signals from input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4 while those from input channels 17 through 24 can be sent to aux sends 1 and 2 Channel aux sends can be configured individually as pre fader or post fader sends The 01V does not have dedicated aux send connections Instead aux sends must be assigned to the Option I O digital outputs or omni outs The 01V does not have dedicated aux return inputs Use the input channels to return aux signals Stereo return signals can be connected to input channels 13 14 and 15 16 The onboard effects are explained in their own chapter See Effects on page 119 for more information Option I O amp the Aux Sends Aux send signals can be assigned to the Option I O digital outputs See About Option Cards on page 216 for more information Omni Outs amp the Aux Sends Aux send signals can be assigned to the omni outs See Assigning Omni Outs on page 116 for more information Monitoring Aux Sends Aux sends can be moni
38. h ddd dy d 4 4 4 Maximum value depends the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 MOD DELAY Basic repeat delay with modulation Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time DLY NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 FAN feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed et 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with DLY NOTE and MOD NOTE 3 25 300 bps to determine DELAY and FREQ 1 H3 fF k 4442 J 1 4 4 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 AW PTT 4 4 4 4 3 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual Effects Parameters 141 DELAY LCR Three tap delay left center right Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 2730 0 ms Left channel delay time NOTE 1
39. 100 99 FRZ PLAY gt UT ur keyl0 100 SOLOI SOLO2 SOLO3 SOLO4 SOLOS SOLO6 SOLO7 SOLOS 102 101 50109 SOLOIO 800011 SOLOI2 SOLO13 14SOLO15 16 SOLO RTNI SOLO RTN2 103 102 8501017 501018 801019 501 020 501021 501 022 501023 501 024 Normally data should be transmitted as set bit3 1 In this case the 01V will determine that that switch has been pressed and then immediately released and will perform the appropriate processing This means that you will not have to transmit reset bit3 0 sepa rately The keys followed by 100 are virtual key it would be the keys on LCD PARAMETER CHANGE type 0x04 multiple linking This message is valid only for the connector that has been specified as the LINK PORT When two 01V units have been connected by a cable some of the functions refer to the following table will be linked The same LINK PORT connector settings must be made on both units Reception This message is always received and will execute the LINK function refer to the following table This is not dependent on MIDI SETUP Transmission This message is transmitted when LINK related functions refer to following table are performed This is not dependent on MIDI SETUP When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message is transmitted without change STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID SUB STATUS 0001nnn
40. 178 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Title Type Parameter Value Description Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 COMPAND H program for use 09 A Dr BD Out gain dB 15 with acoustic kit s bass drum ut gain 1 Width dB 7 Release ms 192 Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 8 10 ADrSN COMP Compressor program for use Out gain dB 3 5 with acoustic kit s snare drum Knee 2 Release ms 12 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 0 i 11 ADrSN EXPAND Expander program for use with Out gain dB 0 5 acoustic kit s snare drum Knee 2 Release ms 151 Threshold dB 8 Range dB 23 12 ADr SN GATE Attack ms ot aor ues id ms Qe tic kit s snare drum Ho Decay ms 238 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 11 13 ADr SN COMPAND S COMPAND H program for use Out gain dB 0 0 with acoustic kit s snare drum Width dB 10 Release ms 128 Threshold dB 20 Expander program for use with Ratio 1 2 acoustic kit s tom toms which 14 ADrTom EXPAND Attack ms 2 automatically reduces the vol 1505 Out gain dB 5 0 ume when the tom toms are not 2 played helping to differentiate Rel s m the bass and snare drums clearly elease ms Threshold dB 24 Soft knees compander program Ratio 1 2
41. 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 F 00110100 34 4 01001100 4c T 00100000 20 X DATA Oddddddd ds Remote MMC Memory 24bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive All data is 7 bit data REMOTE MMC MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c 01001101 4 M 00100000 20 1 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 B 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01001100 4 E 00100000 20 M EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive REMOTE User Define MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00001011 OB 1450 1440 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 00101010 2 01001100 4C 1 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 01000010 42 B 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 W DATA NAME 01010101 55 Obbbbbbb bb bb 0 3 bank 1 4 Oddddddd ds Remote User Define Memory 1440bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive All data word i
42. B2 Bass Drum 2 Ea CURVE 1 b41 Bass Drum 1 84 Use the PARAMETER wheel to select programs HALL CHORUS GG Use the cursor buttons to select TITLE EDIT and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears Edit the program title See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information When you ve finished select OK and then press the ENTER button The new title is stored Preset EQ Program Parameters 71 Preset EQ Program Parameters Parameter Title Description LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Emphasizes the low G 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 dB 4 0 dB range of a bass drum 01 Bass Drum 1 F 99H 265Hz 1 05 kHz 5 33 kHz and the attack created by the beater Q 1 2 10 0 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF 8 0dB 70dB 6 0dB Creates a peak around 02 Bass Drum 2 80Hz producing a F 79 Hz 397 Hz 2 52 kHz 12 6 kHz tight stiff sound Q 1 4 4 5 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 0 5 dB 0 0 3098 4598 Emphasizes snapping 132Hz 1 00kHz 3 17 5 04kHz and rimshot sounds Q 1 2 4 5 0 11 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 41 5dB 8 5dB 2 5dB 4 0dB_ Emphasizes the ranges 04 Snare Drum 2 of that classic rock snare F 177 Hz 334 Hz 2 37 kHz 4 00 kHz drum sound Q 10 0 7 0 1
43. CH13 14 CH15 16 CH17 24 RETURN2 CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 RETURN1 RETURN2 CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 Ep END CH17 24 RETURN2 CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 EZ SEND CH17 24 RETURN1 DELAY on off CHANNEL CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 OUTPUT ST OUT L ST OUT 4 CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 EQ on off CHANNEL CH17 24 RETURN1 RETURN2 OUTPUT AUX1 4 ST OUT DYNAMICS on off CHANNEL CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 OUTPUT AUX1 4 ST OUT Assigning Faders amp On Buttons Initial Assignments for Bank 1 These are the initial fader and ON button assignments for Bank 1 197 Channel Control Parameter i ON button ON MASTER BUS1 Fader FADER MASTER BUS1 ON button ON MASTER BUS2 Fader FADER MASTER BUS2 ON button ON MASTER BUS3 Fader FADER MASTER BUS3 ON button ON MASTER BUS4 Fader FADER MASTER BUS4 E ON button ON MASTER AUX1 Fader FADER MASTER AUX1 P ON button ON MASTER AUX2 Fader FADER MASTER AUX2 ON button ON MASTER AUX3 Fader FADER MASTER AUX3 ON button ON MASTER AUX4 Fader FADER MASTER AUX4 ON button ON MASTER EFFECT Fader FADER MASTER EFFECT1 i ON button ON MASTER EFFECT2 Fader FADER MASTER EFFECT2 1 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader NO ASSIGN 12 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader NO ASSIGN 13 14 ON button NO ASSIGN Fade
44. Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id 01000100 44 Locate 00000110 06 byte count 00000001 01 target sub command Ohhhhhhh hh hour Ommmmmmm mm minute Osssssss ss second Offfffff ff frame Osssssss ss sub frame only 0 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 281 1 3 ACTIVE SENSING Fe Reception Once this message has been received an interval of 300ms or more during which no message is received will cause MIDI communica tions to be initialized clearing Running Status etc STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing 2 TRANSMISSION CONDITION CONTROL CHANGE BnH e779 34 PROGRAM CHANGE CnH SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE PARAMETER CHANGE FOH 43H 1nH RESPONSE FOR PARAMETER REQUEST SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE BULK DUMP FOH 43H 0nH BULK REQUEST 43H 2nH USER DEFINE MMC FOH 7FH nnH 06H MIDI IN CTL Tx ON PGM Tx ON PARAM Tx e CTL ECHO 0 MIDI OUT PGM ECHO ON 0 3 RECEIVE CONDITION 8nH NOTE OFF 9nH NOTE ON OFF CTL Rx ON BnH CONTROL CHANGE PGM OMNI ON os PGM Rx ON PROGRAM CHANGE 0 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE 5 FOH 43H 1nH PARAM OMNI ON PARAMETER CHANGE MIDI IN S e SFOH 43H 3nH PARAMETER REQUEST Boe nx
45. ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4 01001101 4 M 00100000 20 00100000 20 n 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 F 00110100 34 4 01000101 45 Ommmmmmm mm m 0 98 Effect Library No 1 99 112 113 Effectl Effect2 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 289 PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGNMENT TABLE BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000001 01 138 128 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 00001010 OA 01001100 4c L 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 B 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 00110100 34 4 01010000 50 P 00100000 20 K DATA Oddddddd ds Program Change Table 128bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive All data is 7 bit data PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGNMENT TABLE BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c T 01001101 4D
46. MIDI OUT MIDI IN Control Change MIDI IN MIDI OUT Linking 01Vs The TO HOST connection links the two or more 01Vs together for simultaneous ation so when for example the fader mode is set to Aux 1 on 01V B the fader mode on 01V A is also set to Aux 1 and vice versa Other linked functions include Operations Fader mode amp Display page selection Scene memory title edit and Mix scene store including title and recall Parameters Solo Metering point HOME page 5 and Meter Peak Hold on off The LINK PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 should be set to HOST See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 01V A 01V B TO HOST TO HOST 01V Owner s Manual 240 Chapter 17 MIDI 01V Owner s Manual Linking 01Vs using the MIDI Ports If the TO HOST port is connected to a computer for MIDI purposes simultaneous operation of two 01Vs is still possible using the MIDI ports as shown below The LINK PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 should be set to MIDI See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 01V B gag 3250 32 32 2 YAMAHA
47. N N N N N N N N N N N N N 01V Owner s Manual 03D amp Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table 279 Parameter Control Change 03D Arrangement Programmable Mixer 01 Arrangement CH17 FADER EFF1 SEN CH17 CH18 FADER EFF1 SE CH18 CH19 FADER EFF1 SE CH19 CH20 FADER EFF1 SE CH20 CH21 FADER EFF1 SE CH13 14 CH22 FADER EFF2 SE CH23 FADER EFF2 SE CH24 FADER EFF2 SE CH13 14 FADER EFF2 SE RETURN1 FADER EFF2 SE ON CHANNEL RETURN2 FADER EFF2 SE ON MASTER AUX1 FADER EFF2 SE ON MASTER AUX2 FADER EFF2 SE ON MASTER AUX3 FADER EFF2 SE ON MASTER AUX4 FADER EFF2 SE ON MASTER ST OUT FADER EFF2 SE FADER EFF1 SEND CH1 FADER AUX1 SEND FADER EFF1 SEND CH2 FADER AUX1 SEND FADER EFF1 SEND CH3 FADER AUX1 SEND CH3 FADER EFF1 SEND CH4 FADER AUX1 SEND CH4 FADER EFF1 SEND CH5 FADER AUX1 SEND CH5 FADER EFF1 SEND CH6 FADER AUX1 SEND CH6 FADER EFF1 SEND CH7 FADER AUX1 SEND CH7 FADER EFF1 SEND CH8 FADER AUX1 SEND CH8 FADER EFF1 SEND CH9 FADER AUX1 SEND CH9 FADER EFF1 SEND CH10 FADER AUX1 SEND CH10 FADER EFF1 SEND CH11 FADER AUX1 SEND CH11 FADER EFF1 SEND CH12 FADER AUX1 SEND CH12 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH17 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH18 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH19 NO ASSIGN FADER AUX1 SEND CH20 FADER EFF1 SEND CH13 14 FADER AUX1 SEND CH13 14 FADER BALANCE ST OUT NO ASSIGN
48. PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 2098 75dB 20dB 1 0 Emphasizes the attack of 05 Tom tom 1 tom toms and creates a F 210Hz 667 Hz 4 49 kHz 6 35 kHz long leathery decay Q 1 4 10 1 2 0 28 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Emphasizes the attack of G 2 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 0dB crash cymbals extend 06 Cymbal Ting 105Hz 420 1 05 13 4 2 ing the sparkling decay Q 8 0 9 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 40dB 25dB 1 0dB 0 5dB_ Use ona tight high hat 07 High Hat emphasizing the mid to F 94 Hz 420 Hz 2 82 kHz 7 55 kHz high range Q 0 5 1 G 45dB O0dB 20dB ood and clarifies the 08 Percussion high range of instru F 99 Hz 397 Hz 2 82kHz 16 9 kHz ments such as shakers Q 45 0 56 cabasas and congas L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 7 5dB 45dB 2 5dB Makes a tight electric 09 E Bass 1 bass sound by cutting F 35 Hz 111 Hz 2 00 kHz 4 00 kHz very low frequencies Q 5 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Unlike program 9 this M 3 0 dB 0 0 2 5 dB 0 5 dB program emphasizes F 111 2 111Hz 2 24kHz 4 00kHz the low range of an electric bass Q 0 1 5 6 3 01V Owner s Manual 72 Chapter 6 EQ Parameter Title Description LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHE
49. Releasing Aux Send Pairs 1 On SETUP page 4 use the cursor buttons to select the paired aux switch and then press the ENTER button The following dialog box appears Will Release AUX1 2 Pair ARE YOU SURE 2 Select OK and then press the ENTER button The stereo pair is broken and both aux sends operate independently 01V Owner s Manual 102 Chapter 9 Aux Sends Panning Channel Aux Sends Use the AUX 1 or AUX 2 button to locate the AUX 1 2 Pan page or the AUX 3 or AUX 4 button to locate the AUX 3 4 Pan page When aux sends are not paired the AUX PAN pages are empty as shown below LAUXI Z PAN J RUxX1 2 are not in PAIRs When aux sends are paired Making Aux Send Pairs on page 101 the AUX PAN pages contain panpots for input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns as shown below BUxi 2 PANY INPUT PAN LINK CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER i CENTER CENTER i CENTER 5 5 11 AZ j12 14 5 16 IRTN1 2 CENTER CEHTER CE InitDatas EDIT HRLL CHORUS HTER CENTER 1 R16 1 L16 16 R16 Use the SEL buttons cursor buttons to select the channel panpots and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them For input channels 13 14 15 16 and the effects returns press the SEL buttons repeat edly to select the odd left and even right channels TheINPUT PAN LINK option is
50. YAMAHA P DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE yaw NY ont f st 2 2 4 FA s m 259 a 549 ae c T SN 1 FCC INFORMATION U S A IMPORTANT NOTICE DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 2 IMPORTANT When connecting this product to accessories and or another product use only high quality shielded cables Cable s supplied with this product MUST be used Follow all installation instructions Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations Part 15 for Class digital devices Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices This equipment generates uses radio frequencies and if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations If this product is
51. on page 224 for more information The unused port automatically becomes the LINK PORT which is used for simultaneous operation with another 01V 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Ports 223 Using the TO HOST Port In this system the 01V is connected to a personal computer without a MIDI interface via the TO HOST port The PORT parameter on MIDI page 1 is set to match the type of computer PC 1 PC 2 or Mac See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more informa tion 01V operations are recorded as MIDI messages by the MIDI sequencer software During playback the sequencer transmits the MIDI messages back to the 01V for auto mated mixing MIDI Sequencer Serial port TO HOST z Using the MIDI Ports In this system the 01V MIDI keyboard and MIDI sampler connect to the computer via a standard MIDI interface Since the MIDI interface features only one MIDI IN port which is connected to the MIDI OUT of the MIDI keyboard the system must be repatched in order to record MIDI messages from the 01V Alternatively a MIDI inter face with two or more MIDI INs could be used MIDI Sequencer Serial port YAMAHA MIDI keyboard MIDI OUT oo00000000 01V Owner s Manual 224 Chapter 17 MIDI Using
52. plus values for FB GL 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time NOTE R 1 dn in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Right channel feedback gain plus values for FB GR 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB DL 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel feedback delay time NOTEFBL 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB D L Left to right channel feedback gain plus values for L gt R FB G 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback FB DR 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel feedback delay time NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB D R Right to left channel feedback gain plus values for R LFB G 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 8 TEMPOS determine DELAY L DELAY R FB D L and FB D R 1 JR H3 b JJ h ddd Ja d 4 4 4 Maximum value depends the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 CHORUS Chorus effect Parameter Range Description FR
53. ss in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel delay level DELAY C 0 0 2730 0 ms Center channel delay time NOTE C 1 ae in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY LEVEL C 100 to 100 Center channel delay level DELAY R 0 0 2730 0 ms Right channel delay time NOTE R 1 s in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel delay level FB DLY 0 0 2730 0 ms Feedback delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine NOTE FB 1 EB DLY Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 20 49990 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 2 TEMPOS 255200 determine DELAY L DELAY DELAY and FB DLY 1 p 432 FB h D d 4 d 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 142 Chapter 12 Effects ECHO Stereo delay with crossed feedback loop Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time NOTE L id in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Left channel feedback gain
54. their aux send controls are linked For Input Channels 17 24 1 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 as shown below Qul cH1 CONTROL J i ROUTE FADER AUH EFFECT JE soa 1 1 1 1 icm oo E Nd PON co lm co HALL CHORUS eum 125 6 0k adel 8 698 8 8 CENTER naa aa maa CHI 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels 3 Usethe cursor buttons to select an AUX fader and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set the send level If the aux send is configured post fader Pre fader Post fader Aux Sends on page 97 youll have to raise the channel s regular fader as well If the Option I O fader mode is still selected simply raise the fader 01V Owner s Manual 96 Chapter 9 Aux Sends 01V Owner s Manual For Effects Returns 1 amp 2 Use the AUX buttons to select an aux send The effects returns rotary controls now function as effects returns aux send controls for the selected aux send and an AUX page similar to the one shown below appears RUx1 PRE POST J 1 MASTER 6 6dB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 00 i co i co 00 00 d 00 00 00 i 142 113 14 115 16 IRTN1 IRTNZ HALL CHORUS POST rosr post post pos 00 co oo 00 0D co Turn up the rotary contro
55. 0 Mics 22 dB 16 dB 2 dB ba 5i nels 1 12 amp 61 6 mV 123 mV 616 mV 16 600 Q Lines TRS phone jack 26 4 dB 10 dB 24 dB balanced 3 1 23 V 2 45 V 12 3 V 20 26 dB 20 dB 6 dB B 38 8 mV 77 5 mV 388 mV TRS phone jack Input channels Leno ines las 13 16 m 4 dB 10 dB 24 dB balanced 1 23 V 2 45 V 12 3 V 5 10 10 4 dBV Phono ZTR IN L R TOKE 6002 Lines B16mv 1 58 unbalanced Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of 4 dB 1 23 V the nominal output level when the 01V is set to maximum gain all faders and level controls at maximum positions 2 3 of input channels 1 12 Analog Outputs Input channel XLR type connectors are balanced pin 1 ground pin 2 hot pin 3 cold Input channel phone jacks are balanced tip hot ring cold sleeve ground Where dB represents a specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 V rms For 2TR IN levels O dBV is referenced to 1 00 V rms Input channels 1 16 and ST IN use linear 20 bit 128 times oversampling A D converters 48 V DC phantom powering switched in 6 channel blocks 1 6 7 12 available via the XLR type connectors Actual For Use Output Level Connection Source With Max Before Connector in Console Impedance Nominal Nominal Clip 4 dB
56. 01V Setup data See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Other Functions 193 Other Functions In this chapter Assigning Faders amp On Buttons 194 Using the Oscillator EA bae 202 Setting 01 Preferences S su eX Aa snus MSI Fr ROC 203 the 03V wiesen eno enda enc fa ROO da 204 Calibrating the Faders 204 01V Owner s Manual 194 Chapter 15 Other Functions Assigning Faders amp On Buttons The faders and ON buttons of input channels 1 though 16 and the stereo output master can be assigned functions other than their regular functions Input channel faders 1 through 4 for example can be used to control bus out master levels which do not have their own dedicated faders These assignments are active only when REMOTE page 1 is displayed Select another page and the ON buttons and faders perform their regular functions Four assignment sets can be stored in banks 1 through 4 Use the REMOTE button to locate REMOTE page 1 as shown below INTERNAL PARAMETER J INITIALIZE While this page is displayed faders and ON buttons perform the functions assigned to them here not their regular functions Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 and MASTER to select the channels whose ON buttons and faders you want to reass
57. 1 1 1 1 HALL CHORUS pg oo co co co co O G anaana 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them Parameters are explained in the following sections Metering Effects Returns Effects returns signal levels can be metered on the EFFECT and VIEW pages See Using the Effects on page 123 and Viewing Effects Returns Settings on page 130 Applying EQ to Effects Returns Effects returns feature four band parametric EQ See EQ on page 61 for more infor mation The EQ can be turned on or off and the EQ curve viewed on the VIEW page See Viewing Effects Returns Settings on page 130 for more information Muting Effects Returns _ Effects returns can be turned on and off i e muted using the effects returns ON buttons When an effects returns is on its ON button lights up 01V Owner s Manual Setting Effects Returns Levels 131 Setting Effects Returns Levels Effects return levels are controlled using the effects return e dies i rotary controls 1 RETURN 2 To adjust the level of an effects return press the HOME but ton and then use the rotary controls Rotary control operation depends on the selected Fader mode See Faders plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information The selected fader mode is shown on the display See Display on page 28 for mor
58. 1 can be fed to Effect 2 and Effects return 2 can be fed to Effect 1 Effects settings can be stored in the effects library as programs or with all mix settings in mix scenes The effect library consists of 42 preset programs and 57 user programs User programs allow you to store your own effects programs which can be titled for easy identification See Effects Library on page 132 for more information External effects processors can be patched into the 01V using the aux sends Onboard Dynamics Processors Dynamics processors providing compressor gate ducking expander and compander are available on input channels 1 through 16 the stereo output and the aux sends That s equivalent to 22 dynamics processors Dynamics processors can be self triggering 1 the signal being processed is used as the trigger signal or triggered by a signal from another channel Dynamics settings can be stored in the dynamics library as programs or with all mix settings in mix scenes The dynamics library consists of 40 preset programs and 40 user programs User programs allow you to store your own dynamics programs which can be titled for easy identification See Dynamics Library on page 173 for more informa tion Option 1 0 amp Digital I O The 01V features a single slot for an optional Option I O card providing eight digital inputs input channels 17 through 24 and eight assignable digital outputs Option I O provides a direct digital
59. 10 is recalled on 01V A and MIDI Program Change 10 is transmitted hence scene memory 10 is also recalled on 01V B This assumes that the initial Program Change assignment table is being used By editing the Program Change to scene memory assignments Program Change 10 could be used to recall a different scene memory on 01V B or 01V A could be set to transmit a different Program Change when scene memory 10 is recalled 01V A 01V B MIDI Program Change 10 In the following example program or patch 5 is selected on the MIDI keyboard and MIDI Program Change 5 is transmitted hence scene memory 5 is recalled on the 01V This assumes that the initial Program Change assignment table is being used By editing the Program Change to scene memory assignments Program Change 5 could be used to recall a different scene memory on the 01V 01V MIDI keyboard i mm 5 In the following example Program Change 26 has been entered into a song on the MIDI sequencer When the song is played MIDI Program Change 26 is transmitted at the specified location and scene memory 26 is recalled automatically on the 01V Since the 01V outputs Program Change messages when mix scenes are recalled mix scene recalls can be recorded to the MID
60. 18 dB XLR 3 32 type STEREO OUT L R 1502 600 QL id 23V 616V balanced 4 dB 18 dB TRS phone jack OMNI OUT 1 4 1500 10 Li nes 23v 616V balanced 10 dBV 44 dBV 2TR OUT L R 600 Q 10 Lines 316 mV 1 58 V Phono unbalanced 4 dB 18 dB TRS phone jack MONITOR OUT L R 150Q 10 Li ndi nes 6 16 balanced 8 Q phones 4 mW 25 mW Stereo phone jack PHONES 100 Q 5 40 Q phones 12mW 75 mW unbalanced 1 3 STEREO OUT XLR type connectors are balanced pin 1 ground pin 2 hot pin 3 cold OMNI MONITOR OUT TRS phone jacks are balanced tip hot ring cold sleeve ground PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced tip send ring return sleeve ground For 2TR OUT 0 is referenced to 1 00 V rms Where dB represents a specific voltage 0 dB is referenced to 0 775 V rms STEREO OUT uses 20 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters OMNI OUT 1 4 and MONITOR OUT use 18 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters 01V Owner s Manual Digital Audio Inputs Digital Audio Inputs 269 Connection Format Wordlength Level Connector DIGITAL 0 5 STEREO IN COAXIAL IEC 60958 24 bit 75 Q Phono 1 De emphasis is automatically processed when input signal contains emphasis Digital Audio Outputs Connection Format Wordlength Level Con
61. 4 00 kHz 12 6 kHz make the sound clearer 4 5 1 8 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 1 0 dB 2 0 dB 0 0 dB Use when recording 40 Narrator 105 2 707 Hz 2 52 kHz 10 0 kHz Narration 4 7 0 63 01V Owner s Manual Solo Monitors amp Meters 75 Solo Monitors amp Meters In this chapter About Monitor amp Gamepad end wp Rees 76 Monitor Outputs 15s reres Pid ewe ease tues awd ue So eed 77 PHONES ca aa xD ea CA CRE e 77 Twosttack on DO OY N 77 ieee RE Rae ec Eo head Bu ate 78 Using MORIIDIS o p rou Eee etu are 78 Monitor Block Diagram 56 9 arde Reda o Motos KERN OR 79 Solo DEVO eque E adatta d 80 Solo aga acce oe ae eR NL eee 81 Solo Block ee 82 Sigtial Levels orcum cc ta C Y D oboe Ce AID 83 Main stereo Meters coc eod us ecd one S sd er nl 84 Peak Hold Mist itio e Eun FS ac daa dta ici 84 Setting the Metering Point aa von asa cep A dr Ra C oA E e ag ay 85 Option I O Meters input channels 17 24 85 Effects Setid Meters re eda oes RR ace P
62. 99 This parameter determines how much of the delayed sig nal is fed back into the delay 0 is no feedback 99 is maximum feedback Negative values are the same except the feedback signal is phase reversed The Channel Delays on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are permanently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their Channel Delays are linked so adjustments can be made with either channel selected 01V Owner s Manual 46 Chapter 5 Input Channels Muting Input Channels ON Input channels can be turned on and off 1 muted using the ON buttons When a channel is on its ON button lights up To turn on or off an input channel from 1 through 16 select a fader mode other than Option I O or Remote and then press an ON button from 1 through 16 To turn on or off an input channel from 17 through 24 press the OPTION I O button and then press an ON button from 17 through 24 The ON buttons on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are per manently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their ON buttons are linked ON buttons can be grouped together for multi channel muting using a single ON button See Grouping Mutes on page 56 for more information Setting Input Channel Levels Input channel levels are controlled using the motorized 60 mm fade
63. About the 01V EQ cece cee ce cence he 62 Adjusting the BO oc ees do e FI RIP 63 EQ SPECS cicuta xA ER RO S ER EX OW Ra V eee 66 By Passi the Es cag caca era RU NCC uci e a E NR 66 Reset the EQ onus REC o a Ra CUN eaae Cea MGR D Pn 66 EC HF sace ra di eR Lu e ace Cd e d boat i ec 67 Preset EQ Program List ss iuo eec Oe kn oc a c acia RR gk n Dee CS 67 5 FQ Programs serre eA CR Shute ia Rea deaf 68 Recalling EQ Programs A d dee ret E de e ea 69 Editing EQ Program Titles o cO E aor o CR GER ICE 70 Preset EO Parameters comete ace epo p E NOR 71 01V Owner s Manual 62 Chapter 6 EQ About the 01V EQ Input channels 1 through 16 the effects returns aux sends and stereo out all feature four band parametric EQ with variable gain frequency Q and ON OFF parameters Input channels 17 through 24 feature a simplified two band parametric EQ See the Block Diagram on page 24 for the exact location of each EQ section The high and low bands of each EQ can be used as shelving peaking or HPF High Pass Filter and LPF Low Pass Filter respectively EQ settings can be stored in the EQ library as programs or with all mix settings in mix scenes The EQ library consists of 40 preset programs and 40 user programs User pro grams allow you to store frequently used EQ settings which can be titled fo
64. Aux 3 4 Pan AUX 4 Pre Post Aux 3 4 Pan HOME Input Meter Rtn Output Meter Omni Out Meter St Out Meter Metering Point 01V Owner s Manual 18 Chapter 3 Touring the 01V SEL SOLO ON buttons amp Faders 15 16 STEREO MASTER 1 RETURN 2 SEL SEL SEL 10 10 20 20 a 60 60 ee 13 14 15 16 5 17 18 1 0 1 22 23 24 MASTER SEL buttons The SEL buttons are used to select channels for parameter editing input channels 1 through 24 effects returns 1 and 2 aux sends 1 through 4 effects sends 1 and 2 and the stereo output Press SEL button 13 14 or 15 16 repeatedly to select input channels 13 and 14 or 15 and 16 respectively Since most functions on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are linked together the only time you ll need to select either chan nel 13 or channel 14 likewise 15 or 16 is to set the Phase or Pan for a channel individ ually The number of the selected channel appears in the lower right corner of the display See Display on page 28 for more information Normally SEL buttons 1 through 8 select channels 1 through 8 When the OPTION I O button is pressed
65. Change 01V Initial Default User NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CH1 CHANNEL CH2 CHANNEL CH3 CHANNEL CH4 CHANNEL CH5 CHANNEL CH6 CHANNEL CH7 CHANNEL CH8 CHANNEL CH9 CHANNEL CH10 CHANNEL CH11 CHANNEL CH12 CHANNEL CH13 14 CHANNEL CH15 16 CHANNEL RETURN1 CHANNEL RETURN2 MASTER AUX1 MASTER AUX2 MASTER AUX3 MASTER AUX4 MASTER BUS1 MASTER BUS2 MASTER BUS3 MASTER BUS4 MASTER EFFECT1 MASTER EFFECT2 MASTER ST OUT CHANNEL CH1 CHANNEL CH2 CHANNEL CH3 CHANNEL CH4 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL 01V Owner s Manual Control Change 01V Initial Default CHANNEL CHANNEL 01V Parameter to Control Change Table 275 Parameter CHANNEL CHANNEL CH13 14 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH15 16 RETURN1 CHANNEL MASTER RETURN2 MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER EFFECT1 MASTER MASTER EFFECT2 CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CH16 CHANNEL CHANNEL RETURN1 L RETURN1 R CHANNEL RETURN2 L CHANNEL RETURN2 R BALANCE ST OUT FADER EFF1 SEND CH1 FADER EFF1 SEND CH2 FADER EFF1 SE
66. DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone control N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction Te S DLY BAL 0 100 Distortion and delay balance 0 distortion 100 delayed distortion DELAY 0 0 2725 0 ms Delay time DLY NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Feedback gain plus values for normal phase E 9 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed MOD 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ NOTE DEPTH 0 100 Modulation depth Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 3 TEMPO 25 300 bps determine DELAY and FREQ 1 H3 JJ BE 4 4 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 H3 BI B4 4 4 4 3 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 MULTI FILTER Three band parallel filter 24 dB octave Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF LPF BPF Filter 1 type low pass high pass band pass TYPE 2 HPF LPF BPF Filter 2 type low pass high pass band pass TYPE 3 HPF LPF BPF Filter 3 type low pass high pass band pass FREQ 1 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ 2 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ 3 28 Hz 16 0 kHz Filter 3 frequenc
67. Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call DATA Oddddddd ddO function Oddddddd ddi number Oddddddd dd2 titlel If data is empty TITLEs are not transmitted Oddddddd ddn title n EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive If 01V receives a bulk request for an empty memory TITLEs are not transmitted function number 0 99 mem 0 99 0x7f edit buffer for response 1 99 mem 1 99 0x7f edit buffer for Rx 0x30 scene title 0x31 eq lib title 0 79 library 1 80 for response 40 79 library 41 80 for Rx 0x32 dynamics lib title 0 79 library 1 80 for response 40 79 library 41 80 for Rx 0x33 eff lib title 0 98 library 1 99 for response 42 98 library 43 99 for Rx PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST type 0x02 function call title Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS this message will be received When Parameter Change ECHO is ON and the 01V itself did not receive the message the message will be echoed When this is received the title of the corresponding memory library will be transmitted Transmission When Parameter Change ECHO is ON and the 01V itself did not receive the message the message will be echoed STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n parameter request n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code
68. Effects Return Rotary controls don t function as expected Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode See Faders plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information Cannot access input channels 17 through 24 Input channels 17 through 24 are available only when an optional Option I O card is installed See About Option I O Cards on page 216 for more information Cannot select the HI MID and LO MID EQ bands on input channels 17 through 24 Input channels 17 through 24 feature 2 band EQ so these bands can not be selected Cannot send signals from input channels 17 through 24 to aux sends 3 and 4 This is correct Input channels 17 through 24 can only be sent to aux sends 1 and 2 See About the Aux Sends on page 94 for more infor mation Input signals 1 through 8 appear on input channels 17 through 24 Probably because the inputs have been swapped See Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 on page 51 for more information Input signals are present but the stereo output is dead Raise the STEREO fader and turn on the STEREO ON button Make sure that the input channels are routed to the stereo output See Routing Input Channels on page 49 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 254 Troubleshooting Symptom Input signals are present but the monitor output and phones are dead Advice Make sure that the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set t
69. M 00100000 20 m 00100000 20 d 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01010000 50 P 00100000 20 m EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Control Change Assignment Table Bulk Dump Format STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000010 02 352 342 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 01100000 60 01001100 4c LU 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 ui 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01000011 43 e 00100000 20 Oddddddd ds Control Change Table 114x3bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive All data is 7 bit data CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGNMENT TABLE BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c T 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 x 00100000 20 id 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 E 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01000011 43 Cc 00100000 20 11110111 7 End Of Exclusive 01V Owner s Manual YAMAHA Digital Mixing Console Internal Parameters Date 01 Feb 1998
70. Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Two 01Vs amp two ADAT Interface Recorders 245 Monitors Power Amp Headphones Personal computer running MIDI software 01V A MONITOR wordclock slave PHONES n Digital wordclock master OUT Digital in SYNC OPTION I O 0o00 OOOO Digital out DAT recorder wordclock slave MIDI IN interface Digital in DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL 00 00 00 00 Digital out TO HOST DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT Digital multitrack B wordclock slave TO HOST OUT Digital in OPTION I O YAMAHA MIDI IN Digital out MIDI OUT 01V B wordclock slave 01V Owner s Manual 246 Chapter 18 5 Examples 01V amp Tascam Interface Recorder This example shows how the 01V can be used with an 8 track digital tape recorder or 8 track hard disk recorder featuring a Tascam Digital Audio Interface TDIF 1 con nection to create a 16 input 8 track
71. PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF A variation on program 32 Total EQ 3 1 5 dB 0 5 dB 2 0 dB 4 0dB Can also be used 66 Hz 841 Hz 1 88kHz 15 1 kHz With stereo inputs or external effect returns 0 28 0 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 3 5 88 10 0dB 3 5 dB 0 0 A variation on program 33 Bass Drum 3 1 The low and mid 118 Hz 315 Hz 4 23 kHz 20 1 kHz range is removed 2 10 0 4 0 4 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 0 0 dB 42 0dB 3 5 dB 0 0 A variation on program 34 Snare Drum 3 3 It creates a thick 223 Hz 561 Hz 4 23 kHz 4 00 kHz sound 4 5 2 8 0 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 9 0 dB 41 5dB 42 0dB 0 0dB A variation on program 35 Tom tom 2 5 Emphasizes the mid 88 Hz 210 Hz 5 33 kHz 16 9 kHz ang high range 4 5 1 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF ala 4 5 48 13 0dB 4 5 48 2 5dB A variation on program 99 Hz 472Hz 2 37kHz 10 0 kHz 13 8 10 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 5dB 1 5dB 6 0 0 0 Use for the low range of 37 Piano Low a piano sound recorded 187 Hz 397 Hz 6 72 kHz 12 6 2 in stereo 10 6 3 2 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 5 5dB 4 1 5dB 5 0dB 3 0dB_ Use for the high range 38 Piano High of a piano sound 187 Hz 397 Hz 6 72 kHz 5 65 kHz recorded in stereo 10 6 3 2 2 0 1 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 1 5dB 18 0dB 1 0dB 3 0dB Use when recording to 39 Fine EQ Cass or from cassette tape to 74 Hz 1 00 kHz
72. Preferences on page 203 a warning message appears if digital signals from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In or Option I O inputs are not wordclock synchronized with the 01V If this message appears configure the external device as wordclock master When an MY8 AE Option I O card is installed the OPTION SLOT switch is replaced by four SLOT switches as shown below WORD CLOCK SELECT J AUTO D Nm INT 2 These switches are used to select pair of AES EBU digital inputs as the wordclock source This window displays the status of the 01V wordclock 44 1k indicates that the 01V is locked to a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz When the word clock source is changed the word LOCK appears indicating that the 01V is in the process of locking to the new source If the external wordclock source is lost the word UNLOCK appears This condition typically occurs when the external wordclock source is turned off or the cable car rying the wordclock signal has been disconnected When a CD player is connected to the Digital Stereo In the only available sampling rate is 44 1 kHz When a DAT is connected the sampling rate is determined by the DAT Some DATs record at a fixed sampling rate while others allow the user to choose typi cally between 44 1 kHz and 48 kHz 01V Owner s Manual Digital Stereo Out 211 Digital Stereo Out The stereo output signal is output digitally in Consumer format from
73. REC HER LAC e 187 Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages 188 Undoing Mix Scene 189 Protecting Scene 189 Contents vii Editing Scene Memory Titles 190 Renumbering Scene 190 Setting a Fade IF QUE CEP 191 Recalling Scene Data 5 192 15 Other Functions 193 Assigning Faders amp On Buttons 194 Using the Oscillator e Oy rae OY ac Seen 202 Setting D DV Sa ot 203 Initializing the boe uos satiat ted Oed ctor s ex d Ce te aa 204 Calibrating the Faders a Aot cale 204 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs 205 About Wordclocks OR dA dL ANA RC 206 Setting the Wordclock is etin oe yes eh dale a Diodes e RO acne pce 209 Digital Stereo Qut Ses bbs d cito t pala dodo cale wa eu Ban Sata hu 211 Output Dien DIRE OU IG x va ODORE E OO CEP T AQUA 212 Digital Stereo ln Da cd ORE cp 213 Cascading OLV Sai ain spei oa eae ente Oe ipa aite acd atta 214 About Option I O Cards
74. Routing switches work in conjunction with Panpots to feed signals through to the left and right channels of the stereo out and the odd and even bus outs The following table 01V Owner s Manual 50 Chapter 5 Input Channels shows how it works Routing Pan Signal Destination m Signals are fed equally to bus outs 1 and 2 and the left and right CENTER channels of the stereo out Q Signals are fed to bus out 1 and the left channel of the stereo 16 out Signals are fed to bus out 2 and the right channel of the stereo Rib out The Routing switches on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are perma nently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their Routing switches are not linked Monitoring Input Channels Input channels can be monitored using the monitor out or phones See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information Input Channels amp Aux Sends Signals from input channels 1 through 16 can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4 while those from input channels 17 through 24 can be sent to aux sends 1 and 2 Input chan nel sends can be configured as either pre fader or post fader sends When aux sends are paired aux send panpots become available on each input channel See Aux Sends on page 93 for more information Input Channels amp the Omni Outs Direct signals from input channels 1 through 16 can be selected for the omni
75. SELECT eo 0 LISTEN cds PAN TOST Meter BUS 4 Meter master fader BUS ag OUTPUT ON SELECT O E LISTEN TO ST to MONITOR 01V Owner s Manual Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram 113 Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram In this diagram bus outs 1 and 2 are paired BUS AUX EFF ST 1234123412LR Meter pa master fader Meter i BUS 1 BUS H E LISTEN H i TO ST BUS 2 Meter master fader 4 i o BUS2 LISTEN n H d oo TO ST Bus i PAN Meter master fader Meter ic B Unchanged 1 959 BUS 3 H LISTEN H 2 TOST BUS 4 PAN Meter master fader ON Meter BUS 4 BUS 4 LISTEN TO ST 55 01V Owner s Manual Omni Outs 115 Omni Outs In this chapter About the Omni Outs ccc ccc ce ee he e 116 OMIT Outside vane ere este cte 116 Assigning Omm OUS uni epu x RE RERO eA Ca d rade 116 oe er n ec CUM 117 Omni Out Block Diagram o o oce aes caa eoe a Qe Ro ab 118 01V Owner s Manual 116 Chapter 11 Omni Outs About the Omni Outs The 01V s four omni outs can be used as aux send outputs bus out outputs additional stereo outputs or post fader direct outp
76. Signals to the Stereo Bus The bus outs can be routed to the Stereo bus and used as sub groups during mixdown Initially odd bus outs are panned to the left and even bus outs to right 1 Use the PAN ROUTING button to locate PAN ROUT page 3 a shown below BUS MASTER J 8051 BUSZ BUSS TOST TOST TO ST TO ST PAN i PAN i PAN i PAN G 00 y 00 9 vic rics 16 ris HALL CHORUS d o 2 Usethe cursor buttons to select the TO ST switches and the ENTER but ton PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to turn them on 3 Usethe cursor buttons to select the panpots and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Including center there are 33 pan positions Hard left Center Hard right 116 13 12 11 9R29R3 R16 01V Owner s Manual Pairing Bus Outs 111 Pairing Bus Outs Bus outs 1 and 2 and bus outs 3 and 4 can be paired together for stereo signal process ing When paired the master faders and ON buttons are linked for simultaneous con trol Making Bus Out Pairs 1 Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 4 as shown below ALPAIR INPUT j 49 2 5 OP 4 5 6 7 EP 2 9 SP 10 11 p S mono xz HONOx2 2 2 2 BUS 1 4 2 509 4149 2 5 0x2 mono x
77. These controls are used to adjust the pan and EQ of the selected channel Dedicated rotary controls for PAN EQ frequency F and EQ gain G and EQ HIGH HI MID LO MID and LOW buttons make for quick operation When the EQ AUTO SCRFEN option is turned on and an EQ control is adjusted the EQ page appears automatically Likewise for the PANPOT AUTO SCRFEN option and PAN control See Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 for more information 3 Contrast This control is used to adjust the display contrast Adjust it so that the display is clear and easy to read from your viewing position You may need to readjust it when viewing the display from a different height or angle 4 Stereo Output Meters These 12 segment LED bar type meters display the stereo output signal levels Parameter Wheel Cursors amp Enter 1 DEC 1 INC PARAMETER gt CURSOR ENTER v E gt These controls are used to navigate around the display pages and edit parameters See Getting Around the User Interface on page 27 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Top Panel Controls 17 Function Buttons UTILITY MIDI SETUP VIEW MEMORY DYNAMICS EQ ATT Q DELAY ROUTING Function buttons are used to access the following function pages Related pages are grouped togethe
78. Titles 135 Editing Effects ca Fy ya d VO IR ve vere E 136 Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters 137 Effects Pardmelets iu es esee queer v Ra hes es od 138 Block Diagram yo ee eaten a ep ede Cx a anna 159 Dynamics Processors 161 About the Dynamics Processors 5 det v eed a e o CR e 162 Preset Dynamics Programs 163 Using the Dynamics Processors 164 Editing the Dynamics Processors 166 Processor Types iud Dad auos uu pU a FOEDE Ro cb dace 167 Dynamics Library quiate cec ue eb etc at acl ded adea de 173 Storing Dynamics Programs 174 Recalling Dynamics Programs 175 Editing Dynamics Program Titles 176 Preset Dynamics Program Settings toscana wee eka deena ER 177 Scene Memories 183 About Scene Memories a Eb bee nc b reb a 184 Whats Stored in Scene Memories 184 About the Edit Buffer amp Indicator 185 scene Memory 00 cs sare Rt peur ree ested ees SR 185 Scene Memory Display Area 185 Storing Mix Scenes rr serierne a EXER Ea E 186 Recalline Mix Scenes
79. Vocal2 Chorus Click Erase Announcer Limiter Limiter2 Total Comp1 Total Comp2 Type COMP COMP EXPAND COMPAND H COMPAND S COMP COMP COMP Parameter Value Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 26 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 3 Release ms 331 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 39 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 226 Threshold dB 33 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 2 0 Knee 2 Release ms 284 Threshold dB 14 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 1 Out gain dB 2 5 Width dB 18 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 20 Out gain dB 3 0 Width dB 90 Release ms 3 90 5 Threshold dB 0 Ratio 1 Attack ms 0 Out gain dB 0 0 Knee hard Release ms 319 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 94 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee hard Release ms 447 Threshold dB 16 Ratio 1 6 Attack ms 11 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 1 Release ms 180 Description A variation on program 32 A variation on program 32 intended for chorus vocals Expander program to remove click track sounds that may bleed out of the musicians monitor headphones Hard compander program to reduce the music level when the announcer speaks making the voice clearer A soft knee compander program with a slow release A compressor program using the peak sto
80. When the oscillator is assigned to a bus the oscillator signal has priority and other sig nals routed to that bus are muted 01V Owner s Manual Setting 01V Preferences 203 Setting 01V Preferences The Preferences are used to customize the operation of the 01V 1 Use the UTILITY button to locate UTILITY page 2 or 3 as shown below PREFERENCES 1 J UTILITY screen E ae CONFiAMATION DELAY UNITS GONE TAMATION GEE MEM meter ELE 2 LIBRARY LIST ORDER HALL CHORUS HALL CHORUS GG 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them EQ AUTO SCREEN When this option is turned on EQ page 1 or OPTION page 2 appears when the selected channel F or G control is adjusted or the selected channel HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW button is pressed See Adjusting the EQ on page 63 for more information PANPOT AUTO SCREEN When this option is turned on PAN ROUT page 1 or OPTION page 2 appears when the selected channel PAN control is adjusted See Pan ning Input Channels on page 47 for more information STORE CONFIRMATION When this option is turned on the Title Edit dialog box which also functions as a confirmation appears whenever a mix scene or library pro gram is stored useful for preventing mix
81. Wordclocks Unlike analog audio equipment digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio is transferred from one device to another Otherwise the digital audio might not be read correctly and audible noise glitches or clicks may occur Synchroni zation is achieved using what s called a wordclock which is a clock signal for synchro nizing all the digital audio words in an audio system Note that wordclocks are not the same as SMPTE or MIDI timecode which are used to synchronize audio recorders MIDI sequencers and so on Wordclock synchronization refers to the synchronization of the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device Ina typical digital audio system one device acts as the wordclock master and the other devices act as wordclock slaves that synchronize to the master wordclock signal If the 01V is the only digital audio device in your system no special wordclock settings are required and the 01V synchronizes to its own internal wordclock Add a DAT recorder or digital multitrack recorder however and you must decide which device to use as wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves Even when you ve done this and configured your system it may be necessary to change the wordclock settings in certain situations such as when recording from a DAT or CD player The wordclock signal runs at the same frequency as the sampling rate The 01V gener ates its own wordclock at 44 1 kHz the ind
82. a 2 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level COMPANDER HARD amp SOFT The hard H and soft S companders comprise of compressor expander and limiter The limiter prevents output signals from exceeding 0 dB The compressor compresses signals that exceed the threshold level The expander attenuates signals below the threshold and width The soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1 5 1 while the hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5 1 The following two graphs show typical compander curves The one on the left shows the hard compander The one on the right the soft compander i Threshold 7i 7 a 1 7 r 30 ial 1 ad PA 1 1 7 1 25 n 4 Threshold 71 7 a 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 n h 2 f an j i Output Level dB Output Level dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB Input Level dB Hard Compander Soft Compander 01V Owner s Manual 172 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Parameter Range THRESHOLD 54 dB to 0 dB 55 steps OUT GAIN 18 dB to 0 dB 0 5 dB steps WIDTH 1 dB 90 dB 1 dB steps ATTACK 0 120 ms 1 ms steps 5 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz RELEASE 6 ms 46 s fs 44 1
83. also be used for A B mix comparisons To compare different mix settings for example store them to two scene memories Recall one mix scene and then the other Recall Undo will then toggle between the two mixes Protecting Scene Memories Scene memories can be protected individually against accidental overwriting by using the Protect function When a scene memory is protected mix scenes cannot be stored in it and scene memory data received via MIDI Bulk Dump is ignored 1 Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 1 as shown below TITLE LEDIT 38 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a scene memory Only scene memories that contain a mix scene can be protected Use the cursor buttons to select the PROTECT switch 4 Press the ENTER button When a scene memory is protected the word PROTECT appears next to it in the scene memory list and a closed padlock appears in the scene memory area on the display To turn off the protection select the PROTECT switch and then press the ENTER button 01V Owner s Manual 190 Chapter 14 Scene Memories Editing Scene Memory Titles Scene memory titles can be edited using the Title Edit function 1 Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 1 as shown below MEMORY J TITLE EDIT SG 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a scene memory 3 Use the cursor button
84. bus outs are paired See Pairing Bus Outs on page 111 for more information No output from the OMNI OUTs Cannot send channel signals to the effects processors Check the OMNI OUT source assignments See Assigning Omni Outs on page 116 for more information If the effects sends are configured post fader the regular channel fader must be raised in addition to the aux send fader See Using the Effects on page 123 for more information The effects send meters indicate that signals are being sent to the effects but the processed sounds cannot be heard Processed signals are returned via the effects returns See Returning Processed Signals on page 124 for more information Cannot store effects programs Effects settings cannot be stored to preset programs 1 through 42 Try storing to user programs 43 through 99 See Storing Effects Pro grams on page 133 for more information Cannot recall effects programs 19 and 42 to Effect 1 These effects programs use the HQ PITCH and FREEZE type effects and can only be recalled to Effect 2 See Preset Effects Programs on page 121 for more information Cannot feed effects return 1 to Effect 1 or effects return 2 to Effect 2 This is to prevent signal loops See Using the Effects on page 123 for more information Cannot store dynamics programs Dynamics settings cannot be stored to preset programs 1 through 40 Try storin
85. connection The digital multitrack recorder derives its wordclock from the 01V s Option I O connection The sampling rate is the same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded A CD player could be connected instead of the DAT recorder In this case the sampling rate would be fixed at 44 1 kHz the industry standard sampling rate for music CDs Setting the Wordclock 209 Setting the Wordclock The 01V can generate its own internal wordclock at 44 1 kHz the industry standard sampling rate for music CDs or synchronize to an external wordclock of between 44 1 kHz 1096 and 48 kHz 6 which can be sourced from the Digital Stereo In ora digital Option I O card Note If the 01V is the only digital audio device in your system you do not need to change the wordclock source It can be left at internal 44 1 kHz 1 Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 1 as shown below Ql WORD CLOCK SELECT J GO Note When the wordclock source is changed audible glitches or clicks may be produced so it s a good idea to turn down the volume on all monitor amps and headphones first 2 Usethe cursor buttons to select the SOURCE switches and the ENTER button to set them AUTO NAVIGATE This function checks all possible wordclock sources and then dis plays a dialog box recommending a suitable source Note that in some situations this function may not be able to recommend a suitable source The following dialog box
86. connection to modular digital multitrack recorders with cards for the following formats ADAT Tascam and AES EBU An Option I O card offering four analog outputs is also available See About Option I O Cards on page 216 for more information 01V Option I O cards are not interchangeable with the YGDAI cards used by the Yamaha 02R and 03D Digital Recording Consoles such as the CD8 AT The Coaxial DIGITAL STEREO IN and OUT allow direct connection to stereo digital recorders and other digital equipment Digital stereo signals can be routed to the Stereo bus for cascade operation or to input channels 13 14 for mixing and processing See Digital Stereo In on page 213 for more information Easy to Learn GUI Interface 01V operation is both logical and intuitive The 320 x 80 dot LCD display uses graphical icons to represent rotary controls switches and faders and provides a clear indication of the current mix settings and EQ curves Dedicated controls allow for quick EQ and pan adjustments Mixing functions and configuration settings are organized into dis play pages Parameter selection and editing is performed using the CURSOR ENTER 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons and PARAMETER wheel 01V Owner s Manual Key Feature Discussion 7 Scene Memories On many mixers the only way to store mix settings is with marker pen and masking tape With the 01V however virtually every mix setting can be stored in a mix scene using th
87. dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 238 Threshold dB 11 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 33 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 2 Release ms 749 Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 93 Out gain dB 1 5 Knee 4 Release ms 1 35 5 Description Compressor program to level the attack and volume level of a slap electric bass guitar Compressor program to control or emphasize the level of a synth bass Compressor program to brighten the tonal color of a piano A variation on program 19 using a deep threshold to change the entire attack and level Compressor program for electric guitar cutting and arpeg gio style backing performance The sound color can be varied using different playing styles Compressor program for acous tic guitar stroke and arpeg gio style backing performance Compressor program for strings A variation on program 23 intended for violas or cellos 01V Owner s Manual 180 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Title 25 Strings3 26 BrassSection 27 Syn Pad 28 SamplingPerc 29 Sampling BD 30 Sampling SN 31 Hip Comp 32 Solo Vocal1 01V Owner s Manual Type COMP COMP COMP COMPAND S COMP COMP COMPAND S COMP Parameter Value Threshold dB 17 Ratio 1 1 5 Attack ms 76 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 2 Release ms 186 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 18 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee
88. el oe 0z or OL 09 6 0 8 09 Ov RO AR or 1011 INO 09 5 app indui oz BUIWON z 0 820 01 roe 0 0 ver 3dO NO SOINVNAG o3 sng Nvd 13437 440 NO dSvHd jeubiq HSLSvN u31sviw oadals 4 eusa jeubiq A 01V Owner s Manual 258 Appendix General Display Messages Message BULK Byte Count Mismatch Meaning The byte count of the received Bulk Dump data is not cor rect BULK Check Sum Error The check sum of the received Bulk Dump data is not cor rect BULK Memory Protected The Bulk Dump data cannot be stored because the desti nation is write protected DIGITAL IN Sync Error This warning message appears if the Digital Stereo Coaxial In signal is not wordclock synchronized with the 01V Make sure that all digital equipment is wordclock synchro nized to a common wordclock source See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information This warn ing message can be disabled by turning off the DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION option in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 For Effect2 Only The selected effect program can be recalled
89. expander compander Powerful dynamics library with 40 preset programs and 40 user programs 320 x 80 dot LCD display Comprehensive MIDI implementation remote control MMC Bulk Built in MIDI interface and TO HOST port for quick and simple connection to a personal computer 15 motorized 60 mm faders 01V Owner s Manual 4 Chapter 1 Welcome to the 01V Key Feature Discussion Configuration The 01V provides a total of 24 inputs 12 mono input channels 1 through 12 2 stereo input channels 13 14 and 15 16 and 8 digital inputs 17 through 24 by means of an Option I O card The stereo output signal is available from the analog STEREO OUT coaxial DIGITAL STEREO OUT and can be assigned to the analog OMNI OUTs and Option I O digital outputs The four bus outputs and four aux sends can be assigned to the analog OMNI OUTs and Option I O digital outputs The Effect 1 and Effect 2 buses feed the onboard stereo multi effects processors whose signals are returned via effects returns 1 and 2 which feature four band parametric EQ Input channels 1 through 12 feature balanced XLR and phone jack connections with switchable phantom powering Input channels 13 through 16 feature phone jack connections Input channels 17 through 24 are accessed via an Option I O card Full feature input channels 1 through 16 feature an attenuator four band parametric EQ dynamics processor delay and can be assigned to aux sends 1 through 4 and effect
90. feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine DELAY 1 B b ddd Ja J 4 d 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 140 Chapter 12 Effects STEREO DELAY Basic stereo delay Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1350 0 ms Left channel delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left 1 NOTER channel DELAY Left channel feedback plus values for normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1350 0 ms Right channel delay time FB GL 99 to 49996 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right NOTER l channel DELAY Right channel feedback plus values for normal phase 0 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with NOTE L and NOTE R to 2 TEMPO 25 300 bps determine DELAY 1 H3
91. filer using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 230 Chapter 17 MIDI 01V Owner s Manual When a Control Change message is received while MIDI page 3 is displayed that Con trol Change is selected automatically making it easy to determine which Control Change is being transmitted when say the slider of an external MIDI controller is oper ated Using Control Changes In the following example 01V A Master fader is operated and MIDI Control Change 27 is transmitted hence the Master fader on 01V B is also operated This assumes that the initial Control Change assignment table is being used By editing the Control Change to parameter assignments Control Change 27 could be used to control a dif ferent parameter on 01V B or 01V A could be set to transmit a different Control Change when its Master fader is operated 01V A 01V B ag MIDI Control Change 27 In the following example an assignable MIDI controller on the MIDI keyboard is assigned Control Change 85 When this controller is adjusted Control Change 85 is transmitted hence the effects 1 send level for input channel 9 is adjusted on the 01V This assumes that the initial Control Change assignment table is being used By editing the Control Change
92. four bus outs can be used individually or in stereo pairs Signals from input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be routed to bus outs 1 through 4 See Routing Input Channels on page 49 for more information The 01V does not have dedicated bus out connections Instead bus outs must be assigned to the Option I O digital outputs or omni outs Option I O amp the Bus Outs Bus out signals can be assigned to the Option I O digital outputs See About Option Cards on page 216 for more information Omni Outs amp the Bus Outs Bus out signals can be assigned to the omni outs See Assigning Omni Outs on page 116 for more information Monitoring Bus Outs Bus outs can be monitored using the monitor out or phones See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information Metering Bus Outs Bus out signal levels can be metered on the HOME pages See Metering Signal Levels on page 83 for more information Routing Signals to the Bus Outs Signals from input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be routed to bus outs through 4 See Routing Input Channels on page 49 and Routing Effects Returns on page 131 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Setting Bus Out Master Levels 109 Setting Bus Out Master Levels Bus out master levels are controlled using the virtual faders on PAN ROUT page 3 1 Use the PAN ROUTING button to locate PAN ROUT page 3 a shown below
93. gain plus values for normal phase 0 enn feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time amp Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right NOTER channel DELAY R HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine NOTE FB 1 EB DLY Delay and early reflections balance 096 early 0 eves Doe reflections 100 delay S Hall L Hall TYPE Random Revers Type of early reflection simulation Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections Used conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 TEMPO DPS determine DELAY L DELAY R and FB DLY 1 H3 JJ Fa h 442 da d d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 153 Effects Parameters DELAY gt ER Delay and early reflections effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left 1 IEE channel DELA
94. however they select input channels 17 through 24 which are only available when an Option I O card is installed See SEL Buttons on page 32 for more information The SEL buttons 1 through 6 are also used to transmit MMC MIDI Machine Control Locate commands when REMOTE page 2 is displayed Finally SEL buttons are also used to make and break channel pairs Pairing Input Channels on page 52 and fader and mute groups Grouping Faders on page 55 and Grouping Mutes on page 56 SOLO buttons The SOLO buttons are used to solo channels input channels 1 through 16 and effects returns 1 and 2 Normally SOLO buttons 1 through 8 select channels 1 through 8 When the OPTION I O button is pressed however they select input channels 17 through 24 which are only available when an Option I O card is installed See Solo Buttons on page 33 for more information The SOLO buttons 1 through 16 can also be used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information ON buttons The ON buttons are used to turn channels on and off input channels 1 through 24 effects returns 1 and 2 aux sends 1 through 4 effects sends 1 and 2 and the stereo out 01V Owner s Manual Panel Controls 19 put Normally ON buttons 1 through 8 select channels 1 through 8 When the OPTION I O button is pressed however they select input channels 17 through 24
95. iet qe 216 Installing Option I O Cards aaa Ghee ee aa 218 Assigning Option I O Digital 219 Option I O Block Diagram 220 U7 525 a Bae ely EORR wees 221 MIDE Sc eal 222 MIDI nr e wh wae wie ee 222 NHDERecelye dridicatotezs3 o ea at aia eo ae ee 224 IVETE SOU ua et Soto ener poer o eiae Be 224 Program Change Scene Recall 227 Control Change Parameter 1 229 System Exclusive Parameter 231 sca tesla 232 eee DR FIGS COO ERECTO ed 234 MIDI Machine Control ss sd 4 eq dp dad fede pd ER 236 User Defined MIDECOntrollets 214 oin te e oe en thee c 238 Wel ate Qe iQ Cad eee et M n 239 18 System Examples 241 01V amp ADAT Interface 242 Two 01Vs amp two ADAT Interface Recorders 244 01V amp Tascam Interface 246 Two 01Vs amp two Tascam Interface Recorders 248 01 amp Pro Tools AES EBU 250 Trou
96. long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be compressed incorrectly Release times from 0 1 to 0 5 seconds are a good place to start RATIO This determines the amount of compression That is the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level For a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in output level The expander ratios are fixed 1 5 1 for the soft compander S and 5 1 for the hard compander H 01V Owner s Manual Dynamics Library 173 Dynamics Library Dynamics settings are stored as programs in the dynamics library which contains 40 preset programs 1 40 and 40 user programs 41 80 User programs are used to store custom dynamics settings which can be titled for easy identification The dynamics library can also be used to transfer settings from one dynamics processor to another For example the stereo out dynamics settings could be stored as a library program and then recalled to an aux send dynamics processor The unique collection of preset dynamics programs is designed for specific applications and instruments and provides a good reference and starting point when using the dynamics processors See page 177 for a complete list of the preset dynamics program
97. lt 1 039315 si uondo ue Ajuo si uonoes SIUL 9 3 puegz ino 10 077 Siseuduie eq va OS cea ence ete aoe rect 15 444 5 01V Owner s Manual 221 MIDI In this chapter MAID SCHO peat ee bc i 222 MIDI POTS TREE She ust coat tne Eat 222 MIDI Receive Indicators so cst oa PR CRGO KC COR Sa OL Ce da 224 a met m De sy 224 Program Change Scene 227 Control Change Parameter 229 System Exclusive Parameter Control 231 Bull Sonera adatta 232 Local Control skenor re qe nee RERO ENCORE RICE 234 MIDI Machine Control sv est 236 User Defined MIDI Controllers 238 Finke OIV C cede ed Narra 239 01V Owner s Manual 222 Chapter 17 MIDI MIDI amp the 01V The 01V can be used with MIDI in the following ways Program Change messages for mix scene recall Program Change Scene Recall on page 227 Control Change messages for real time parameter control
98. memories 189 Q Q adjusting 63 definition 296 Quantization definition 296 01V Owner s Manual Index 303 R 5 Solo about 76 Rack mounting 259 Safe channels mix scenes 192 AFL PEL 80 Rear panel 22 Sampling rate block diagram 82 Reassigning faders amp on buttons definition 296 modes 80 194 setting 209 setup 80 RECALL CONFIRMATION Scene memories stereo output 88 preference 203 about 184 using 81 Recalling definition 296 SOLO buttons dynamics programs 175 display area 185 about 18 effects programs 134 EQ programs 69 scene memories 187 undoing mix scene recalls 189 Receive channel MIDI 225 Recording solo mode 80 Releasing aux send pairs 101 bus out pairs 111 input channel pairs 53 REMOTE page 1 194 REMOTE page 2 236 REMOTE page 3 238 Renumbering scene memories 190 Request local control 234 MIDI bulk dump 232 Resetting the EQ 66 Return controls about 19 fader modes 35 REV CHORUS 148 REV FLANGE 149 REV SYMPHO 150 REV gt CHORUS 149 REV gt FLANGE 150 REV gt PAN 151 REV gt SYMPHO 151 REVERB HALL 138 REVERB PLATE 138 REVERB ROOM 138 REVERB STAGE 138 REVERSE GATE 139 Reverse phase 42 RING MOD 146 RK124 rack mount kit 259 ROTARY 145 Rotary controls display 30 Routing bus to stereo 110 effects returns 49 input channels 49 page 49 RTN output meter page 83 edit buffer 185 edit indicator 185 fade time 191 fade time page 191 memory 00 185 memory page 186 187 189 190 memory sor
99. message appears This warning message appears if digital signals from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In or Option I O inputs are not wordclock synchronized with the 01V Make sure that all digital equipment is wordclock synchro nized to a common wordclock source See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information UNLOCK appears in the Fs window of SETUP page 1 Make sure the external wordclock source is turned on and that the cable carrying the wordclock signal has not been disconnected See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information Cannot transmit or receive MIDI messages On MIDI page 1 check the following settings PORT Tx CH Rx CH and the Tx and Rx switches for Program Change Control Change etc See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information MIDI Program Change messages don t recall mix scenes Make sure that the 01V is configured to receive Program Change mes sages and that the MIDI Channels of the 01V and transmitting device match See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information Perhaps the Program Change being transmitted is not assigned to an 01V scene memory Check the mix scene to Program Change assign ment table See Program Change Scene Recall on page 227 for more information If the scene memory assigned to the received Program Change con tains no data it cannot be recalled MIDI Control Change messages don t control mix parameters Make s
100. mix scenes are recalled Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 4 as shown below aux 1 2 3 1 ST OUT STOUT HALL CHORUS Use the cursor buttons to select the SAFE CHANNEL switches and the ENTER button to set channels as safe SAFE CHANNEL switches appear highlighted for safe channels Use the cursor buttons to select a MODE ALL PARAM or FADER ONLY and the ENTER button to activate it In ALL PARAM mode all parameters are safe In FADER ONLY mode only the faders are safe All other parameters are updated when mix scenes are recalled Make sure the SAFE switch is set to ENABLE Use the cursor buttons to select the SAFE switch and then press the ENTER button to enable the Recall Safe function The SAFE switch works as a master Recall Safe on off so you don t have to set individ ual channels when you want a scene recall to update all channels Recall a mix scene See Recalling Mix Scenes on page 187 for more information When a mix scene is recalled and providing that the SAFE switch is set to ENABLE mix settings on safe channels remain the same If a mix scene containing paired channels fader group or mute group settings is recalled and one of the channels in the pair or group is set as a safe channel the pair or group is cancelled and only the non safe channel is updated Recall Safe settings are not stored in mix scenes They are however stored as part of the
101. nominal input level Signals input here can be monitored via the monitor out and phones when the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set to 2TRIN The stereo outputs of a master recorder can be con nected here for confidence monitoring and master playback By setting the 15 16 2TR IN switch to 2TR IN 2TR IN sig nals can be fed to input channels 15 and 16 for mixing with other signals 4 2TR OUT These are phono jacks with a 10 dBV nominal output level The 2TR OUT signal is the same as the stereo out signal A cassette deck DAT or MiniDisc deck connected here can be used to record the stereo mix 5 PHONES This is a stereo TRS phone jack to Phono plug Tip Sleeve Phono plug Tip Sleeve Tip left which a pair of stereo headphones can be 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring right connected for monitoring The phones signal is the same as the monitor out sig nal and the level is set using the phones level control Sleeve ground 01V Owner s Manual 22 Chapter 3 Touring the 01V Rear Panel CH 7 12 PHANTOM 48 GRRE EE CH 1 6 N ON Tela ON MONITOR OUT OMNI OUT R 4dB BAL Q TO HOST 4dB BAL 4dB BAL THRU OUT IN R L 4 3 2 1 0010000 OO Www OPTION I O POWER ON OFF jus D MONITOR OUT These are balanced 1 4 inch phone jacks Tip hot with 4 dB nominal output level Bal 1 4 TRS phone p
102. of use will appeal to both professional and semiprofessional users About this Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual contains all the information you ll need in order to operate your 01V Digital Mixing Console Use the table of contents to find general information and familiarize yourself with the organization of this manual and use the index to locate specific items A glossary of 01V related jargon is provided on page 293 Each chapter covers a specific section of the 01V The Input Channels Chapter for example explains all about input channels while the Scene Memories Chapter deals with scene memories The content of each chapter should be fairly obvious from its title Items such as EQ and dynamics which are available on input channels aux sends and the stereo output are explained in their own chapters Where possible the individual sections of a chapter are organized in order of signal flow The Input Channel Chapter for example starts with the input connectors and works through each input channel function finishing up at the buses 01V Installation Site the 01 on a stable surface somewhere that complies with the important informa tion at the front of this manual The 01V can be rack mounted using an optional rack mount kit 01V Owner s Manual 01V Features 3 01V Features 01V Sonic Specs Linear 20 bit 128 times oversampling A D converters Linear 20 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters STEREO OU
103. or Fostex CX 8 Two ADAT optical cables See Installing Option I O Cards on page 218 for MY8 AT installation instructions Wordclock Configuration For digital audio transfer digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized see About Wordclocks on page 206 In this example the digital multitrack recorder is wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves The 01V derives its wordclock from the Option I O digital input The DAT derives its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V The wordclock frequency which is the same as the sampling rate is set when the digital multitrack tape is formatted or first recorded For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorder the DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01V and digital multitrack recorder as wordclock slaves In this case the 01V would derive its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection and the digital multitrack recorder would derive its wordclock from the 01V s Option I O connection The sampling rate will be the same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded If a CD player is used instead of the DAT the sampling rate will be fixed at 44 1 kHz the industry standard for music CDs System Notes The digital IN and OUT connectors on the MY8 AT card are connected to the digital multitrack recorder using ADAT optical cables Onan Alesis ADAT 8 Track Digital Audio Recor
104. or POST ON Option I O Meters input channels 17 24 Signal level meters for input channels 17 through 24 and the Option I O outputs are displayed on the OPTION pages 1 Usethe OPTION 1 0 button to locate the OPTION pages Signal level meters for inputs 17 through 24 are displayed on OPTION page 1 as shown below The decibel value below each meter indicates the position of the corresponding fader The highlighted numbers 20 and 22 indicate that input channels 20 and 22 have been swapped with input channels 4 and 6 See Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 on page 51 for more information OPTION IN METER J PERK HOLD D FILTER CHORUS 28 21 22 23 24 Signal level meters for the Option I O outputs are displayed on OPTION page 3 as shown below The source assigned to each output is displayed below its meter These assignments are made on OPTION page 4 See Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information OPTION OUT METER J PEAK HOLD HALL CHORUS 3 3 BUS1BUSZ BUSS 6054 BUS1 BUSZBUSSBUS4 45 6 7 01V Owner s Manual 86 Chapter 7 Solo Monitors amp Meters Effects Send Meters 01V Owner s Manual Signal level meters for effects sends 1 and 2 are displayed on the VIEW pages Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to select an effects send and then press the MASTER SEL button 1 or EFF2 appears on the display indicating that an effects send is selecte
105. or right channels of the stereo output or the post fader direct out puts of input channels 1 through 16 Although the 01 is four bus mixer assigning the four bus outs and four aux sends to digital outputs allows eight track simultaneous recording 1 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 4 as shown below Ql OPTION OUT SELECT J 1 z 3 4 5 6 Z 5 E TET 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the switches and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Switches appear highlighted when selected as the output source Option digital outputs are automatically assigned to post fader direct outputs of input channels 1 through 12 when the corresponding D switch on PAN ROUT page 1 is turned on Likewise when a direct output is selected as the source for an Option I O output on this page the corresponding D switch is turned on on the PAN ROUT page See Routing Input Channels on page 49 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs 220 Option 1 0 Block Diagram gi ino uondo uondo pales nding uondo lt 9L SL HO lt lt lt sng lt t 5
106. pad ke veter ee RE ERROR 88 10 11 Contents Metering the Stereo Output 89 Routing Signals to the Stereo Output 89 Viewing Stereo Output Settings 89 Setting the Stereo Output Level 90 Muting the Stereo Output a o eb deb oo ora be dece a 90 Balancing the Stereo Output eR ERR a a Dn podes Ca Ide d o Ro cna 90 Applying EQ to the Stereo 90 Stereo Output Dynamics Processors 90 Stereo Output Delay ssori dean DU canto OR PER E CU 91 Stereo Output Block Diagram 92 AUX SeHdS oeste oai P DE A etes 93 About the Aux Sends osa este awe wie t aula ee nd 94 Option DO amp the Aux 94 Omni Outs amp the Aux Sends wins hes wad ene Pe 94 Monitoring Aux Sends 94 Metering Aux eRe or BIS 94 Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends 95 Pre tader Post fader Aux Sends 97 Viewing Aux Send Settings 98 Setting Aux Send Master Levels 99 M ting Aux Sends pite bd PRA spe a leu et 100 Applying BO to Aux Sends 100 Au
107. pad switch gain control or direct out They are somewhat simpler than input channels 1 through 16 in that they feature only an attenuator two band parametric EQ and can be assigned to aux sends 1 and 2 but not aux sends 3 and 4 Input channels 17 through 24 are accessed through the digital inputs of the Option I O slot See About Option I O Cards on page 216 for more information Inputs 17 through 24 can beswapped with inputs 1 through 8 See Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 on page 51 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Phantom Powering 41 Phantom Powering CH 1 6 Input channels 1 through 12 feature 48 phantom powering for use with condenser type microphones Phantom powering is supplied to the bal anced XLR 3 3 1 type connector and can be switched for inputs 1 through 6 and inputs 7 through 12 Phantom powering should be turned on only when a condenser type microphone is connected Warning Make sure that phantom powering is turned off when connecting an unbal anced source to an XLR input Pad Switches Input channels 1 through 12 feature 26 dB pad switches Input pads attenu ate the input signal by 26 dB allowing the input preamp to work with high level signals You may need to use a pad with hot signals from bass or snare drum microphones or hot line level signals PAD switch settings are not stored in scene memories Setting Input Channe
108. page 2 as shown below Qul cH1 CONTROL J i ay FADER EFFECT EG CENTER ATT aa EJ 4 bas 6 Io ico HRLL CHORUS co center EN G0 2 Be BlL SHEL 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels 3 Raise the fader of the channel to which you want to apply an effect This step is necessary because effects sends are initially configured as post fader sends If the channel fader is not raised no signal is fed to the effects sends See Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends on page 125 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 124 Chapter 12 Effects Use the cursor buttons to select an EFFECT fader and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set the effects send level For Effects Returns 1 amp 2 To prevent signal loops effects return 1 can be fed only to Effect 2 and effects return 2 can be fed only to Effect 1 Press the HOME button and then turn up the RETURN level control of the effects return to which you want to apply an effect This step is necessary because effects sends are initially configured as post fader sends If the channel fader is not raised no signal is fed to the effects sends See Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends on page 125 for more information Press the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to select an effects process
109. parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 TREMOLO Tremolo effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 HG GU Bet ddd 4 d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 HQ PITCH Effect 2 only High quality pitch shifter Parameter Range Description PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Pitch shift fine MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision DELAY 0 0 1000 0 ms Delay time NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine DELAY 1 H3 b JJ ddd Ja d 4 4 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 145 Effects Parameters DUAL PITCH Twin voice pitch shi
110. see SLOW and FAST parameters DRIVE 0 100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0 10 Accelation at speed changes LOW 0 100 Low frequency filter HIGH 0 100 High frequency filter SLOW 0 05 10 00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0 05 10 00 Hz FAST rotation speed 01V Owner s Manual 146 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 12 Effects RING MOD Ring modulator Parameter Range Description SOURCE OSC SELF Modulation source oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0 0 3000 0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ FM DEPTH 0 100 Oscillator frequency modulation depth TEMPO 25 300 bps hd conjunction with NOTE FM to determine FM 1 FRR AE Bh 4403 4 d 5 gt 2 For more information about the FM FREQ NOTE FM and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 MOD FILTER LFO modulation type filter Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter type low pass high pass band pass OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance PHASE 0 00 354 38 Left channel modulation and right channel modulation phase difference LEVEL 0 100 Output level TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjun
111. selected scene memory are placed in the Edit Buffer making them the current mix settings When a parameter is adjusted after a mix scene has been recalled the EDIT indicator appears in the Memory area of the display indicating that the current mix settings 1 those in the Edit Buffer no longer match those of the mix scene that was recalled last InitData Q2 02 am Scene memory 02 has just been The EDIT indicator means that a recalled so the contents of the Edit parameter has been changed since Buffer match those of scene memory scene memory 02 was recalled so the 02 contents of the Edit Buffer no longer match those of scene memory 02 The Edit Buffer settings are stored when the 01V is turned off so they don t have to be stored to a scene memory before the 01V is turned off Scene Memory 00 Scene memory 00 is a little different to scene memories 1 through 99 in that it s a read only memory and contains the initial 01V settings You can recall it but you can not store it To reset all mix settings to their initial values recall scene memory 00 Scene Memory Display Area The scene memory area of the display shows the number and title of the selected scene memory whether that scene memory is read only or write protected indicated by the closed padlock icon and whether or not the contents of the Edit Buffer have been edited Scene memories from 1 to 99 can be protected individually against accidental overwriting Scene
112. selected simultaneously LISTEN This switch sets the monitor signal source to pre fader PFL or post fader AFL It affects the stereo out aux send and bus out monitor sources For example when set to PFL the stereo out can be monitored regardless of the position of the stereo master fader When set to AFL however this fader must be raised in order to monitor the stereo out MONI TRIM This parameter is used to adjust the level of the monitor signal from 60 dB to 6 dB MONO This switch sets the monitor and phone s signals to mono MONO or ste reo ST When set to MONO the left and right signals are summed together to form a mono mix which is attenuated by 3 dB Using Monitor To monitor for example the stereo out proceed as follows Connect a monitoring system amp speakers to the MONITOR OUT Make sure that the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR Set the MONITOR OUT LEVEL control midway If you are using headphones set the PHONES LEVEL control midway Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 2 explained previously Set the SOURCE to STEREO OUT If MONITOR SETUP LISTEN is set to AFL the STEREO fader must be raised Other wise you won t hear anything 01V Owner s Manual Monitor Block Diagram 79 Monitor Block Diagram BUS AUX EFF ST 1234 1234 12 LR 2TR OUT Meter 4 Band D SCIT STEREO OUT 4 Band H st DIGITAL h O STE
113. signal is transferred to a lower resolution system some of the least significant bits LSB of data are ignored by the receiving system which can make low level signals sound grainy and step like similar to the noise pro duced by a low resolution digital reverb as signals fade To prevent this the wordlength of a digital audio signal can be shortened to match that of the receiving system Instead of simply chopping the unwanted bits off the 01V uses the industry standard tech nique known as dither is used to optimize the wordlength reduction process Dither can be set independently for the Digital Stereo Out and Option I O digital out puts and should be matched to the wordlength supported by the receiving digital audio device For example with a 16 bit DAT recorder connected to the Digital Stereo Out the DIGITAL ST OUT should be set to a wordlength of 16 and with a 20 bit digital multitrack recorder connected via the Option I O OPTION OUT should be set to 20 Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 5 as shown below ON OFF WORD LENGTH BIT ST our 2 9 Ee 22 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the WORD LENGTH switches and the ENTER button to set them Dither works by comparing the output of a special pseudorandom number sequence generator with the lowest data bit of the shortened data word and the unwanted data bits The lowest bit is then rounded up or down prior to D A conversion th
114. the Digital Stereo Out Coaxial connector Typically this is connected to the digital input on a DAT or MiniDisc deck for stereo mix recording or the Digital Stereo In of another 01V for cascade operation See Cascading 01Vs on page 214 for more information The wordlength of the Digital Stereo Out Coaxial signal is set using the Dither function See Output Dither on page 212 for more information DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT IN In the following example the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out on the 01V is connected to the digital input of a DAT recorder for digital mixdown recording The 01V works as word clock master while the DAT works as wordclock slave See About Wordclocks on page 206 for more information When the digital input on the DAT recorder is selected as the recording source the DAT should automatically synchronize to the wordclock signal coming from the 01V On some DAT recorders the wordclock source may have to be set separately Refer to the instructions supplied with your DAT recorder 01V o ooojlooooloooo 2 j a olo ajo ESPERE DAT recorder DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT 00 00 00 00 Digital In 01V Owner s Manual 212 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs Output Dither When a high resolution digital audio
115. the Lr PLAY switch and then press the ENTER button With the PLY MODE is set to INPUT playback starts automatically when an input sig nal exceeds the TRG LVL Use the PLY MODE parameters to set the type of playback and the START END and LOOP parameters to edit the sample Be aware that samples are lost when another type of effect is recalled or the 01V is turned off 01V Owner s Manual Effects Block Diagram Meter 4 Band PEQ Meter Internal Effect 1 4 Band PEQ Meter Internal Effect 2 ops Qui S 9 a Q BUS Effects Block Diagram AUX EFF ST 1234 1234 12 LR EFF RTN 1 Rotary O00 90 Q Q AUX EFF PRE POST EFF RTN 2 Rotary O S i ead Q AUX EFF PRE POST PAN INDIVIDUAL GANG INV GANG 159 Effect send 1 master fader oo ON Effect send 2 master fader oo ON 01V Owner s Manual Dynamics Processors 161 Dynamics Processors In this chapter About the Dynamics Processors 162 Preset Dynamics 163 Using the Dynamics Processors 164 Editing the Dynamics Processors 166 Processor ly pessin 25e ieee e Ra s ace Ip c Eco A 167 Dyna iics
116. the other hand has an equal amount of energy per frequency band That is 100 200 800 900 and 3000 3100 Post fader The point in the signal path after the fader Aux sends are often config ured as post fader sends which means the aux send signal is sourced after the channel fader The advantage of this is that the aux send signal can be controlled at the same time as the main channel signal using the same fader Post fader aux sends are typically used to feed effects processors See also AFL Pre fader The point in the signal path before the fader Aux sends are often config ured as pre fader sends which means the aux send signal is sourced before the channel fader The advantage of this is that the aux send signal can be controlled independently of the main channel signal Pre fader aux sends are often used for foldback mixes See also PFL Program Change A type of MIDI message for selecting programs 01V Owner s Manual 296 Glossary Q The unit used to express a filter s selectivity High values imply a narrow frequency band low values a wide frequency band Quantization The PCM process in which PAM pulses are approximated to the nearest binary value available S PDIF format See Coaxial format Sampling rate The number of times per second analog audio signals are sampled measured during A D conversion Common digital audio sampling rates are 32 kHz 44 1 kHz and 48 kHz Scene mem
117. the regular channel fader Post fader means that signals are sourced after and are affected by the regular channel fader With a post fader send the regular channel fader can be used to control the channel level and the effects send level simultaneously For Input Channels 1 16 amp the Effects Returns 1 Use the EFFECT 1 button to locate the PRE POST page for Effect 1 or the EFFECT 2 button to locate the PRE POST page for Effect 2 Both pages are shown below EFFECT 1 PRE POST SEND MASTER 1121314151617 E EN Ee Ga e en wu oma 9 i 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 iEFFZ O 55 5 EFFECT 2 PRE POST SEND MASTER Res ES a esr ost Rost ost i ost Rost co Too Too i 05 Too i i 180 1 12 it2 14if5 16 1 OO i 0 i co i 0 0 i co i 00 HRLL CHORUS The value below each PRE POST switch indicates the position of the effects send fader The position of the corresponding effects send master fader is displayed at the top of the page To prevent signal loops effects return 1 can be fed only to Effect 2 and effects return 2 can be fed only to Effect 1 This is why EFFECT1 page 3 does not have a PRE POST switch for effect 1 and EFFECT2 page 3 does not have a PRE POST switch for effect 2
118. the trigger is received Once playback has been triggered subsequent TRG MASK 0 1000 ms triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time MIDI TRG OFE C1 C6 ALL Sample playback can be triggered using MIDI Note on off messages PITCH 12 to 12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE 50 to 50 cents Playback pitch shift fine 1 0 0 2972 1 ms fs 44 1 kHz 0 0 ms 2730 6 ms fs 48 kHz To record and playback a sample 1 Send a channel signal to Effect 2 and then recall the Freeze effect See Using the Effects on page 123 and Recalling Effects Programs on page 134 2 Use the EFFECT 2 button to locate EFFECT 2 page 1 as shown below EFFECT2 InitDatas HALL FREEZE EFFECT 2 EDIT J TITLE CLIE TYPE FREEZE 12 eeNTER REC MODE IEEE AI START 7 3 Select the REC switch and then press the ENTER button Note that the previous sampler is deleted at this point The REC switch appears highlighted and input signal can be heard 01V Owner s Manual 158 Chapter 12 Effects 4 Select the Lr PLAY switch and press the ENTER button to start recording The bar below the REC and PLAY switches fills up as recording progresses With the REC MODE is set to INPUT recording starts automatically when an input signal exceeds the TRG LVL To play back the sample select
119. title and number stop flashing and the EDIT indicator disappears If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 a confirmation dialog box appears In this case select OK and then press the ENTER button to confirm the recall If the INC DEC MEMORY RECALL option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons can be used to select and recall scene memories As the 1 DEC or 1 INC button is pressed sub sequent scene memories that contain a mix scene are selected and recalled Mix scene recalls can be undone using the Recall Undo function See Undoing Mix Scene Recalls on page 189 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 188 Chapter 14 Scene Memories Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages MIDI Program Change messages can be used to recall mix scenes for snapshot style mix automation Program Change messages can be transmitted from a controlling computer MIDI sequencer or MIDI keyboard Most MIDI keyboards for example transmit a Program Change message when a voice is selected This could be used to recall a corresponding mix scene on the 01V so that just one press of a button or foot switch the synthesizer and 01V are reconfigured ready for the next song or scene To recall mix scenes using MIDI Program Change messages you must Connect MIDI equipment capable of tra
120. to 25 seconds can be set for each mix scene individually Faders can be grouped together in one of three fader groups for multiple fader control See Grouping Faders on page 55 for more information Faders on paired channels move simultaneously See Pairing Input Channels on page 52 for more information 01V Faders are multifunction controls and their exact operation depends on the selected Fader mode Input channel faders may be used as channel faders or aux or effects send controls The STEREO fader may be used as the stereo output fader or aux or effects send master level faders See Fader Modes on page 32 for more information Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on REMOTE page 1 or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See Assigning Fad ers amp On Buttons on page 194 and User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 6 Chapter 1 Welcome to the 01V Onboard Effects Processors The 01V has two stereo multi effects processors onboard Effect 1 and Effect 2 These processors provide a wide range of quality effects including reverb delay chorus flange amp simulator and more There are 34 different effects types available The effects processors are fed by the Effect 1 and Effect 2 buses and the processed signals are returned through the effects return channels Effects can be applied to input channels 1 through 24 Effects return
121. to emphasize the attack and Attack ms 38 ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead microphones It M ene COMPAND S Out gain dB 3 5 automatically reduces the vol Width dB 54 ume when the cymbals are not played helping to differentiate Release ms 842 the bass and snare drums clearly Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 2 Attack ms 15 Compressor program to level the 16 E B Finger COMP attack and volume level of a fin Out gain dB 4 5 ger picked electric bass guitar Knee 2 Release ms 470 01V Owner s Manual Preset Dynamics Program Settings 179 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Title E B Slap Syn Bass Piano1 Piano2 E Guitar A Guitar Strings Strings2 Type COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP Parameter Value Threshold dB 12 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 6 Out gain dB 4 0 Knee hard Release ms 133 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 9 Out gain dB 3 0 Knee hard Release ms 250 Threshold dB 9 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 17 Out gain dB 1 0 Knee hard Release ms 238 Threshold dB 18 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 6 0 Knee 2 Release ms 174 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 7 Out gain dB 2 5 Knee 4 Release ms 261 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 2 5 Attack ms 5 Out gain
122. which are only available when an Option I O card is installed See Buttons page 34 for more information The ON buttons 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal param eters on REMOTE page 1 or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See Assigning Faders amp On Buttons on page 194 and User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information Faders Depending on the selected fader mode the 01V s 60 mm motorized faders are used to control channel levels aux send levels or effects sends levels Normally faders 1 through 8 control channels 1 through 8 When the OPTION I O button is pressed however they control input channels 17 through 24 which are only available when an Option I O card is installed See Faders plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on REMOTE page 1 or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See Assigning Fad ers amp On Buttons on page 194 and User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information RETURN Controls The RETURN controls are used to adjust the effects return levels and their positions are displayed in the lower left corner of the display SOLO Status Indicator The SOLO status indicator lights up when a channel is soloed 01V Owner s Manual 20 Chapter 3 Touring the 01V Inputs amp Outputs Inp
123. 0 Ni 2 AUX 2 3 2 3 4 ST Meters for the effects returns also appear on the EFFECT and VIEW pages See Using the Effects on page 123 and Viewing Effects Returns Settings on page 130 Meters for the aux sends also appear on the VIEW pages See Viewing Aux Send Settings on page 98 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 84 Chapter 7 Solo Monitors amp Meters Omni Outs HOME page 3 displays signal level meters for the four omni outs The source assigned to an omni out is displayed below its meters These assignments are made on PAN ROUT page 4 See Assigning Omni Outs on page 116 for more information OMNI OUT METER J PEAK HOLD 2 3 Stereo Output HOME page 4 displays signal level meters for the stereo output Compared to the main stereo meters these have a large scale from 72 dB to CLIP EXIST OUT METER J PEAK HOLD 72 60 42 30 18 12 4 CLIP HALL CHORUS CRC Meters for the stereo output also appear on the VIEW pages See Viewing Stereo Out put Settings on page 89 for more information Main Stereo Meters In addition to the meters on HOME page 4 stereo output levels are displayed on the dedicated 12 segment main stereo meters with Peak Hold The meters range from 48 dB to CLIP If a CLIP LED does light reduce the stereo output level to prevent signal distor tion The main stereo meters are not affected by th
124. 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform Reverb and symphonic balance 096 symphonic REV SYM 0 100 ee Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 H3 GU Bet ddd 4 d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual Effects Parameters 151 REV gt SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE pl Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform Reverb and symphonic reverb balance 096 t 0 REV BAL 05100 symphonic reverb 100 reverb HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FP GU 44 4 d gt 2 For more information ab
125. 0 11 4 5 0 56 0 11 quality PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 2 0 dB 5 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB iati 26 Male Vocal 2 A variation on program F 167Hz 236 Hz 2 67kHz 6 72 kHz 25 0 11 10 5 6 G 1 0dB 1 0dB 1 5dB 20 female vocal Adjust the 27 Female Vo 1 HIGH or H MID setting F 118 Hz 397 Hz 2 67 kHz 5 99 kHz according to the voice Q 0 18 0 45 0 56 0 14 quality L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF G 7 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB iati 28 Female Vo 2 A variation on program 111Hz 334Hz 2 00kHz 6 72 kHz 27 Q 0 16 0 2 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING Use as a template for a G 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 3 0 48 chorus It makes the 29 Chorus amp Harmo ve F 88Hz 841 Hz 2 11 kHz 4 49 kHz chorus much righter Q 2 8 2 0 7 7 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Use on a stereo mix dur G 0 5 dB 0 0 dB 3 0 dB 6 5 dB ing mixdown Sounds 30 Total EQ 1 F 94H 944Hz 2 11 kHz 16 0kHz even better when used Q 7 us EE with a compressor 01V Owner s Manual 74 Chapter 6 EQ Parameter Title Description LOW L MID H MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 4 0 dB 1 5 dB 2 0 dB 6 0 dB iati 31 Total EQ 2 A variation on program 94 Hz 749 Hz 1 78 kHz 17 9 kHz 30 7 2 8 5 6 L SHELF
126. 0110011 33 5 00110100 34 4 01001101 4D MU Ommmmmmm mm m 0 99 127 Scene Memory No 0 99 cur rent EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive SETUP MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000010 02 266 256 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 00001010 OA 01001100 4c T 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 ut 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 01010011 53 S 00100000 20 pe DATA Oddddddd ds Setup Memory 128 2bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive All data is split into 4 bit SETUP MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c 01001101 4 M 00100000 20 v 00100000 20 x 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 B 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01010011 53 00100000 20 11110111 7 End Of Exclusive REMOTE Internal Parameter MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Ch
127. 01V PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call DATA Oddddddd ddO function Oddddddd 1 number EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive function number 0 99 mem 0 99 0x7f edit buffer 0 79 library 1 80 0 79 library 1 80 0 98 library 1 99 0x30 scene title 0x31 eq lib title 0x32 dynamics lib title 0x33 eff lib title 01V Owner s Manual 284 MIDI Data Format PARAMETER CHANGE type operation for type 0x03 controller LCD Fader mode Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS the message will be received When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be ech oed When this message is received the LCD screen the corresponding Fader Mode and the specified channel will be selected STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 01000011 03 controller type DATA 00000001 01 control No LCD Fader mode Oddddddd dd channel select 0 30 Oddddddd dd LCD select No 0 17 0000dddd dd PAGE No 0 4 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive PARAMETER CHANGE bit operation for type 0x43 controller key remote Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS this message will be received
128. 1000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00010000 10 Tbit operation for edit buffer type DATA ddO address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address Qaaaaaaa ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd dd2 data 7bit EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The valid range of addresses is 0x0000 0x03FF PARAMETER CHANGE bit operation for type 0x40 edit buffer Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON this message is received if the If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be echoed When this message is received the specified parameter will be con rolled Transmission If Parameter Change TX is ON this message is transmitted on the Tx CH Device Channel when a parameter not specified in the Control Assign Table is modified STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 01000000 40 bit operation for edit buffer type DATA ddO address H high 7 bits of 14 bits address Qaaaaaaa ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd dd2 data bitO 2 change bit no 0 7 bit3 0 reset 1 5 0 11110111 7 E
129. 16 CURVE This window shows the curve of the dynamics processor pro viding a visual indication of how it s set The horizontal axis corresponds to the input signal and the vertical axis corresponds to the output signal A straight line at 45 degrees from the bottom left corner indicates that the input signal will pass through the dynamics processor unaffected This can be seen when for example a compressor is set with a compression ratio of 1 1 PARAMETER These controls are used to adjust the dynamics processor s parameters The number and type of parameters available depends on the type of dynamics proces sor selected Meters The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied to the selected channel Next to this are level meters for the selected channel and its neighbor The GR meter works from top to bottom For the COMP DUCKING EXPAND and COMPANDER types the GR meter displays the amount of gain reduction For the GATE type the processor is active when the input signal is below the threshold so the GR meter displays the amount of gain reduction when the input signal is below the threshold and when there is no input signal The dynamics processors parameters are explained in detail on page 167 01V Owner s Manual Processor Types 167 Processor Types Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels although they can also be used creatively to shape a sou
130. 1V A works as wordclock master and is set to INT 44 1K while 01V B works as wordclock slave with its word clock source set to ST IN DIGITAL See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information 01V A sub mixer 01V B main mixer DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN AEN For cascade operation 01V B Coaxial input should not be flipped and Stereo Cascade should be turned on See Digital Stereo In on page 213 for more information MIDI Local Control Using the MIDI Local Control function 01V A can be controlled using the controls on 01V B When Local Control on 01V B is turned off its faders buttons and display pages all control 01V A instead of its own functions In addition the meters on 01V B display 01V A signal levels See Local Control on page 234 for more information Link Port For simultaneous solo operation display page and fader mode selection two or more 01Vs can be linked together using the TO HOST or MIDI ports See Linking 01Vs on page 239 Cascading Aux Sends Aux sends can be cascaded as follows Assign say aux send 1 on 01V A submixer to a MONI OUT and connect it to say input 13 on 01V B main mixer Then feed channel 13 on 01V B through to aux send 1 pre fader 01V B aux send 1 output now contains the aux send 1 signals of
131. 2 6dB 0x77 56dB 0x33 18dB 0x67 5dB 0x78 51dB 1648 0 69 4dB 0x79 48dB 15dB Ox6A 3dB Ox7A 46dB 0x41 14dB 0x6B 2dB 0x7B 42dB 0x47 13dB 0 6 1dB 0x7D 39dB Ox4A 12dB Ox6F OdB Ox7E 36dB Ox4F 11dB 0x70 CLIP Ox7F 33dB 0x52 10dB 0x71 5 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE Bulk Dump amp REQUEST These messages input and output the contents of various types of internal memory The unique header identifies whether or not the data is for the 01V The CHECK SUM is calculated by adding the data following the BYTE COUNT LOW until the data preceding the CHECK SUM then inverting the bits 2 s complement and setting bit 7 to 0 CHECK SUM sum amp 0x7F Reception This is received if Bulk RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel that is included in SUB STATUS When a BULK DUMP is received it will immediately be written into the specified memory When a BULK DUMP REQUEST is received a bulk dump will be transmitted immediately Transmission In the MIDI BULK page this is transmitted on the Tx CH chan nel by key operations In response to a Bulk Dump Request a Bulk Dump Message is trans mitted on the Rx CH channel data name rx tx function M TX tx Scene Memory amp Request 5 rx tx Setup Memory amp Request T rx tx Remote Internal Parameter Memory amp Request LU rx tx Remote MMC Memory amp Request U rx tx Remote User Define Memory amp Request Cc rx tx C
132. 3 4 2 2 HOOD 2 HALL CHORUS 2 Use the cursor buttons to select bus pair 1 2 or 3 4 and then press the ENTER button The following dialog box appears CHANNEL PAIRING Choose a Pairing Mode CANCEL BUS 1 2 05291 RESET BOTH BUS 1 2 Copy the settings of bus out 1 to bus out 2 BUS 2 1 Copy the settings of bus out 2 to bus out 1 RESET BOTH Reset both bus outs to their initial settings 3 Use the cursor buttons to select a pairing mode and then press the ENTER button The highlighted switch and STEREO label show that the bus outs 1 2 5 4 are now configured as a stereo pair STEREO Releasing Bus Out Pairs 1 On SETUP page 4 use the cursor buttons to select the paired bus switch and then press the ENTER button The following dialog box appears Will Release BUS1 2 Pair ARE YOU SURE 2 Select OK and then press the ENTER button The stereo pair is broken and both bus outs operate independently 01V Owner s Manual 112 Chapter 10 Bus Outs Bus Out Block Diagram BUS AUX EFF ST 1234 1234 12 LR Meter BUS 1 Meter master fader BUS 1 OUTPUT to ON SELECT BUS 1 feo oo LISTEN PAN TOST Meter BUS 2 Meter master fader AE BUS OUTPUT ON 0 SELECT feo LISTEN BUS 2 PAN TO ST Meter BUS 3 Meter master fader BUS3 to 4 on
133. 4 9101 12 124115416 E 7 Cocos D FILTER CHORUS Go MUTE 2 Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the fader groups and the SEL buttons to add and remove faders to and from that group Channels cannot be in more than one group at a time Input channels 13 14 15 16 and paired input channels 1 through 12 Pairing Input Channels on page 52 are added and removed together Operate only one fader in a group at a time If you attempt to adjust two or more faders in the same group the fader motors may malfunction due to the increased load Enabling amp Disabling Fader Groups Fader groups can be enabled and disabled using the ENABLE switches Disabling a group allows you to adjust faders without removing them from the group 1 Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the fader group that you want to disable A B or C 2 Use the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to enable or disable the selected group EN Fader group enabled Fader group disabled 01V Owner s Manual 56 Chapter 5 Input Channels Grouping Mutes 01V Owner s Manual Input channel ON buttons 1 through 16 can be grouped together in mute groups for multi channel control using a single button Three groups are available D E and F Mute groups may contain on channels and off channels making it easy to toggl
134. 43 Applying EO to Input Channels cose eet e te ano e rdg 44 Input Channels Dynamics Processors 44 Delaying Channel Signals 45 Input Channels anehe ne en 46 Setting Input Channel Levels ose sodes qe Rana ad Rabe abes 46 Panning Input Channels ser y ee DR Ec E Oe Ie ei 47 Routing Input Channels 59 221 pup 49 Monitoring Input Channels oo eaa dar Cae ees eadeni eni 50 Input Channels amp Aux Sends rer eR da e REA 50 Input Channels amp the Omni Outs zy i epo LER QUEDAR COQUE 50 Input Channels amp the Option I O Outs 2 50 Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 so ac sited pe hb RAE Lx Ba de a 51 Pairing dou ap utu eot faf m aa 52 Grouping FACETS RO ada d atl A 55 Grouping Mutes 252 eR cacy case Rad re dati et 56 Viewing Input Channel Settings 1 over e ORO Ce ae Ce 57 Copying amp Swapping Channel Settings 59 Input Channel Block Diagram 60 01V Owner s Manual 40 Chapter 5 Input Channels Input Channel Overview This section provides an overview of 01V input channels Input Channels 1 12 XLR INPUT balanced Phone jack INPUT balanced Input c
135. 50 Hz Power consumption Dimensions W x H x D 70W 430 x 148 x 520 mm 16 9 x 5 8 x 20 4 inches Weight 12 5 kg 27 5 105 Security cover Free air operating temperature range 10 C to 35 50 F to 95 F Four M3 fixing holes for custom made cover Options Digital interface card MY8 MY4 series Rack Mount Kit RK124 01V Owner s Manual Input Channels 1 16 263 Input Channels 1 16 PHANTOM switch 48 V CH 1 6 CH 7 12 GAIN control 44 dB 60 to 16 dB CH 1 12 detented 30 dB 20 to 10 dB CH 13 14 15 16 PAD switch 0 26 dB attenuation CH 1 12 AD converter 20 bit linear 128 times oversampling Phase Normal Reverse Input swap Normal CH 1 8 Swap OPTION INPUT CH 17 24 Input flip Normal CH 13 14 Flip DIGITAL STEREO IN Input select switch CH 15 16 2TR IN Attenuator 0 to 96 dB 1 dB steps EQ 4 band PEQ Low Lo Mid Hi Mid High Dynamics Compressor Gate Ducking Expander Compander Delay 0 250 ms fs 44 1 kHz ON OFF Fader 60 mm motorized AUX EFFECT send INPUT AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 AUX 1 4 EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 pre post fader Solo ON OFF AFL PFL Pan 33 positions 11 16 CENTER R1 16 Routing STEREO BUS 1 4 Direct out OMNI OUT 1 4 OPTION OUT via OUTPUT SELECT Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold ON OFF 01V Owne
136. 86 01V Owner s Manual 76 Chapter 7 Solo Monitors amp Meters About Monitor amp Solo Flexible monitoring and solo functions mean the 01V can be used in a wide range of applications All inputs and outputs can be monitored pre or post fader via the monitor out or phones Recording Solo and Mixdown Solo modes allow quick monitoring of inputs channels and effects returns Monitor and solo parameters appear on SETUP page 2 shown below MONITOR SETUP J MONI TRIM di STEREO OUT GAE A E 11108 LOLO SETUP J SOLO TRIM 898 L EHRBLE RECORDING SOLO SOLO E SETUP InitData amp HRLL CHORUS When no channels are soloed the signal source for the monitor out and phones is selected using the MONITOR SETUP parameters in the top half of this page Selectable sources are the stereo output stereo cascade in aux sends 1 through 4 or bus outs 1 through 4 Signals can be sourced pre fader PFL or post fader AFL Other parame ters include monitor trim and a mono stereo switch See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information The SOLO SETUP parameters in the bottom half of this page are used to configure the Solo function Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be soloed using the SOLO buttons Two Solo modes are available Recording Solo and Mixdown Solo The SEL MODE determines how signals from each channel are soloed individually or mixed toge
137. A are transferred to 01V B using MIDI Bulk Dump The BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 of 01V B must be turned on otherwise the Bulk Dump data will be ignored See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 01V A 01V B MIDI Bulk Dump Scene memories and effects programs In the following example all data from the 01V is transferred to a MIDI data filer The storage device could also be a computer running software with Bulk data management features In order to transfer Bulk Dump data from the MIDI data filer back to the 01V the BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 must be turned on See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 01V MIDI data filer MIDI Bulk Dump All data MIDI IN 01V Owner s Manual 234 Chapter 17 MIDI Local Control 2 The MIDI Local Control function can be used to control a remote 01V Normally the 01V controls faders buttons rotary controls and display pages set the 01V s internal parameters When Local Control is turned off the internal parameters remain the same when controls are operated but the System Exclusive Parameter Change messages that the 01V tramsits can be used to control a remote 01V Controllable parameters include all those that can be stored in mix scenes and the solo and monitor setings When Local Control is turned off the parameter values displ
138. AL STEREO COAXIAL OUT Digital multitrack B wordclock slave TO HOST TDIF 1 MIDI IN MIDI OUT 01V B wordclock slave 01V Owner s Manual 250 Chapter 18 5 Examples 01V amp Pro Tools AES EBU This example shows how the 01V can be used with a Pro Tools system to create a 16 input 8 track fully digital recording system with the 16 mic line inputs and eight digital tape returns providing up to 24 inputs during mixdown A Digidesign 888 I O Audio Interface connects the 01V to the Pro Tools system with a special 50 pin Pro Tools cable between the computer card and 888 The 01V connects to the 888 via a 25 pin D sub cable and XLR to 25 pin D sub splitter box which pro vides eight AES EBU inputs four XLRs and eight AES EBU outputs four XLRs Pro Tools transport functions can be controlled remotely from the 01V using MIDI Machine Control MMC commands See MIDI Machine Control on page 236 for more information System Components 01V Digital Mixing Console MYS8 AE Option I O card Pro Tools system with Digidesign 888 I O Audio Interface XLR to 25 pin D sub splitter box or 25 pin D sub to XLR break out cable 25 pin D sub cable 50 pin Pro Tools cable See Installing Option I O Cards on page 218 for MY8 AE installation instructions Wordclock Configura
139. Aux Send Master Levels Aux send master levels are controlled using the MASTER fader The function of this fader depends on the selected Fader mode See Fad ers plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information STEREO MASTER 1 Use the AUX buttons to select an aux send An AUX page similar to the one shown below appears AUXI PRE POST J RUX1 MASTER 8 898 1 2 i5 8 oo 22 co i co i co i 18 i 11 i 12 it5 14i15 16 iRTN1 IRTNZ Post Fost Post posr Post 00 i 0 i 0 i 0 i cO i 20 0 i co HRLL CHORUS D o The MASTER fader now functions as aux send master level control for the selected aux send 2 Usethe MASTER fader to set the aux send master level The position of the aux send master fader is displayed at the top of the AUX PRE POST page When aux sends are paired Pairing Aux Sends on page 101 their master faders linked The aux send master levels can be viewed and adjusted on the VIEW pages See View ing Aux Send Settings on page 98 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 100 Chapter 9 Aux Sends Muting Aux Sends ON Aux send masters can be muted using the MASTER ON button which lights up when an aux send is on The function of this button depends on the selected Fader mode See ON Buttons on page 34 for more i
140. CH13 14 flip 213 control change 229 control option I O 43 47 49 58 63 95 97 123 126 Delay 45 dither 212 dynamics edit 164 165 166 01V Owner s Manual 302 Index dynamics library 174 175 176 effect pre post 125 effects edit 123 124 136 137 157 effects library 132 133 134 135 EQ 43 63 64 65 EQ library 67 68 69 70 fade time 191 group 55 56 input meter 83 input swap 51 internal parameter 194 local control 234 memory 186 187 189 190 memory sort 190 metering point 85 MIDI setup 224 MMC control 236 monitor setup 78 omni out meter 84 omni out select 116 option I O out select 219 option in meter 85 option out meter 85 oscillator 202 output delay 91 117 pair 52 101 111 panpot 47 phase 42 preferences 203 program change 227 recall safe 192 routing 49 RTN output meter 83 solo setup 80 ST out meter 84 user define 238 view 57 86 89 98 127 130 wordclock select 209 Pair page 52 101 111 Pairing aux sends 101 aux sends block diagram 105 bus outs 111 input channels 52 input channels pair block diagram 54 PAM definition 295 PAN ROUT page 1 47 PAN ROUT page 2 49 PAN ROUT page 3 109 110 PAN ROUT page 4 116 213 Panning bus to stereo 110 channel aux sends 102 effects returns 47 131 input channels 47 modes 48 PAN ROUT page 47 PANPOT AUTO SCREEN preference 203 Panpot page 47 Parameter boxes display 30 Parameter change ech
141. CHANNEL CH18 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CH19 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CH20 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CH13 14 CHANNEL CH17 CHANNEL RETURN1 CHANNEL CH18 CHANNEL RETURN2 CHANNEL CH19 MASTER AUX1 CHANNEL CH20 MASTER AUX2 CHANNEL CH21 MASTER ST OUT CHANNEL CH22 CHANNEL CH1 CHANNEL CH23 CHANNEL CH2 CHANNEL CH24 CHANNEL CH3 CHANNEL CH13 14 CHANNEL CH4 CHANNEL RETURN1 CHANNEL CH5 CHANNEL RETURN2 CHANNEL CH6 MASTER AUX1 CHANNEL CH7 MASTER AUX2 CHANNEL CH8 MASTER AUX3 CHANNEL CH9 MASTER AUX4 CHANNEL CH10 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CH11 MASTER CHANNEL CH12 MASTER CHANNEL CH17 MASTER CHANNEL CH18 MASTER CHANNEL CH19 MASTER CHANNEL CH20 01V Owner s Manual 278 Appendix MIDI Control Parameter Change 03D Arrangement Programmable Mixer 01 Arrangement CHANNEL CH13 14 N CHANNEL RETURN1 N CHANNEL RETURN2 N MASTER N MASTER N MASTER N CHANNEL N N N N N CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL NEL CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL NO ASSIGN CHANNEL NEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CH14 CHANNEL RETURN1 L CHANNEL RETURN1 R CHANNEL RETURN2 L CHANNEL RETURN2 R NO ASSIGN BALANCE EFF1 SE NEL NEL NEL NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN N N N N N N N N N
142. DI controller select Input Channel SEL button Examples To select the EQ function for input channel 3 press the HOME button and then press SEL button 3 CH3 appears in the bottom right corner of the display Use the SELECTED CHANNEL F and G controls to adjust the EQ If a fader mode other than Option I O or Remote is selected it s not necessary to press the HOME button To select the Pan function for input channel 13 press the HOME button and then press SEL button 13 14 repeatedly until CH13 appears on the display Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control to adjust the pan Since most functions on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are linked the only time you ll need to select these channels individually is to set the Phase or Pan If a fader mode other than Fader Modes 33 Option I O or Remote is selected it s not necessary to press the HOME button To select the EQ function for input channel 20 press the OPTION I O button and then press SEL button 20 CH20 appears on the display Use the F and G controls to adjust the EQ Master SEL Button Examples To select the stereo output press the HOME button and then press the MASTER SEL button ST appears in the bottom right corner of the display To select the AUX 1 master press the AUX 1 button and then press the MASTER SEL button AUXI appears on the display To select the EFFECT 1 master press the EFFECT 1 button
143. DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4 TL 01001101 4D MU 00100000 20 A 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mm m 0 79 Equalizer Library No 1 80 96 124 ch1 12 13 14 15 16 RTN1 2 AUX 1 4 ST MAS ch17 24 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 01V Owner s Manual 288 MIDI Data Format DYNAMICS LIBRARY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 ID No 01000011 SUB STATUS 0000nnnn FORMAT No 01111110 BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000000 BYTE COUNT LOW 00100100 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000010 00110011 00110100 DATA NAME 01011001 Ommmmmmm DATA Oddddddd Oddddddd CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee EOX 11110111 FO 43 On 7E 00 24 4C 4D 20 20 38 42 33 34 59 mm ds de ee F7 System Exclusive Message Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA 0 15 Channel No 1 16 Universal Bulk Dump 36 26 10 bytes m 0 79 Dynamics Library No 1 80 96 114 ch1 12 13 14 15 16 AUX1 4 ST MAS Receive is effective No 40 79 96 115 Dynamics Library Mem ory 12 7 2 bytes ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh End Of Exclusive The first twelve bytes are the title and are 7 bit data The following seven bytes are all split into 4 bit data
144. EC and 1 INC buttons to set them Parameter ON OFF DELAY Range ON OFF 0 300 ms Description These switches are used to turn on and off the delays Delay can be specified in milliseconds meters or samples Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 The maximum delay in samples is fixed at 13229 The maximum delay in milliseconds and meters depends on the sampling rate At 44 1 kHz for example it is 300 milliseconds and 102 2 meters respectively 01V Owner s Manual 118 Chapter 11 Omni Outs Omni Out Block Diagram STEREO STEREO R BUS 1 BUS 4 AUX 1 OMNI OUT from Select AUX 4 CH 1 CH2 CH 15 CH 16 01V Owner s Manual Effects 119 Effects In this chapter About the Onboard Effects Maa DeC ce 120 Preset Effects Programs ca o eda GG Y ERREUR ROLE CE RA ee ce EN 121 Using th ure CORE CP 123 Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends 125 Viewing Effects Send Settlngscs 127 Setting Effects Send Master Levels 128 Metering Effects Sends 127 Effects Sends nene ean Ena REEE 129 Viewing Effects Returns 130 Metering Effects Returns 130 Applying EO to Effects Returns
145. ECHO is ON this is echoed When this is received the specified parameter will be controlled STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 01000001 41 bit operation for system memory type DATA 440 address high 7 bits of 14 bits address Qaaaaaaa ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd dd2 data bit0 2 change bit no 0 7 bit3 0 reset 1 5 0 11110111 7 End Of Exclusive The system memory will depend on the address as follows 0x0000 0x007F setup memory 128byte 0x0080 0x0147 backup memory 200byte 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 283 PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST type 0x00 edit buffer 0x01 sysytem memory Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON this message is received if the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be echoed if the device itself did not receive the message When this message is received the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change message Transmission When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be trans mitted without change if the device itself did not receive the message STATUS 11110000 FO S
146. EMPO to determine left 1 MOTEL channel DELAY L Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right NOTES l channel DELAY R DLY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time amp Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine NOTE FB 1 EB DLY Delay and delayed reverb balance 096 delayed 0 9 100 reverb 100 delay REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 2 TEMPOS 255200 bps determine DELAY DELAY R and FB DLY 1 h ddd Ja J da d 3 Maximum value depends the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 156 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 12 Effects DIST gt DELAY Distortion and delay effects in series Parameter Range Description DST1 DST2 OVD1 LA DST OVD2 CRUNCH Distortion type
147. EQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ Bet ddd ded d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual Effects Parameters 143 FLANGE Flange effect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for normal phase Pc 0 cereal feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FP ROG ddd 4 d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 SYMPHONIC Symphonic efect Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modul
148. ETER CHANGE type 0x03 bit operation for controller LCD Fader mode to display the appro priate meter in the LCD screen of the remote device Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in SUB STATUS this message will be received When this message is received Parameter Change remote meter messages will begin to be transmitted on the Rx CH channel Transmission When LOCAL OFF is ON transmit a meter data request for the currently displayed meter on the Tx CH For each request meter data will be transmitted for five seconds If you want meter data con tinuously for longer than this you will need to transmit requests at intervals of five seconds or less When the 01V is in LOCAL OFF MODE transmit requests at approximately one second intervals When Parameter Change ECHO is ON and the 01V itself did not receive this message the message will be echoed STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000101 05 remote meter DATA Osgttttt tt meter no s special bit g gr bit EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Table of signal levels and codes Level code Level code Level code 72dB Ox1F 30dB 0x57 9dB 0x72 68dB 0x24 27dB Ox5A 8dB 0x73 64dB 0x29 24dB Ox5F 7dB 0x75 60dB Ox2F 21dB 0x6
149. For Input Channels 1 16 1 Usethe EQ ATT button to locate EQ page 1 as shown below LOW T Lo MiD T HIGH WALL CHORUS 1 00k 4 GBk 10 0k 9 B dB 6 008 0 0dB CS O L SHELF 8 78 8 78 H SHE 2 Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select channels 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the ATT control and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to adjust it The Attenuation functions on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are per manently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Chan nels on page 52 their attenuators are linked so adjustments can be made with either channel selected The Attenuation function can be used to compensate for signal level increases caused by EQ boosting or dynamics processing Although such signals can be reduced using the GAIN controls doing so would adversely affect the performance of the A D con verters which need a reasonable signal level in order to maximize signal to noise per formance Since the digital attenuators are located after A D conversion they can be used to attenuate signals without affecting performance For Input Channels 17 24 1 Usethe OPTION 1 0 button to locate OPTION page 2 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels Qul cH1 CONTROL J ROUTE FADER AUR EFFECT i EG 1 2 1 jaa 1 1 1 1 1 soon PAN E Con 125 HALL CHORUS i co i co
150. High Gain G 18 0 dB to 418 0 dB 0 5 dB steps Frequency F 21 Hz 20 1 kHz 1 12 octave steps 120 steps HPF 10 0 0 10 LPF 10 0 0 10 Q 41 steps 10 0 0 10 41 steps 41 steps L SHELF H SHELF 1 Four band EQs only low and high bands only on input channels 17 through 24 2 When the low and high EQ bands are configured as HPF and LPF their gain controls function as filter on and off switches Bypassing the EQ The selected channel s EQ can be turned on or off using the EQ ON switch on the EQ page OPTION page 2 for channels 17 through 24 or the ENTER ON button While the EQ page is displayed the ENTER button turns the EQ on or off regardless of the cursor position ENTER Resetting the EQ To reset all the EQ parameters on the selected channel to their initial values press the HIGH and LOW buttons simultaneously The following table contains the initial EQ values Low Lo Mid Hi Mid High Gain G 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB Frequency F 125 Hz 1 00 kHz 4 00 kHz 10 0 kHz Q L SHELF 0 70 0 70 H SHELF 1 Four band EQs only low and high bands only on input channels 17 through 24 01V Owner s Manual EQ Library 67 EQ Library EQ settings can be stored as programs in the EQ library which contains 40 preset pro grams 1 40 and 40 user programs 41 80 User programs allow you to store fre quently used EQ settings and they can be titled for easy
151. I sequencer in real time 01V MIDI Sequencer Program Change 26 Control Change Parameter Control 229 Control Change Parameter Control When a MIDI Control Change message is received a mix parameter is adjusted in accordance with the parameter to Control Change assignment table Likewise when a mix parameter is adjusted the 01V transmits a Control Change message that can be used to control another 01V or recorded to a MIDI sequencer for automated parameter control Up to 114 mix parameters can be assigned to Control Changes 0 through 95 and 102 through 119 Control Changes 96 through 101 are not used Initially 01V parameters are assigned to Control Changes as listed in the 01V Parameter to Control Change Table on page 274 although these assignments can be edited on MIDI page 3 These assignments are used for both transmission and reception so if Control Change 10 is assigned to channel fader 10 the 01V adjusts channel fader 10 when Control Change 10 data is received and transmits Control Change 10 when channel fader 10 is adjusted Assignment tables for use with the Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 and Yamaha 03D Digital Mixing Console are also provided In order for the 01V to receive and transmit MIDI Control Change messages the Con trol Change Rx and Tx switches on MIDI page 1 must be turned on See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 1 Usethe MIDI button to loc
152. IEW page See Viewing Stereo Output Set tings on page 89 for more information Applying EQ to the Stereo Output The stereo output features four band parametric EQ See EQ on page 61 for more information The EQ can be turned on or off and the EQ curve viewed on the VIEW page See Viewing Stereo Output Settings on page 89 for more information Stereo Output Dynamics Processors The stereo output features a stereo dynamics processor See Dynamics Processors on page 161 for more information The dynamics can be turned on or off and the dynam ics curve viewed on the VIEW page See Viewing Stereo Output Settings on page 89 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Stereo Output Delay 91 Stereo Output Delay The left and right channels of the stereo output can be delayed individually by up to 300 milliseconds This can be used to compensate for delays in multi speaker sound reinforcement systems 1 Use the DELAY button to locate DELAY page 4 as shown below OUTPUT DELAY J stereo OUT L GERAR GEE LAY our 54 msec 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the delay parameters the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Parameter Range Description ON OFF ON OFF These switches are used to turn on and off the delays Delay can be specifie
153. In order for the 01V to receive and transmit System Exclusive Parameter Change mes sages the PARAM CHANGE Rx and Tx switches on MIDI page 1 must be turned on See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information Data formats for System Exclusive Parameter Change messages are provided in MIDI Data Format on page 280 01V Owner s Manual 232 Chapter 17 MIDI Bulk Dump 4 01V Owner s Manual 01V scene memories library programs and setup data can be transferred to another MIDI device using System Exclusive Bulk Dump This can be used to back up impor tant 01V data to a MIDI data filer or controlling computer or to exchange data between 01Vs The 01V can transmit MIDI System Exclusive Bulk Dump messages at anytime In order for the 01V to respond to Bulk Dump requests from other MIDI devices the BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 must be turned on See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information Use the MIDI button to locate MIDI page 4 as shown below PGM TABLE LIBRARY CTL TABLE REMOTE Use the cursor buttons to select a CATEGORY switch and press the ENTER button to select it The switch of the selected category appears highlighted For the SCENE MEM LIBRARY and REMOTE categories use the cursor buttons PARAMETER wheel and 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set the TYPE FROM and TO parameters Data Type Type Range Description ALL All the following data SETUP
154. J HOLD D FILTER CHORUS osas TOO CO cO co IE 20 21 22 23 24 01V Owner s Manual 52 Chapter 5 Input Channels Pairing Input Channels 01V Owner s Manual Input channels 1 through 12 can be paired together for stereo signal processing Adja cent odd and even input channels can be paired together 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 not 2 3 or 4 5 The following parameters are linked when channels are paired attenuators EQ dynamics delays ON and SEL buttons faders aux sends effects sends and pre post settings Routing switches SOLO buttons phase panpots aux panpots and fade time on off are not linked Panpot operation depends on the selected Pan mode See Pan Modes on page 48 for more information Making Input Channel Pairs Press the SEL button of both input channels simultaneously OR Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 4 as shown below and use the cursor buttons to select channel pairs and then press the ENTER button Ey PAIR INPUT 1 2 5 OP 4 5 69 6 7 EP 5 9 EP 10 11 12 CENTER 2 ROROx2 2 2 HONOR AUX Bus 1 amp 9 2 5 41 t3 2 5 t9 4 2 HONOR ROROx2 OHIO InitDatas HRLL CHORUS The following dialog box appears CHANNEL PAIRING Choose Pairing Mode cH2 gt 1 RESET BOTH CH 1 gt 2 Co
155. LF 3 5 8 5 0 0 0 0 Use on a synth bass with 83 Hz 944Hz 4 00kHz 12 6 kHz emphasized low range 0 1 8 4 5 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 0 0 dB 1 5 dB 0 0 Emphasizes the attack 12 Syn Bass 2 that is peculiar to a 125 Hz 177 Hz 1 12 kHz 12 6 kHz synth bass 1 6 8 2 2 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 6 0 dB 0 0 dB 2 0 dB 4 0 dB This is used to make a 94 Hz 944Hz 3 17kHz 7 55 kHz Piano sound brighter 8 0 9 3 5 88 8 5 48 41 5dB 3 0 With a compressor this 14 Piano 2 program emphasizes 223 Hz 595 Hz 3 17 kHz 5 33 kHz the attack and low 56 10 0 7 range of a piano sound PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF Use for line recording 42 0dB 5 5 dB 0 5 88 2 5 an electric guitar or 15 E G Clean semi acoustic guitar to 265 Hz 397 Hz 1 33 kHz 4 49 kHz get a slightly hard 0 18 10 6 3 sound PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING 4 5 dB 0 0 dB 44 0dB 2 0dB Adjusts the tonal qual 16 E G Crunch 1 ity of a slightly distorted 140 Hz 1 00 kHz 1 88 kHz 5 65 kHz guitar sound 8 4 5 0 63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 2 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB 0 0 48 variation on program 125 Hz 445 Hz 3 36 kHz 19 0 kHz 16 8 0 4 0 16 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF 5 0 dB 0 0 dB 3 5 dB 0 0 Makes a heavily dis 18 E G Dist 1 torted guitar sound 354 Hz 944 Hz 3 36 kHz 12 6 kHz clearer 9 10 L SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H SHELF
156. LL MUTE 9 EFF i FADER m re 6 LR i H SEND RIN 00 i HALL CHORUS 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them Parameters are explained in the following sections Metering Effects Sends Effects sends signal levels can be metered on the VIEW pages See Viewing Effects Send Settings on page 127 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 128 Chapter 12 Effects Setting Effects Send Master Levels Effects send master levels are controlled using the MASTER fader The function of this fader depends on the selected Fader mode See Fad ers plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information STEREO MASTER 1 Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to select an effects send An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears LEFFECT1 EDIT TITLE Reverb Hall HALL IN HI RATIO H Resscccssensecters The MASTER fader now functions as effects send master level control for the selected effects send 2 Use the MASTER fader to set the effects send master level The position of the effects send master fader is displayed at the top of the EFFECT PRE POST page The effects send master levels can be viewed and adjusted on the VIEW pages See
157. MEM 01V setup data all current set tings MIDI page 2 settings scene PGM TABLE m memory to Program Change assignment table MIDI page 3 settings parame CTL TABLE ter to Control Change assign ment table Scene memories EDIT is the Edit Buffer EQ 41 80 EQ library user programs LIBRARY DYNA 41 80 Dynamics library user programs EFF 43 99 Effects library user programs INTP Banks 1 4 REMOTE page 1 banks REMOTE MMC ALL locate points 1 6 REMOTE page 2 locate points UDEF Banks 1 4 REMOTE page 3 banks Use the cursor buttons to select the REQUEST or TRANSMIT switch and then press the ENTER button When REQUEST is used the 01V transmits a MIDI Bulk Dump request message The receiving device then transmits the requested Bulk Dump data to the 01V When TRANSMIT is used the 01V transmits the selected data category via Bulk Dump Bulk Dump 233 TRANSMIT INTERVAL This parameter specifies the interval between data blocks during Bulk Dump transmission MIDI devices with a relatively small data buffer are easily overloaded when too much data is received at once Setting an interval of say 300 milliseconds allows a slower device to process the received MIDI data correctly An interval setting of 0 can be used when transferring Bulk Dump data between 01Vs Using MIDI Bulk Dump In the following example the scene memories and user effects programs from 01V
158. N Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM2 3 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM3 4 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAMA 5 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 5 6 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM6 7 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM7 8 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 8 9 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM9 10 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM10 11 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM11 12 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM12 13 14 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM13 15 16 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM14 MAS ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM15 User Assignment table Use this table for your own assignments Assigning Faders amp On Buttons 201 Channel Control Parameter 1 ON button Fader 2 ON button Fader 3 ON button Fader 4 ON button Fader 5 ON button Fader 6 ON button Fader 7 ON button Fader 8 ON button Fader 9 ON button Fader 10 ON button Fader 11 ON button Fader 12 ON button Fader 13 14 ON button Fader 15 16 ON button Fader MAS ON button Fader 01V Owner s Manua
159. N 2 level OPTION 1 0 17 24 x STEREO _ RETURN 1 2 levels level master level REMOTE 1 Assigned internal parameters REMOTE 2 E REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controllers Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on REMOTE page 1 or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See Assigning Fad ers amp On Buttons on page 194 and User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information Input Channel Level Examples To adjust the level of input channel 3 press the HOME button and then operate fader 3 To adjust the level of input channel 13 14 press the HOME button and then operate fader 13 14 To adjust the level of input channel 20 press the OPTION I O button and then oper ate fader 20 Input Channel Aux Send Examples To adjust the aux 1 send level of input channel 3 press the AUX 1 button and then operate fader 3 To adjust the aux 1 send level of input channel 13 14 press the AUX 1 button and then operate fader 13 14 01V Owner s Manual 36 Chapter 4 Getting Around the User Interface To adjust the aux 1 send level of input channel 20 use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 press SEL button 20 use the cursor buttons to select the AUX 1 fader and then adjust it using the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons Note Auxsend levels for input channels 17 through 24 can only be set using the virtual f
160. ND CH3 01V Owner s Manual 276 Appendix MIDI Parameter Control Change 01V Initial Default 80 FADER EFF1 SEND CH4 81 D 5 FADER EFF1 SEN 82 FADER EFF1 SE CH6 83 FADER EFF1 SE CH7 84 FADER EFF1 SE CH8 85 FADER EFF1 SE CH9 86 FADER EFF1 SE CH10 87 FADER EFF1 SE CH11 88 FADER EFF1 SE CH12 89 FADER EFF1 SE CH13 14 90 FADER EFF1 SE CH15 16 91 FADER EFF2 SEND CH1 92 FADER EFF2 SEND CH2 93 FADER EFF2 SEND CH3 94 FADER EFF2 SEND CH4 95 FADER EFF2 SEND CH5 FADER EFF2 SEND CH6 FADER EFF2 SEND CH7 FADER EFF2 SEND CH8 FADER EFF2 SEND CH9 FADER EFF2 SEND CH10 FADER EFF2 SEND CH11 FADER EFF2 SEND CH12 FADER EFF2 SEND CH13 14 FADER EFF2 SEND CH15 16 111 FADER CHANNEL CH17 112 FADER CHANNEL CH18 113 FADER CHANNEL CH19 114 FADER CHANNEL CH20 115 FADER CHANNEL CH21 116 FADER CHANNEL CH22 117 FADER CHANNEL CH23 118 FADER CHANNEL CH24 119 NO ASSIGN 01V Owner s Manual 03D amp Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table 277 03D amp Programmable Mixer 01 Parameter to Control Change Table Parameter Control 8 NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CH1 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH2 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH3 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH4 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH5 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH6 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH7 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH8 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH9 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH10 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH11 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH12 CHANNEL CHANNEL CH17 NO ASSIGN
161. NITOR 2TR IN Switch This switch is used to select the signal source for the monitor out and phones Monitor bus MONITOR or 2TR IN phono jacks 2TR IN 4 GAIN controls These controls are used to adjust the gain of the input preamps See Setting Input Channel Gain on page 41 for more information MONITOR OUT LEVEL control This control is used to adjust the monitor out level PHONES LEVEL control This control is used to adjust the phones level 01V Owner s Manual 16 Chapter 3 Touring the 01V Display Selected Channel Controls amp Meters YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE OL morrar mne QF IE V VN E HIGH L STEREO R PAN Es az FUNCTION o HI MID l6 s c MEMORY o i ca LO MID ES LOW I6 Gol e e 4 1 2 o0 SELECTED CHANNEL L CD Display This 320 x 80 dot LCD display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating status As well as showing parameter values numerically faders and rotary controls are represented graphically so you can actually see pan and fader positions The display also shows curves and signal level meters See Display on page 28 for more infor mation 2 SELECTED CHANNEL Controls
162. Only the DELAY and FREQ parameters can be controlled by using MIDI Control Change and System Exclusive Parameter Change messages 01V Owner s Manual 138 Chapter 12 Effects Effects Parameters REVERB HALL REVERB ROOM REVERB STAGE REVERB PLATE Hall room stage and plate simulations all with gates Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio LO RATIO 0 1 2 4 Low frequency reverb time ratio DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density E R DLY 0 0 100 0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb Balance of early reflections and reverb 0 ER E R BAL 0 10096 e GATE LVL OFF 60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0 120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency 1 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz 2 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz EARLY REF Early reflections Parameter Range Description S Hall L Hall TYPE Random Revers Type of early reflection simulation Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 i reflections decay
163. Option I O digital outputs can be assigned to bus outs 1 through 4 aux sends 1 through 4 the left or right channels of the stereo output or the post fader direct out puts of input channels 1 through 16 See Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 218 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs Installing Option I O Cards Warning Turn off the 01V before installing an Option card Failure to do so is an electrical shock hazard and may cause serious damage 1 Turn off the 01V 2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover as shown below Keep the cover in a safe place for future use 3 Insert the card into the slot as shown below Push it in all the way so that the card s connector mates correctly with the internal 01V connector 4 Secure the card using the two fixing screws Do not leave the screws loose as the card will not be grounded correctly 5 Turn on the 01V The 01V checks to see what type of Option I O card is installed when it s turned on If installation is successful the type of card installed is displayed on OPTION page 1 as shown below HALL CHORUS 18 19 28 21 22 23 24 01V Owner s Manual Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs 219 Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs The eight Option I O digital outputs can be assigned to bus outs 1 through 4 aux sends 1 through 4 the left
164. REO Dither OUT to OUTPUT gt SELECT MONI LR LISTEN STEREO OUT p M M eter BUS eter master fader BUS OUTPUT 14 0 SELECT 5 LISTEN AUX Meter master fader AUX OUTPUT 14 SELECT gt LISTEN 1 DIGITAL gt from STEREO LISTEN ST CASCADE IN IN gt 9 29 9 Monitor section amp MONITOR 2TRIN OUT to INPUT 15 16 LO 2 2TR IN PHONES RO 2 01V Owner s Manual 80 Chapter 7 Solo Monitors amp Meters Solo Setup The Solo function available on input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns is used to monitor channels individually Two solo modes are available Recording Solo and Mixdown Solo These and configured using the SOLO SETUP parameters on SETUP page 2 Solo has priority over the sources selected using the MONITOR SETUP parameters Channel signals can be soloed pre fader PFL or post fader AFL When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their SOLO buttons continue to work independently Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 2 shown below Em MI MONITOR SETUP J MONI TRIM mio B dB m SETUP CENTER InitData amp Tee eux EEE STCASCADEINJBUS 2 3 9 25 SOLO SETUP J SOLO TRIM HALL CHORUS 5050 SOLO MODE SEL MODE EHRBLE RECORDING SOLO SOLO Use the cursor buttons to select the MONITOR SETUP parameters
165. S 3 CH 7 CH 15 AUX 3 STOUTL OPTION OUT 8 BUS 4 CH 8 CH 16 AUX 4 ST OUT R OPTION OUT 1 BUS 1 CH 1 CH 5 CH 9 CH 13 AUX 1 ST OUTL Output select OPTION OUT 2 BUS 2 CH 2 CH 6 CH 10 CH 14 AUX 2 ST OUT R 4 OPTION OUT 3 BUS 3 CH 3 CH 7 CH 11 CH 15 AUX 3 ST OUT L OPTION OUT 4 BUS 4 CH 4 CH 8 CH 12 CH 16 AUX 4 ST OUT R Dither ON OFF Word length 16 24 bit Memories amp Libraries Type Total Preset User Scene Memories 100 1 99 Effects Library 99 42 57 Dynamics Library 80 40 40 EQ Library 80 40 40 01V Owner s Manual 267 EQ Low Lo Mid Hi Mid High Gain G 18 0 dB to 418 0 dB 0 5 dB steps Frequency F 21 Hz 20 1 kHz 1 12 octave steps 120 steps HPF 10 0 0 10 LPF 10 0 0 10 Q 41 steps 10 0 0 10 41 steps 41 steps L SHELF H SHELF 1 4 band only low and high bands only on input channels 17 through 24 2 When the low and high EQ bands are configured as HPF and LPF their gain controls function as filter on and off switches 01V Owner s Manual 268 Appendix B Specifications Analog Inputs Actual For Use Input level Connection PAD Load With Console Impedance Nominal Sensitivity Nominal Before Clip 0 60 66 dB 60 dB 46 dB rn 50 609 gi Input chan
166. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE FOH 43H 0nH BULK DUMP L e 7e 43H 2nH BULK REQUEST CTL ECHO ON oe PGM ECHO ON 0 MIDI OUT PARAM ECHO ON 0 4 PARAMETER CHANGE BASIC FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS Opppnnnn pn p mode parameter change or response for request 3 parameter request n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 GROUP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID digital mixer MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE Ottttttt tt type DATA Oddddddd dd0 data0 Oddddddd ddn datan EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive type 0x00 edit buffer byte operation format 0x01 system memory setup backup byte operation format 0x02 function call mem lib recall mem lib store clear title 0x03 controller LCD fader mode byte operation format 0x04 multiple link fader mode solo mode 0x05 remote meter meter data 0x10 edit buffer 7bit operation format Ox40 edit buffer bit operation format 0x41 system memory setup backup bit operation format Ox43 controller key remote bit operation format PARAMETER CHANGE byte operation for type 0x00 edit buffer Reception This message is received if Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS If Parameter Change ECHO is ON this will be echoed The specified parameter will be controlled when this message is received
167. T 105 dB typical dynamic range CH INPUT to STEREO OUT 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 3 dB frequency response 32 bit internal digital audio processing 44 bit digital EQ processing 01V Features 24 inputs including 8 digital inputs 14 outputs STEREO OUT OMNI OUTS 8 assignable digital outputs Continuously variable gain controls Balanced XLRs with 48 V phantom powering input channels 1 through 12 26 dB pad input channels 1 through 12 Balanced phone jack inputs input channels 1 through 16 Four configurable analog Omni outs AUX BUS CH DIRECT STEREO Option I O slot for digital interface with 8 track digital multitrack recorders 8 assignable digital outputs from an Option I O card Tascam ADAT AES EBU Coaxial type digital input and output Versatile solo modes for comprehensive monitoring 3 fader groups for multiple fader control 3 mute groups for multiple mute control 250 ms input delay 1 16 and 300 ms output delay STEREO OUT OMNI OUTs Channel Copy function Stereo pair operation for input channels aux sends and bus outs 100 scene memories for storing mix snapshots Four band parametric EQ 2 band on Option I O input channels Powerful EQ library with 40 preset programs and 40 user programs Dedicated controls for EQ and pan Two stereo multi effects processors onboard Powerful effects library with 42 preset programs and 57 user programs The equivalent of 22 dynamics processors onboard compressor gate ducking
168. TED CHANNEL OO0000000000 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STEREO 2 6 MASTER SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL 1 INC PARAMETER gt CURSOR 1231546 __7 __8_ 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 MASTER The individual sections of the 01V are explained on the following pages 01V Owner s Manual Panel Controls 15 Analog Control Section 2 3 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 15 16 MONITOR o 2TRIN 0 ux B cANEZH H cawED B cuNEH BEGANEU H caNED B cANEH BEGANEU H cANE B GANEU BEGANEU B cANEU LEVEL LEVEL MONIT 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 0798 Prones 4 71 i D PAD switches These switches are used to turn on and off the 26 dB input pads See Pad Switches on page 41 for more information 2 15 16 2TR IN Switch This switch is used to select the signal source for input channels 15 and 16 phone jacks 15 and 16 15 16 or the 2TR IN phono jacks 2TR IN 3 MO
169. Table 273 Appendix C MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Initial User Program Initial User Program Initial User Change Scene Scene Change Scene Scene Change Scene Scene 1 01 44 44 87 87 2 02 45 45 88 88 3 03 46 46 89 89 4 04 47 47 90 90 5 05 48 48 91 91 6 06 49 49 92 92 7 07 50 50 93 93 8 08 51 51 94 94 9 09 52 52 95 95 10 10 53 53 96 96 11 11 54 54 97 97 12 12 55 55 98 98 13 13 56 56 99 99 14 14 57 57 100 00 15 15 58 58 101 16 16 59 59 102 17 17 60 60 103 18 18 61 61 104 19 19 62 62 105 20 20 63 63 106 21 21 64 64 107 22 22 65 65 108 23 23 66 66 109 24 24 67 67 110 25 25 68 68 111 26 26 69 69 112 27 27 70 70 113 28 28 71 71 114 29 29 72 72 115 30 30 73 73 116 31 31 74 74 117 32 32 75 75 118 33 33 76 76 119 34 34 77 77 120 35 35 78 78 121 36 36 79 79 122 37 37 80 80 123 38 38 81 81 124 39 39 82 82 125 40 40 83 83 126 41 41 84 84 127 42 42 85 85 128 43 43 86 86 01V Owner s Manual 274 Appendix MIDI 01V Parameter to Control Change Table Control
170. Tx Rx 0x01 eq lib recall 0 79 library 1 80 0 19 22 Tx Rx 0x02 dyn lib recall 0 79 library 1 80 0 13 16 19 22 Tx Rx 0x03 eff lib recall 0 98 library 1 99 0 Tx Rx 0x10 scene store 1 99 memory 1 99 0 7 Rx only Ox11 eq lib store 40 79 library 41 80 0 19 22 Rx only 0x12 dyn lib store 40 79 library 41 80 0 13 16 19 22 Rx only 0x13 eff lib store 42 98 library 43 99 0 Rx only Channel 0 11 ch1 12 12 13 13 14 15 16 14 15 return 1 2 16 19 aux 1 4 22 st mas 23 30 ch17 24 0 1 EFFI1 2 for eff lib recall store Ox7f current edit buffer 0x00 scene recall is transmitted only when a program which is not assigned to the program change table has been recalled In other cases a program change will normally be transmitted PARAMETER CHANGE type 0x02 function call title Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS this message will be received When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be ech oed When this message is received the title of the corresponding mem ory library will be modified Transmission Parameter Change messages are transmitted on the Rx CH channel in response to a request STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04
171. Types 169 THRESHOLD This determines the level at which the gate closes cutting off the sig nal Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected Signals at or below the threshold however cause the gate to close The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter RANGE This determines the level to which the gate closes Think of it as a brick hold ing a garden gate open so that a certain amount of signal always flows through For a setting of 70 dB the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold For a setting of 30 dB however the gate half closes For a setting of 0 dB the gate has no effect When signals are gated abruptly the sudden disappearance can sometimes sound odd This parameter causes the gate to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely HOLD This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level ATTACK This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the thresh old level Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive sounds Too slow an attack time makes some sounds appear backwards DECAY This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through With a maximum decay time of between 42 and 63 sec onds you could eve
172. UT Drums Vocals 01V Owner s Manual 244 Chapter 18 5 Examples Two 01Vs amp two ADAT Interface Recorders This example shows how two 01Vs can be used with two 8 track digital tape recorders or 8 track hard disk recorders featuring ADAT optical connections to create a 32 input 16 track fully digital recording system with the 32 mic line inputs and 16 digital tape returns providing up to 48 inputs during mixdown 01V A and 01V B are cascaded together using the Stereo Digital In and Stereo Digital Out connections 01V B audio signals are combined into a stereo mix which is then fed to 01V A via the Digital Stereo Coaxial connections and mixed with the audio signals of 01V A The TO HOST connection links the two 01Vs together for simultaneous operation so when for example the fader mode is set to Aux 1 on 01V A the fader mode on 01V B is also set to Aux 1 and vice versa See Cascading 01Vs on page 214 for more information System Components Two 01V Digital Mixing Consoles Two 8 Option cards Two 8 track digital tape recorders or 8 track hard disk recorders such as Alesis ADAT XT Alesis M20 Akai DR8 Akai 08 Fostex D 90 or Fostex CX 8 Four ADAT optical cables sync cable See Installing Option I O Cards on page 218 for MY8 AT installation instructions Wordclock Configuration For digital audio transfer digital audio devices m
173. Viewing Effects Send Settings on page 127 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Muting Effects Sends 129 Muting Effects Sends ON Effects send masters can be muted using the MASTER ON button which lights up when an effects send is on The function of this button depends on the selected Fader mode See ON Buttons on page 34 for more infor mation 1 Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to select an effects send An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears LEPPECTIEOITY TiTLE Reverb Hall HALL NI OLY HI RATIO 36 8 4 3 The MASTER ON button now functions as effects send master on off switch for the selected effects send 2 Use the MASTER ON button to turn the effects send on or off The effects send master switches can be viewed and set on the VIEW pages See View ing Effects Send Settings on page 127 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 130 Chapter 12 Effects Viewing Effects Returns Settings Settings for the effects returns can be viewed and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW pages 1 and 2 1 Use the effects returns SEL button to select an effects returns RTNI or RTN2 appears on the display indicating that an effects return is selected 2 Use the VIEW button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below RTM1 VIEW J DELAY RTM1 VIEW RUM EFFECI FADER 1 2 89 4 2 4 1
174. While DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed the ENTER button turns the dynamics processor on or off regardless of the cursor position Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them 01V Owner s Manual 166 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Editing the Dynamics Processors 1 Dynamics processors are edited on the DYNAMICS page 1 as shown below Use the DYNAMICS button to locate DYNAMICS page 1 as shown below CH1 DYNAMICS EDIT L COMP KEYINiSELF s THRESHOLD e OUT GAIN 8dB ATTACK RELEASE 258 HALL CHORUS Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 and MASTER to select channels Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them TYPE This is the name of the type of dynamics processor currently selected COMP GATE DUCKING EXPAND COMPANDER H or COMPANDER S ON OFF This switch is used to turn on or off the dynamics processors While DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed the ENTER button turns the dynamics processor on or off regardless of the cursor position KEY IN This parameter is used to select the trigger source for the dynamics proces sors and can set to SELF 1 the signal being processed is used as the trigger signal or triggered by a signal from another input channel from CH1 through
175. Y L Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 SORORE feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time E Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right NOTER channel DELAY R HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine NOTE FB 1 EB DLY Delay and early reflected delay balance 096 early zs 0 DEEP 0 100 reflected delay 100 delay S Hall L Hall TYPE Random Revers Type of early reflection simulation Plate Spring ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 TEMPO 25 300 determine DELAY L DELAY R and FB DLY 1 h D d 4 4 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 154 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 12 Effects DELAY REV Delay and reverb effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left cha
176. able Control of specific faders can be disabled by the midi fader control input mute settings If this message is received while the control assign table page is dis played the cursor location will move to that control number Transmission If Control Change TX is ON this message is transmitted on the Tx CH whenever a parameter specified in the control assign table is operated If Control Change ECHO is ON these messages will be merged with the unit s own output while taking advantage of running status STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change DATA cc Control No 0 95 102 119 Ovvvvvvv vv Control Value 0 127 The control value is converted to the parameter value according to the following equation C 128 byte parameter 16384 word parameter S number of total possible steps for the parameter C S X remainder Y INT Y 1 2 Z If MIDI DATA Z lt 0 then If MIDI DATA Z X gt MAX then In other cases INT MIDI DATA Z X gt param 0 gt param MAX gt param 1 1 4 PROGRAM CHANGE Cn Reception Received when Program Change RX is ON if the Rx CH matches However if OMNI is ON this is received regardless of the channel This is echoed if Program Change ECHO is ON A scene memory will be recalled according to the settings of the Pro gram change table Transmission If Program Change TX is ON this is transmitted on the Tx CH channel when a scene mem
177. aders on OPTION page 2 Input Channel Effects Send Examples To adjust the Effect 1 send level of input channel 3 press the EFFECT 1 button and then operate fader 3 To adjust the Effect 1 send level of input channel 13 14 press the EFFECT 1 button and then operate fader 13 14 To adjust the Effect 1 send level of input channel 20 use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 press SEL button 20 use the cursor buttons to select the EFFECT 1 fader and then adjust it using the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons Note Effects send levels for input channels 17 through 24 can only be set using the virtual faders on OPTION page 2 Master Level Examples To adjust the level of stereo out press the HOME button and then operate the MAS TER fader To adjust the AUX 1 master send level press the AUX 1 button and then operate the MASTER fader To adjust the EFFECT 1 master send level press the EFFECT 1 button and then operate the MASTER fader To adjust the BUS OUT 1 master send level use the PAN ROUT button to locate PAN ROUT page 3 use the cursor buttons to select the BUS 1 fader and then adjust it using the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons Note Bus out master levels can only be set using the virtual faders on PAN ROUT page 3 01V Owner s Manual Title Edit Dialog Box 37 Title Edit Dialog Box The Title Edit dialog box is used to t
178. al 44 1 kHz Sampling rate External 44 1 kHz 10 to 48 kHz 6 Signal delay Less than 2 5 ms fs 44 1 kHz CH IN to ST OUT Fader 15 x 60 mm motorized Master faders except ST OUT 0 to 72 dB 128 steps 60 mm Fader resolution Other faders 6 to 72 dB 128 steps 60 mm ST OUT fader to 96 dB 128 steps 60 mm Total harmonic distortion Input gain min Less than 0 1 20 Hz 20 kHz 14 dB into 6000 Less than 0 0296 1 kHz 18 dB into 6000 CH IN to ST OUT Frequency response 20 Hz 20 kHz 1 3 dB 4 dB into 6000 Dynamic range D A converter ST OUT 110 dB typ maximum signal to noise level ratio A D D A to ST OUT 105 dB typ Hum amp Noise 20 Hz 20 kHz Rs 1509 Input gain max Input pad 0 dB Input sensitivity 60 dB Measured with a 6 dB oct filter at 12 7 kHz equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with an infinite dB oct attenuation 128 dB equivalent input noise 94 dB residual output noise ST OUT off 94 dB 98 dB S N ST OUT ST fader at nominal level and all CH IN faders at min 64 dB 68 dB S N ST OUT fader at nominal level and one CH IN fader at nominal level CH IN CH 1 12 to ST OUT OMNI BUS OUT UE CH IN CH 1 12 to OMNI Maximum AUX OUT pre input fader 70 dB voltage gain CH IN CH 13 16 to ST OUT 30 dB CH IN CH 1 12 to MONI 76 dB TOR OUT via ST bus Adjacent in
179. and the PARAMETER wheel 1 and 1 INC buttons and ENTER but ton to set them SOLO This switch is used to enable and disable the Solo function When set to DIS ABLE signals are not soloed the SOLO indicator on the soloed channel lights up instead of flashing and the SOLO status indicator does not light up SOLO MODE These switches are used to select the Solo mode Recording Solo or Mixdown Solo In Recording Solo mode Soloed channel signals are fed to the Monitor bus and then output to the monitor out and phones No other outputs are affected Input channels that are turned off can also be soloed If LISTEN is set to AFL off channels are moni tored PFL This mode is typically used to monitor individual input signals in recording and sound reinforcement applications and is useful for checking whether signals are clipping or making EQ adjustments in isolation In Mixdown Solo mode Soloed channels signals are fed to the Stereo bus and then out put to the stereo output monitor out and phones Non soloed channels are muted Only channels that are routed to the Stereo bus cab be soloed For the purpose of solo ing channels that are turned off are turned on when soloed This mode is typically used when adjusting individual channels during mixdown SEL MODE These switches set the Solo Select mode In LAST SOLO mode only one channels can be soloed at a time In MIX SOLO mode however several channels can be soloed
180. and then press the MAS TER SEL button EFFI appears on the display Solo Buttons The SOLO buttons are used to solo channels for monitoring See Solo Setup on page 80 for more information The following channels can be soloed CH1 through CH24 Input channels 1 through 24 RTN1 2 Fffects returns 1 and 2 SOLO button 13 14 RETURN 1 2 Fader Mode RETURN 1 2 solo AUX3 CH 1 16 solo EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 CH 17 24 z solo REMOTE 1 REMOTE 2 A REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controller The SOLO buttons 1 through 16 can be used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information Usage Examples To solo input channel 3 press the HOME button and then press SOLO button 3 Ifa fader mode other than Option I O or Remote is selected it s not necessary to press the HOME button To solo input channels 13 14 press the HOME button and then press SOLO button 13 14 If a fader mode other than Option I O or Remote is selected it s not necessary to press the HOME button To solo input channel 20 press the OPTION I O button and then press SOLO but ton 20 01V Owner s Manual 34 Chapter 4 Getting Around the User Interface ON Buttons The ON buttons are used to turn channels on or off They work with the following channels CH1 thr
181. annel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000000 00 100 90 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 01100100 64 01001100 4c 01001101 4 M 00100000 20 y 00100000 20 N 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 F 00110100 34 4 01001001 49 T Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 DATA Oddddddd ds Remote Internal Parameter Mem ory 90bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive All data is 7 bit data REMOTE Internal Parameter MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c 01001101 4 M 00100000 20 2 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01001001 49 T Obbbbbbb bb b 0 3 bank no 1 4 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 287 REMOTE MMC MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000000 00 34 24 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 00100010 22 01001100 4c 01001101 4 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38
182. appears when this function is run Select OK and press the ENTER button to start digital input scanning Mill Start H Clock Auto Scannins ARE YOU SURE To select the wordclock source manually use the following switches This switch selects the internal 44 1 kHz wordclock A highlighted switch like REALE the one shown here indicates that the 01V is synchronized to the wordclock source and ready for use This switch selects the Digital Stereo In as the wordclock source A switch like the one shown here with a single diagonal line indicates that a wordclock sig nal is present at this input but the 01V is not synchronized to it This switch selects the Option as the wordclock source A switch like the one shown here with two diagonal lines indicates that no wordclock signal is present at this input 01V Owner s Manual 210 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs stata highlighted switch with two diagonal lines like the one shown here indicates aM that no wordclock is being received from the selected source and the Fs win dow will probably show UNLOCK Before using the 01V correct the external wordclock or select another source This condition typically occurs when the external wordclock source is turned off or the cable carrying the wordclock signal has been disconnected If the DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V
183. are received OMNI determines whether the 01V receives Control Change messages on all 16 MIDI Channels ON or just the Rx channel OFF ECHO determines whether received Control Change messages are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port When ECHO is on the 01V receives Control Change messages and echoes them through to the MIDI OUT port regardless of the MIDI Channel set tings PARAM CHANGE Parameter Change System Exclusive messages are used to con trol 01V parameters in real time See System Exclusive Parameter Control on page 231 for more information The three ON OFF switches in this group are as follows Tx determines whether the 01V transmits Parameter Change System Exclusive mes sages when mix parameters are adjusted Rx determines whether or not the 01V adjusts mix parameters when Parameter Change System Exclusive messages are received When Rx is turned on the 01V transmits Parameter Change System Exclusive messages in response to requests even if Tx is turned off 01V Owner s Manual 226 Chapter 17 MIDI 01V Owner s Manual ECHO determines whether received Parameter Change System Exclusive messages are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port When ECHO is on the 01V receives Parameter Change System Exclusive messages and echoes them through to the MIDI OUT port regardless of the MIDI Channel settings BULK This switch determines whether the 01V receives MIDI Bulk requests and MIDI Bulk Dump messages When turn
184. at this connection is only necessary when the digital multitrack recorder is used as a wordclock slave The sampling rate will be the same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded If a CD player is used instead of the DAT the sampling rate will be fixed at 44 1 kHz the industry standard for music CDs System Notes The TDIF 1 connector on the MY8 TD is connected to the digital multitrack recorder using a Tascam PW 88D digital audio cable MYS8 TD cards feature a device selector switch that should be set according to the type of recorder connected EXT 88 for DA 88 INT 38 for DA 38 or other recorder Although the 01V is a four bus mixer a combination of bus outs aux sends and channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight track simulta neous recording See Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information The BNC wordclock connection from the 01V to the digital multitrack recorder is only necessary when the digital multitrack recorder is used as a wordclock slave 01V Owner s Manual 01V amp Tascam Interface Recorder 247 Monitors 7 dphones Personal computer running MIDI software 01V PW 88D wordclock slave PHONES MONITOR Digital multitrack TDIF 1 Wordclock master WORD SYNC IN
185. ate MIDI page 3 as shown below CONTROL CHRHMGE INITIALIZE CTL CHG PARAMETER 4 2 FRDER CHANNEL CH2 FADER CHANNEL CH1 M ER HRLL CHORUS GG 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the CTL CHG column and then use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a Control Change Since Control Changes 0 and 32 are used in conjunction with Program Change and Bank Select messages some MIDI sequencers may not record these Control Changes correctly In this case set Control Changes 0 and 32 to NO ASSIGN 3 Usethe right cursor button to select the PARAMETER columns and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select parame ters parameter to Control Change assignment table is TABLE INITIALIZE provided on page 274 To reset the assignments to their Choose Arransement initial settings use the cursor buttons to select the INI TIALIZE switch and then press ENTER button The dialog box shown here appears Choose DEFAULT 950 to initialize The P MIX 01 and 03D switches are used to configure Control Changes for use with the Yamaha Programmable Mixer 01 or Yamaha 03D Digital Mixer Parameter to Control Change assignment tables for these are provided on page 277 The current parameter to Control Change assignment table can be stored to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data
186. ation waveform TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FPR TE Rd 442 04 4 4 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 PHASER 16 stage phaser Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth ee ARE phase OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset STAGE 2 4 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FRR Bh 4403 4 4 4 d 5 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 144 Chapter 12 Effects AUTOPAN Auto panner Parameter Range Description FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 1006 Modulation depth DIR 2 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 H3 ROG B ddd 4 d gt 2 L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn Turn R 3 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO
187. audio signals The DSP Digital Signal Processor chips used for these calculations never get their sums wrong so once past the initial A D conversion audio signals are immune from signal degradation With the 01V noise distortion and crosstalk are virtually eliminated and you ll hear a new clarity in your mixes Once in the digital domain it makes sense to keep audio data digital as multiple AD DA conversions can degrade signal quality With an Option I O interface card the 01V can be connected directly to a modular digital multitrack recorder thereby keeping audio data in the digital domain for both recording and mixing The final stereo mix can be transferred to a two track digital recorder using the 01V s Coaxial STEREO OUT Onboard stereo multi effects processors and dynamics processors mean that signals remain in the digital domain eliminating unnecessary AD DA conversions Digital sig nal processing is performed using third generation Yamaha DSPs as used in the Yamaha ProR3 Digital Reverberator 01V Owner s Manual Key Feature Discussion 5 01V Sonic Performance The 01V s linear 20 bit 128 times oversampling A D converters provide a typical dynamic range of 105 dB The STEREO OUT features 20 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters while the MONITOR OUT and OMNI OUTS feature 18 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters Oversampling techniques effectively increase the inter nal sampling rate so side effects caus
188. ayed on the local 01V are in fact those of the remote 01V In addition the meters on the local 01V display the signals levels of the remote 01V This is useful when two 01Vs are cascaded together See Cascading 01Vs on page 214 for more information Use the MIDI button to locate MIDI page 5 as shown below ne LOCAL CONTROL INTERNAL PARAMETER Use the cursor buttons to select the LOCAL CONTROL switch and then press the ENTER button Local Control is turned off and MIDI page 5 appears as shown below OFF While Local Control is turned off the function area of the display appears highlighted as shown here serving as a reminder that Local Control is off The TRANSMIT and REQUEST functions are used to match local and EDIT remote settings when 01Vs are first connected The TRANSMIT func tion transmits the local 01V CONTROLLER settings to the remote 01V The REQUEST function requests the parameter settings of the remote 01V and sets the local 01V CON TROLLER accordingly The internal parameters of the local 01V are unaffected by either function For scene memories the local 01V stores and recalls its own parameter settings regard less of the Local Control function Be aware that when Local Control is being used to control a remote 01V 1 Local Control is off on the local 01V remote control may be disrupted temporarily due to wordclock abnormalities on the local 01V Also if parameters are a
189. below appears and the Home fader mode is selected This page can also be located using the EQ ATT button Rux1EGg MUN a LOK i 12 Lou T L SHELF 8 78 The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param eters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them When aux sends are paired Pairing Aux Sends on page 101 their EQs are linked 01V Owner s Manual Adjusting the EQ 65 For the Stereo Output Press the HOME button Press the MASTER SEL button ST is the selected channel Use the HIGH HI MID LO MID and LOW buttons to select EQ bands and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain respec tively If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Prefer ences on page 203 the EQ page shown below appears and the Home fader mode is selected This page can also be located using the EQ ATT button HI MID HIGH AED OE 1 00k 4 00k 18 8k _8 _8 0 T8 H E The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param eters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them 01V Owner s Manual 66 Chapter 6 EQ EQ Specs The following table contains the EQ specs Low Lo Mid
190. ble could be used instead of the splitter box 01V Owner s Manual 01V amp Pro Tools AES EBU 251 Pro Tools wordclock master Monitors ch e 50 pin Pro Tools cable O Audio Interface 888 XLR to D sub splitter box OPTION I O 25 pin D sub cable To computer Serial port DAT recorder wordclock slave Digital in DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL MIDI IN 00 00 00 00 A Digital out MIC LINE inputs 1 16 Drum machine Guitar processor oooo Bass processor oooo HH 01V Owner s Manual 253 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot turn on the 01V Advice Make sure that the power cord is connected to a suitable AC wall out let See Connecting the Power Cord on page 11 for more informa tion Make sure that the 01V POWER switch is set to the ON position See Turning On the 01V on page 11 for more information If you still cannot turn on the 01V contact your Yamaha dealer The display is difficult to read Connected a condenser type microphone but
191. bleshooting 253 Appendix 257 OU VALS vel Digerati 257 Display Messages eie ore ble va eee aO Ee Eia ceeds 258 01V Owner s Manual viii Contents DECULILY COVED srs Ret pde diia bein eek ae egw d a RU 259 Rack mountine Kit e ion ato e oe e we wine Be 259 Appendix B 5 261 General cos ax beati us em qae Ub vafe Dette 261 uc Rn dno D ORO 263 Option I O Inputs 17 24 need optional 264 Digital Stereo uo ex wh etat IP ENS SE Cx 264 Return 1 2 Internal Effect 1 2 7 a aea mo Peta SOR nC 264 DEAE qc TO 265 ELO E 265 OUE coria dI aues RI E era Rae oa qd 265 Omn Out A uod use e etos e Von re a e code RR 265 Monitor Solo ccc cece hn 266 Digitabstereo Qut qaa ov Oe cen HOOP Oei 266 Option I O Output need optional card 266 Memories amp Libraries 266 P pL UU T KT 267 Analog ANP MIS RODA UR MC I Vb dust 268 Analog UU DU a io NI dh iei been 268 Digital Audio Inputs viu desk ica eren b ORG ACC 269 Digital Audio OUtp ts i ees v os ORI e Oe 269 Cards ood ph utto n eese qii deir 269 Controll Cus ef exe EE ie bee
192. both 01Vs Aux sends 2 3 and 4 can be cascaded in a similar manner using inputs 14 15 and 16 on 01V B Cascading 01Vs 215 Cascade Delay Since it takes 01V A several hundred microseconds to process its digital audio data the input signals of 01V B need to be delayed slightly to bring them into phase with the sig nals from 01V A The following illustration shows why phase correction is necessary L R LR Since signal L has been processed by STEREO STEREO both 01V A and 01V B it s out of DIGITAL DIGITAL phase with signal R To bring the OUT IN signals back in phase input signal R is delayed by 14 samples on 01V B 01V A 01V B This kind of phase correction is not unique to the 01V AII digital audio equipment takes a few hundred microseconds to process digital audio data Use the Delay function Delaying Channel Signals on page 45 on 01V B to delay all input channels by 14 samples Cascading Two or More 01Vs In this example the channel delay should be set to 14 samples on 01V C 28 samples on 01V B DIGITAL DIGITAL STEREO STEREO COAXIAL COAXIAL N 01V C 01V Owner s Manual 216 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs About Option I O Cards The 01V features a single slot for an optional Option I O card providing eight digital inputs input channels 17 through 24 and eight assignable digital outputs Option I O allows a direct digital connection to digital multitrack recorders with cards
193. button AUX appears on the display indicating that an aux send is selected Use the DYNAMICS button to locate DYNAMICS page 1 as shown below AUX DYNAMICS EDIT J THRESHOLD e OUT GAIN 8dB i ATTACK RELEASE 258 e m I EDIT KNEE HALL CHORUS i 2 RATIO 2 5 1 Press the ENTER button to turn the dynamics processor The ON OFF switch appears highlighted when the dynamics processor is on While DYNAMICS page 1 is displayed the ENTER button turns the dynamics processor on or off regardless of the cursor position 01V Owner s Manual Using the Dynamics Processors 165 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them When aux sends are paired Making Aux Send Pairs on page 101 their dynamics processors are linked For the Stereo Output Press the HOME button and then the MASTER SEL button ST appears on the display indicating that the stereo output is selected Use the DYNAMICS button to locate DYNAMICS page 1 as shown below STOUT DYNAMICS EDIT J Type L COMP OFF THRESHOLD OUT GAIN HALL CHORUS 3 8dB 6 AdB ATTACK RELEASE E 250ms Press the ENTER button to turn on the dynamics processor The ON OFF switch appears highlighted when the dynamics processor is on
194. c HR tae 28 Display macte ede tS 28 Display Elements ESTER io DERE la ga d 30 dad ia e e aac Vnde ES 31 PARAMETER Wheel e PR 5 ees 31 1 DUITOBS a 4 ree PE oe UII 31 ENTER one bo dana s ORE cn o 31 Fader Modes dono ode o eae 32 Title Edit Dialog BOX evadere teo EXE eX e o ad 37 Input Channels 39 Input Channel Overview asser oM eC tee 40 Phantom Powering ad CPC Ad 41 Switches MH whe whe Be 41 Setting Input Channel Gain caca d ae ceed Ups 41 Metering Input Channels 41 Changing the Input 42 Attenuating Input Channel Signals 43 Applying EQ to Input 44 Input Channels Dynamics Processors 44 Delaying Channel Signals o uberes re ida Dee aee ox 45 Mute Input des acean ace ate SE Cd 46 Setting Input Channel Levels 46 Panning Input Channels sace os Da A y defe calc dA TID ci da a 47 Routing Input Channels 44 eate dati AO olo ute 49 Monitoring Input Channels 50 Input Channels amp Aux Se
195. cade signal is set by the FLIP switch The stereo cascade signal can be mon itored pre or post this switch using the monitors or phones See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information Note To prevent noise when using the Digital Stereo In connection the source device and the 01V must be wordclock synchronized See About Wordclocks on page 206 for more information Digital audio signals containing emphasis are automatically deemphasized In the following example the Digital Stereo Coaxial In on the 01V is connected to the digital output of a DAT recorder for mixing from a digital source The 01V works as wordclock slave while the DAT works as wordclock master On 01V SETUP page 1 set the wordclock source to ST IN DIGITAL See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information DAT recorder DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN 00 00 00 00 Digital Out 01V Owner s Manual 214 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs Cascading 01Vs 01V Owner s Manual By using the Stereo Digital In and Stereo Digital Out connections two 01Vs can be cas caded together for 48 channel digital mixing as shown below 01V A audio signals are combined into a stereo mix that is then sent to 01V B via the Digital Stereo Coaxial connections and mixed with the audio signals of 01 V B 0
196. channels or paired input channels from 1 through 12 are selected dotted lines appear to the right of these control icons when an odd or left channel is selected Similarly dotted lines appear to the left as shown here when an even or right chan nel is selected Ri6 Ber Page area This area of the display is where the various setup utility and mixing function pages appear As well as showing parameter values numerically faders and rotary controls are represented graphically so you can actually see pan and fader posi tions See Display Elements on page 30 for more information An example page is shown below p F 125 4 00 16 0k Q G 15 5dB 8 adB 18 0 01V Owner s Manual 30 Chapter 4 Getting Around the User Interface Display Elements This section explains the various control elements that appear on display pages Switches Switches appear as boxes with a shadowed outline i e a thicker out TITLE line on the right side and bottom ao Simple on off type switches are highlighted when they are turned oa on In this example the ST switch is on aa 810 The labels inside some switches change when they turned and Eu off as these phase switches show 3 For option type switches only one switch can be on at a time In this STEREO OUT example the monitor source can be set to either stereo out or ST CASCADE IN but not b
197. characteristics 0 dead 10 INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 100 Reverb density ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency 01V Owner s Manual 139 Effects Parameters GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE Early reflections with gate and early reflections with reverse gate Parameter Range Description TYPE Type A Type B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0 1 20 0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0 10 Early reflections decay characteristics 0 dead 10 live INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF 0 10 Reverb diffusion left right reverb spread DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency feedback ratio ER NUM 1 19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN 99 to 99 Feedback gain HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency MONO DELAY Basic repeat delay Parameter Range Description DELAY 0 0 2730 0 ms Delay time NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Feedback gain plus values for normal phase Ae 0 ec
198. cified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter OUT GAIN This sets the compressor s output signal level and can be used to com pensate for the overall level change caused by the compression process KNEE This determines how compression is applied at the threshold point When set to hard compression at the specified ratio is applied as soon as the input signal level exceeds the specified threshold For knee settings from 1 to 5 however compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold creating a more natural sound This is called soft knee compression ATTACK This determines how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is compressed almost immedi ately With a slow attack time however the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Attack times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start RELEASE This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold If the release time is too short the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping i e noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too long the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears and it will be compressed incorrectly Release times from 0 1 to 0 5 seconds are a good place to start RATIO This determine
199. clock synchro nized when digital audio is transferred from one device to another See About Word clocks on page 206 for more information If the 01V is the only digital audio device in your system no special wordclock settings are required and the 01V synchronizes to its own internal wordclock Add DAT recorder or digital multitrack recorder however and the system must be configured so that digital audio equipment synchronizes to common wordclock source The Sys tem Examples on page 241 show how to configure wordclock settings with a variety of digital audio equipment Connecting the Power Cord Warning Turn off all equipment before making any connections Connect the 01V power cord to a suitable AC wall outlet one that conforms to the power supply requirements stated on the rear panel of the 01V Turning On the 01V POWER ON OFF Always turn on your audio equipment in the following order 1 Sound sources 2 01V H 3 Monitor amplifier To turn on the 01V press the 01V POWER switch located on the rear panel When turned on the 01V startup screen appears for a few seconds and then the display page selected when the 01V was last turned off appears Turning Off the 01V Always turn off your audio equipment in the following order 1 Monitor amplifier 2 01V 3 Sound sources To turn off the 01V press the 01V POWER switch located on the rear panel parameter settings sc
200. computer MIDI footswitch keyboard or sequencer See also Scene memories MMC MIDI Machine Control A set of MIDI messages for controlling record ers video tape machines and other studio equipment Typical MMC commands include Stop Play Rewind and Pause Mdulation A technique for controlling a signal s frequency pitch or amplitude level using an LFO low frequency oscillator The LFO frequency is set using modu lation speed parameters and the amount of LFO control is set using modulation depth parameters 01V Owner s Manual Glossary 295 MSB Most Significant Byte The byte of a digital word that represents the high est value Contrast with LSB Noise gate An electronic switch that opens if the trigger signal falls below a speci fied threshold and closes if the trigger signal exceeds the threshold Typically used to shut off unwanted hiss and noise Nominal level See Operating Level Nyquist theorem The Nyquist theorem states that the sampling rate of a digital audio system must be at least twice that of the highest audio frequency otherwise wave form distortion know as aliasing will occur See also Aliasing OMNI The MIDI mode in which a device responds to MIDI data on all 16 channels Operating level This is the signal level at which a piece of audio equipment is designed to operate The two most common operating levels are 10 dBV 316 mV which is used by semiprofessional equipment an
201. ction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 ROG B ddd 4 d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 DISTORTION Distortion effect Parameter DST TYPE Range DST1 DST2 OVD1 OVD2 CRUNCH Description Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume TONE 10 to 10 Tone N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction 147 Effects Parameters AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE Bu UN d Distortion type DST distortion OVD overdrive N GATE 0 20 Noise reduction DRIVE 0 100 Distortion drive MASTER 0 100 Master volume CAB DEP 0 10096 Speaker cabinet simulation depth BASS 0 100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0 100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0 100 High tone control EQ F 99 8 0 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQ G 12 to 12 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQQ 10 0 0 10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth 1 STK M1 STK M2 THRASH MIDBST CMB PG CMB VR CMB DX CMB TW MINI FLAT DYNA FILTER Dynamically controlled filter Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity TYPE LPF HPF BPF Filter t
202. d Use the VIEW button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below Signal level meters for effects send 1 are displayed on VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below EFF1 DELAY ROUTE L SEND RIN MUTE EFF1 VIEH m FADER Fe E a Signal level meters for effects send 2 are displayed on VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below EFFZ DELAY L SEND RIN EFFZ VIEW FRDER HALL CHORUS amp Stereo Output 87 Stereo Output In this chapter About the Stereo Output up nacido i Bere d deel 88 Analog Stereo Output etna sok dea ip e 88 2TR Out amp the Stereo Output qu cya NOE oO GC c 88 Coaxial Digital Out amp the Stereo Output iso ex eno ee 88 Option I O amp the Stereo QUUD us RO OR GER DO abe aes 88 Omni Outs amp the Stereo Output ci id ER DH ECCE e 88 Solo amp the Stereo porc oe ea qoae aO ROCA 88 Monitoring the Stereo Output ose ads Da ed caa es auta d eaten cranes 88 Metering the Stereo Output EN EET be a ebd ER 89 Routing Signals to the Stereo Output cen I e 89 Viewing Stereo Output Settings 89 Setting the Stereo Output Level e eoa det c e 90 Muting the Stereo OUDDUES aee 90 Balancing the Stereo Output casco enses da DG
203. d 4 dBu 1 23 V which is used by professional equipment Oversampling Sampling an audio signal at a rate higher than the actual sampling rate to reduce noise caused by quantization errors PAM Pulse Amplitude Modulation In the first part of the A D conversion process pulses occurring at the sampling rate are modulated by an analog audio signal See also PCM PC Originally the abbreviation for personal computer Although today it s used as the generic name for any IBM compatible personal computer usually running a ver sion of the Microsoft Windows operating system PCM Pulse Code Modulation In the second part of the A D conversion pro cess the pulses derived using PAM are converted into binary data words using PCM See also PAM Peaking A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost a band of frequencies producing a mountain peak type response The width of the band is called the Q Midband EQ is usually of the peaking type Compare with Shelving PEQ An abbreviation for parametric EQ PFL Pre Fader Listen Monitoring signals before the channel fader Contrast with AFL Phantom powering The technique for supplying condenser type microphones a DC voltage via the signal carrying conductors of a balanced cable Pink noise A type of random noise that contains an equal amount of energy per octave For example the bands 100 200 800 1600 and 3000 6000 all contain the same amount of energy White noise on
204. d 14 Probably because these inputs have been flipped with the Digital Ste reo Coaxial In on PAN ROUT page 4 See Digital Stereo In on page 213 for more information The 2TR IN signal appears on input channels 15 and 16 Probably because the 15 16 2TR IN switch is set to 2TR IN See Two track Input 2TR IN on page 77 for more information Cannot hear signals connected to inputs 15 and 16 Probably because the 15 16 2TR IN switch is set to 2TR IN See Two track Input 2TR IN on page 77 for more information Cannot select the bus out master faders Bus out master levels are set using the virtual faders on PAN ROUT page 3 See Setting Bus Out Master Levels on page 109 for more information Recordings made via the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out or Option 1 0 sound grainy Make sure that the Dither function is set to match the wordlength of the digital recorder See Output Dither on page 212 for more infor mation Digital Stereo Coaxial In and Option 1 O digital input signals sound noisy Make sure that all digital audio equipment is wordclock synchronized to a common wordclock source See About Wordclocks on page 206 for more information Input channels are configured as a stereo pair but the signal appears to be mono Make sure that the odd channel is panned hard left and the right channel is panned hard right See Panning Input Channels on page 47 for more information Con
205. d in milliseconds meters or samples Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 The maximum DELAY 0 300 ms delay in samples is fixed at 13229 The maximum delay in milliseconds and meters depends on the sampling rate At 44 1 kHz for example it is 300 milliseconds and 102 2 meters respectively 01V Owner s Manual 92 Chapter 8 Stereo Output Stereo Output Block Diagram BUS AUX EFF ST 4123412LR 2TR OUT OI STEREO OUT DIGITAL L STEREO to OUTPUT SELECT MONI 12 3 1 STEREO OUT 01V Owner s Manual Aux Sends 93 Aux Sends In this chapter About the Aux Sends ccc ee cece cence een 94 mE Option I O amp the Aux Sends sb DUE nane ker EC ee deed e a eh on 94 Omni Outs amp the Aux Sends asas e tue LR C ERROR dee 94 Monitoring Aux Sends coa tata eee poi were ONSE e cite 94 Metering AVE Sends bate MN equae a s Ra oe SOR doo tto ala 94 Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends 95 Pre fader Post fader Aux Sends 97 Viewing Aux Send Settings cata eor Rad pene ae AMAA ge eat d 98 Setting Aux Send Master o a ed Xon 99 Mutine Aux SOU manene E OE ORO CR 100 Applying EO to Aux Sends suv eo ah OCC AUR DIOE 100 Aux Send Dynamics Processors 100 P ring Aux Setids o2 bp EE
206. d title of the selected scene memory whether that scene memory is read only or write protected indicated by the closed padlock icon and whether or not the contents of the Edit Buffer have been edited See Scene Memory Dis play Area on page 185 for more information Also in the Memory area are the MIDI and HOST indicators which appear when MIDI data is received at the MIDI IN or TO HOST port respectively See MIDI Receive Indicators on page 224 for more information InitQata Effects Returns This area of the display shows two control icons which indicate the positions of the RETURN level controls and the type of effects selected for the two onboard effects processors Effect 1 and Effect 2 When the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 Fader mode is selected the corresponding control icon is highlighted SG Selected channel This area of the display shows three control icons Pan EQ frequency F and EQ gain G which indicate the pan EQ fre quency and EQ gain of the selected channel Below these is the selected channel indicator showing which channel is currently selected The fol 125 lowing channels can be selected through CH24 Input channels 1 through 24 ST Stereo output RTN1 RTN2 Effects returns 1 and 2 AUXI through AUX4 Aux sends 1 through 4 EFFI 2 Effects sends 1 and 2 1 16 MAS Remote function channels When channels 13 through 16 the effects return
207. der use the DIGITAL IN button to select the optical digital input Although the 01V is a four bus mixer a combination of bus outs aux sends and channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight track simulta neous recording See Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 01V amp ADAT Interface Recorder 243 Monitors Power Amp Headphones N Personal computer running MIDI software 01V MONITOR wordclock slave OUT PHONES Digital multitrack wordclock master OUT Digital in OPTION I O YAMAHA Digital out DAT recorder wordclock slave DIGITAL STEREO sos DAT COAXIAL Serial port MIDI interface Digital in Digital out MIC LINE inputs 1 16 ml Drum machine MIDI IN EE 559858 oooooooo 0000 Guitar processor LO arcc oo O Tone generator gt MIDI IN Bass processor sez 0000 Hal MIDI keyboard 000000 MIDI IN MIDI O
208. device for converting analog signals to digital signals AFL After Fader Listen Monitoring signals after the channel fader Contrast with Aliasing A type of signal distortion that occurs during A D conversion if the sam pling rate is less than twice that of the highest audio frequency A D converters employ aliasing filters to remove audio frequencies higher than half the sampling rate See also Nyquist Sampling Theorem Anti aliasing In digital audio a technique used to prevent aliasing in the form of an anti aliasing filter before A D conversion This filter removes audio frequencies that are higher than half the sampling frequency e g for 32 kHz sampling rate audio fre quencies above 16 kHz are filtered Balancing A technique for reducing interference in audio cables by using two con ductors known as the hot and cold to carry two versions of the audio signal 180 degrees out of phase with each other Since any interference picked up will be in the same phase on both conductors the differential amplifier at the balanced input cancels out the noise but amplifies the audio signal Bulk Dump A MIDI function for transferring data between MIDI equipment Data is transmitted as MIDI System Exclusive messages Bus A common conductor used to collect and distribute audio signals Cascade A technique for increasing the number of available inputs by connecting two or more audio mixers together CH Abbr
209. diately Remove the power cord from the AC outlet Consult your dealer for repair Using the 01V in this condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard 01V Owner s Manual Ifyou plan not use the 01V for a long period of time remove the power cord from the AC outlet Leaving the 01V connected is a fire hazard Donotuse benzene thinner cleaning detergent or a chemical cloth to clean the 01V Use only a soft dry cloth The01V isa heavy piece of equipment Always grip the underneath not the side pan els when lifting Interference 01V uses high frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radios and tele visions placed close to it If interference does occur relocate the affected equipment Copyright O 1998 Yamaha Corporation rights reserved No part of the 01V software or this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Cor poration Trademarks ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Pro Tools is a registered trademark of Digidesign or Avid Tech nology Inc Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and TEAC are regis tered trademarks of TEAC Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks are the property of thei
210. djusted directly on the remote 01V the meters on the local 01V may not display levels correctly Local Control cannot be turned off while a mix scene crossfade is in progress Fade Time and a warning message appears if you try to do so Local Control can however be turned on while a mix scene fade is in progress 01V Owner s Manual Local Control 235 In the following example 01V A remote and 01V B local are cascaded together for 48 channel digital mixing Using the Local Control function both 01Vs can be con trolled using the faders buttons rotary controls and display pages of 01V B Even the signal levels of 01V A can be metered on 01V B To control 01 B the Local Control function on 01V B is turned ON To control 01V A the Local Control function on 01V B is turned OFF Both 01Vs should be set to the same PORT MIDI or TO HOST and the MIDI receive channel Rx on 01V A should match the MIDI transmit channel Tx on 01V B See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 01V A remote 01V B local 0 olt DIGITAL STEREO tam COAXIAL OUT DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN 01V Owner s Manual 236 Chapter 17 MIDI MIDI Machine Control 01V Owner s Manual Using MIDI Machine Control MMC com
211. down a cursor button moves the 1 cursor continuously in the respective direction PARAMETER Wheel The PARAMETER wheel is used to adjust parameter values scroll through scene memory and library programs and position the cursor when titling scene memories effects programs and so on Its detented action gives it a positive feel allowing quick and accu rate parameter editing Turning it clockwise increases parameter values turning it counterclockwise decreases them 1 DEC amp 1 INC Buttons Like the PARAMETER wheel the 1 DEC and 1 INC i DEC 1 INC buttons are used to adjust parameter values scroll through scene memory and library programs and position the cur sor when titling scene memories effects programs and so on The 1 DEC button is used to decrement values while the 1 INC button is used to increment them Holding down the 1 DEC or 1 INC button sweeps through a parameter s adjustable range When titling memories or programs the 1 DEC button is used to toggle between uppercase lowercase and numerals while the 1 INC button is used to insert spaces ENTER Button The ENTER button is used to activate parameter settings selected using ENTER the CURSOR buttons and set on off type parameters such as EQ ON OFE It s also used to confirm settings and enter characters when titling scene memories effects programs and so on On the EQ page the ENTER button is used
212. ds 3 and 4 can be paired together for stereo signal pro cessing When paired the EQ dynamics master faders ON buttons and monitors of each aux send are set the same and linked for simultaneous control In addition to the linking of aux send master parameters pairing also affects input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns For these channels aux send controls and pre post switches are linked and aux send panpots appear Making Aux Send Pairs 1 Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 4 as shown below ALPAIR INPUT j 2 389 4 5 OP 6 7 5 9 10 11 1Z ENTER xz 2 2 nonoxz 2 nonoxz RUX Bus 1 2 589 4 1 OP 2 5 09 4 2 2 2 2 HALL CHORUS D Ag 2 Use the cursor buttons to select aux pair 1 2 or 3 4 and then press the ENTER button The following dialog box appears CHANNEL PAIRING Choose a Pairing Mode CANCEL aux 221 RESET BOTH AUX 1 2 Copy the settings of aux send 1 to aux send 2 AUX 2 gt 1 Copy the settings of aux send 2 to aux send 1 RESET BOTH Reset both aux sends to their initial settings 3 Usethe cursor buttons to select a pairing mode and then press the ENTER button The highlighted switch and STEREO label show that the aux sends 1 2 53 4 are now configured as a stereo pair Eu 2
213. e between channels When switched on channels go off and off channels come on Making a Mute Group Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 3 as shown below LGROUP J 1234 91011 12 12419 15 16 ENABLE ee me amie ERDER o NN D FILTER CHORUS MOTE _ Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the mute groups and the SEL buttons to add and remove channels to and from that group Channels cannot be in more than one group at a time Input channels 13 14 15 16 and paired input channels 1 through 12 Pairing Input Channels on page 52 are added and removed together Enabling amp Disabling Mute Groups Mute groups can be enabled and disabled using the ENABLE switches Disabling a group allows you to set channels without removing them from the group Use the up and down cursor buttons to select the mute group that you want to disable D E or F Use the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 1 INC buttons to enable or disable the selected group Mute group enabled ey Mute group disabled Viewing Input Channel Settings 57 Viewing Input Channel Settings Settings for input channels 1 through 16 can be viewed and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW pages 1 and 2 Settings for input channels 17 through 24 can be viewed and adjusted on OPTION page 2 Input Channels 1 16 U
214. e 01V s 99 scene memories Mix scenes can be recalled instantly with just one button press or remotely using MIDI Program Change commands If you work on sev eral projects at a time you can store the current mix scene so when you return to that project you can start again right where you left off Scene memories also make light work of night after night sound checks Simply press recall to return to the previous night s mix settings For theater work scene memories allow accurate and repeatable sound changes between scenes MIDI In addition to regular MIDI ports the 01V features a TO HOST port that allows the to be connected directly to a personal computer without a MIDI interface MIDI Program Change messages can be used to recall mix scenes and mix parameters can be assigned to MIDI Control Change messages for real time remote control Mix parameters that can be stored in mix scenes can be controlled remotely using MIDI Sys tem Exclusive messages Scene memory library and setup data can be transferred to a MIDI data filer computer or another 01V for backup and archive using MIDI Bulk Dump See MIDI on page 221 for more information When REMOTE page 2 is displayed the 01V s SEL and ON buttons can be used to control recorders that support MMC MIDI Machine Control commands stop play rewind forward and record When REMOTE page 3 is displayed faders SOLO amp ON buttons function as assignable MIDI Contr
215. e MY8 AD card features eight analog phone jack inputs providing eight analog inputs to input channels 17 through 24 MY4 AD 4 Analog Input The MY4 AD card features four analog XLR inputs providing four analog inputs to input channels 17 through 20 01V Owner s Manual About Option I O Cards 217 Card Specifications Card Description Inputs Outputs Connector MY8 AT Digital I O 8 CH17 24 Optical x2 MY8 TD Tascam TDIF 1 Digital 1 O 8 CH17 24 8 bus aux ste 25 pin D sub x1 reo ch direct MY8 AE AES EBU Digital I O 8 CH17 24 25 pin D sub x1 4 bus aux ste XLR 3 32 type reo ch direct balanced x4 MY8 AD Analog input 8 CH17 24 Phone jack x8 XLR 3 31 type balanced x4 MY4 DA Analog output MY4 AD Analog input 4 17 20 1 Cable not included The eight Option I O digital inputs feed input channels 17 through 24 See Input Channels 17 24 on page 40 for more information The inputs to channels 1 through 8 can be swapped with those of input channels 17 through 24 either individually or altogether This allows signals from the Option I O digital inputs to make use of the 4 band EQ dynamics processors and other functions of full feature input channels 1 through 8 See Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 on page 51 for more information Option I O digital audio signals containing emphasis are automatically deemphasized The eight
216. e fader mode is set to Aux 1 on 01V A the fader mode on 01V B is also set to Aux 1 and vice versa See Cascading 01Vs on page 214 for more information System Components Two 01V Digital Mixing Consoles Two MY8 TD Option cards Two 8 track digital tape recorders or 8 track hard disk recorders such as the Tascam DA 38 Tascam DA 88 Tascam DA 98 or Akai DD8 Two Tascam PW 88D digital audio cables Tascam PW 888 sync cable See Installing Option I O Cards on page 218 for MY8 TD installation instructions Wordclock Configuration For digital audio transfer digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized see About Wordclocks on page 206 In this example digital multitrack recorder A is wordclock master while digital multitrack recorder B the 01Vs and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves Digital multitrack recorder B derives its wordclock from the sync con nection with recorder A The 01Vs derive their wordclocks from their Option I O dig ital inputs and the DAT from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V The wordclock frequency which is the same as the sampling rate is set when the digital multitrack tape is formatted or first recorded For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorders the DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01Vs and digital multi track recorders as wordclock slaves The sampling rate will be the same as that used when the DAT tape
217. e information Panning Effects Returns Effects return panpots are used to pan signals between the left and right channels of the stereo out and the odd and even bus outs See Panning Input Channels on page 47 for more information Routing Effects Returns Effects returns can be routed to the four buses and stereo out See Routing Input Chan nels on page 49 for more information Monitoring Effects Returns Effects returns can be monitored using the monitor out or phones See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information Effects Returns amp Aux Sends Signals from effects returns 1 and 2 can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4 Effects return sends can be configured as either pre fader or post fader sends When aux sends are paired aux send panpots become available on each effects return See Aux Sends on page 93 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 132 Chapter 12 Effects Effects Library Effects settings are stored as programs in the effects library which contains 42 preset programs 1 42 and 57 user programs 43 99 User programs are used to store cus tom effects settings which can be titled for easy identification The effects library can also be used to transfer settings from one effects processor to another For example the Effect 1 settings could be stored as a library program and then recalled to Effect 2 The unique collection of preset effects programs is designed for speci
218. e main stereo meters or the meters on HOME page 4 A Peak Hold function can be set globally for all meters Meters for input channels 17 through 24 and the eight digital outputs Option I O are available on the OPTION pages All meters feature a CLIP indicator which lights up when signals clip If this happens back off the levels otherwise signal distortion may occur Input channels 1 through 16 the stereo output aux sends and effects sends can also be metered on the VIEW pages 1 Use the HOME button to locate the following HOME pages Input channels 1 16 HOME page 1 displays signal level meters for input channels 1 through 16 The decibel value below each meter indicates the position of the corresponding channel fader The highlighted numbers 1 2 and 3 indicate that input channels 1 2 and 3 have been swapped with input channels 17 18 and 19 See Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 on page 51 for more information PEAK HOLD Meters for input channels 1 through 16 also appear on the VIEW pages See Viewing Input Channel Settings on page 57 for more information Effects Returns Aux Sends amp Bus Outs HOME page 2 displays signal level meters for the effects returns aux sends and bus outs The decibel value below each meter indicates the position of the corresponding fader The position of the stereo fader ST is also shown LRTN OUTPUT METER J PERK HOLD 8 00 00 i0DiDDiDDiDU 00 00 00 0
219. e metering points on HOME page 5 L STEREO R Peak Hold The Peak Hold function works with the HOME OPTION I O and main stereo meters When it s turned on the meter segments lit by the loudest signal peaks remain on pro viding an easy way to check for peak levels Use the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons or ENTER button to turn the Peak Hold function on or off To reset the Peak Hold function turn it off and then on again 01V Owner s Manual Setting the Metering Point 85 Setting the Metering Point The metering points for input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns can be set to either PRE EQ or PRE FADER For the stereo output aux send and bus out meters it can be set to either POST EQ or POST ON These settings do not affect the main ste reo meters which always meter POST ON signals 1 Use the HOME button to locate HOME page 5 as shown below METERING POINT J PRE PRE FADER ON FADER OSes Horn H BEL8Y Y POST POST ON OUTPUT FADER OUT Ea o b DELAY c 2 Usethecursor buttons to select the switches and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them INPUT Used to set the meter source points for input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns to either PRE EQ or PRE FADER OUTPUT Used to set the meter source points for the stereo output aux send and bus out meters to either POST EQ
220. e shown below Use the DELAY button to locate DELAY page 2 or 3 as shown below FB GRIN DELAY seol FB GAIN 1 2 ral geris id G 160 100 100 Bx ax axi 9 5 A 199 a a 166 Bx 109 ax Hi O DELA 4 t Ya d nx FB GRIN DELAY msec MIX FB GRIN HRLL CHORUS Use the cursor buttons to 9 0 189 188 ax ax 13 14 100 Em 160 1868 ax ax 15 16 2 100 ax Use the SEL buttons to select channels select the delay parameters and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Parameter ON OFF Range ON OFF Description These switches are used to turn on and off the delays DELAY 0 250 ms Delay can be specified in milliseconds meters or samples Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 The maximum delay in samples is fixed at 11025 The maximum delay in milliseconds and meters depends on the sampling rate At 44 1 kHz for example it is 250 milliseconds and 85 2 meters respectively MIX 100 to 100 This parameter determines the level of delayed signal 0 is no delay 50 is a 50 50 mix of delayed and dry signals 100 is all delay no dry Negative values the same except the delayed signal is phase reversed FB GAIN 99 to
221. e the effects settings of Effect 2 use the EFFECT 2 button EFFECT LIBRARY J No TITLE TYPE B2 Reuerb Room 8 REUERB ROOM b l Reuerb Hall EB 4 REvERB HALL 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a user program from 43 through 99 The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 HRLL CHORUS o 3 Usethe cursor buttons to select the STORE switch and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the Title Edit dialog box does not appear and the effects program is stored 4 Title the effects program See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information 5 Select OK and then press the ENTER button The effects program is stored 01V Owner s Manual 134 Chapter 12 Effects Recalling Effects Programs 01V Owner s Manual Effects programs 1 through 99 can be recalled Programs that use the HQ PITCH or FREEZE effects can be recalled only to Effect 2 Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to locate the Library page as shown below To recall an effects program to Effect 1 use the EFFECT 1 button to locate the library page To recall an effects program to Effect 2 use the EFFECT 2 button LEFFECT LIBRARY J No TITLE TYPE
222. ected it s not nec essary to press the HOME button To turn on or off input channel 20 press the OPTION I O button and then press ON button 20 Master ON Button Examples To turn on or off the stereo output press the HOME button and then use the MAS TER ON button To turn on or off the AUX 1 send master press the AUX 1 button and then use the 01V Owner s Manual MASTER ON button To turn on or off the EFFECT 1 send master press the EFFECT 1 button and then use the MASTER ON button Fader Modes Faders plus Return Rotary Controls The faders are used to adjust channel levels 35 1 Effects return 1 cannot be fed to effect send 1 2 Effects return 2 cannot be fed to effect send 2 Fader Rotary Control Fader Mode 1 8 9 12 13 14 STEREO RETURN 1 2 17 24 15 16 MASTER HOME CH 1 16 level STEREO RETURN 1 2 levels master level AUX 1 CH 1 16 AUX 1 send level ADI RETURN 1 2 AUX master level 1 send levels AUX 2 CH 1 16 AUX 2 send level AUX 2 RETURN 1 2 AUX master level 2 send levels AUX 3 CH 1 16 AUX 3 send level AUX RETURN 1 2 AUX master level 3 send levels AUX 4 CH 1 16 AUX 4 send level AUX RETURNCTI2 AUR master level 4 send levels m RETURN 1 level EFFECT EFFECT 1 CH 1 16 EFFECT 1 send level master level TRETURN 2 EFFECT 1 send level 2 EFFECT 2 RETURN 1 EFFECT EFFECT 2 CH 1 16 EFFECT 2 send level 2 send level master level RETUR
223. ed by steep low pass filters used to filter out sam pling frequency components during D A conversion are virtually eliminated Consequently audio signal integrity is maintained from input through to output The 01V can generate the industry standard sampling rate of 44 1 kHz or synchronize to an external wordclock source from 44 1 kHz 10 to 48 kHz 6 Four band Parametric EQ amp Library Input channels 1 through 16 the stereo output aux sends and effects returns all feature four band fully parametric EQ with variable gain frequency Q and bypass Input channels 17 through 24 feature a simplified two band parametric EQ High and low EQ bands can be used as shelving peaking or HPF and respectively See EQ on page 61 for more information EQ settings can be stored in the EQ library as programs or with all mix settings in mix scenes The EQ library consists of 40 preset programs and 40 user programs User pro grams allow you to store frequently used EQ settings which can be titled for easy iden tification The unique collection of preset EQ programs are designed for specific applications and instruments and provide a good reference and starting point when making EQ adjustments See EQ Library on page 67 for more information Motorized Faders The 01V features 15 motorized 60 mm faders that move automatically when a mix scene is recalled providing a clear and visual indication of fader levels A fade time of up
224. ed on the 01V transmits Bulk Dump messages in response to Bulk Dump requests Bulk Dump messages and Bulk Dump requests are never echoed Bulk Dump messages can be transmitted from the 01V regardless of this setting See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information Program Change Scene Recall 227 Program Change Scene Recall When a MIDI Program Change message is received a mix scene is recalled in accor dance with the scene memory to Program Change assignment table Likewise when a mix scene is recalled the 01V transmits a Program Change message that can be used to recall a mix scene on another 01V or recorded to a MIDI sequencer for automated scene recall See Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages on page 188 Initially scene memories 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99 as listed in the Scene Memory to Program Change Table on page 273 although these assignments can be edited on MIDI page 2 These assignments are used for both transmission and reception so if Program Change 10 is assigned to scene memory 20 the 01V recalls scene memory 20 when Program Change 10 is received and transmits Program Change 10 when scene memory 20 is recalled In order for the 01V to receive and transmit MIDI Program Change messages the Pro gram Change Rx and Tx switches on MIDI page 1 must be turned on See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 1 Use the MIDI butto
225. emain on when pressed and the specified data is transmitted only when they re pressed SW is transmitted as 7F when buttons are pressed and 00 is transmitted when the buttons are pressed again When a Control Change message is received while REMOTE page 3 is displayed its value appears in the DATA boxes making it easy to determine which Control Change is being transmitted when say the slider of an external MIDI controller is operated Custom assignments are stored when other banks are selected and banks can be stored using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Linking 015 239 To reset a bank back to its initial assignments make it the active bank select the INI TIALIZE switch and then press the ENTER button A confirmation dialog box appears Select OK and then press the ENTER button to confirm your action The selected bank is reset to its initial assignments In the following example REMOTE page 3 is displayed while the modulation control ler on the MIDI keyboard is operated The 01V detects Modulation Controller Control Change 1 and assigns it to the selected 01V fader Then when the fader is operated the 01V transmits Control Change 1 messages back to the MIDI keyboard The 01V must be set to receive MIDI Control Change messages See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information 01V MIDI keyboard
226. ene memories and library programs are stored when the 01V is turned off 01V Owner s Manual Touring the 01V 13 Touring the 01V In this chapter Top Panel ay etie Rd ude An o dem dU 14 E 20 Block Diagrami socis X OCC ER OO ROC ROO 24 01V Owner s Manual 14 Chapter 3 Touring the 01V Top Panel Controls PHANTOM 48V ON PHANTOM 48V on INPUT BAL 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB 26dB MONITOR 2TRIN xk xk 0 xk 16 co 16 _ 6 so 16 is 16 Seo 16 107 20 10 A 10 SOGANE SOGANE Scan GGAINE GGAINES SOGANE GAIN LEVEL LEVEL MONITOR OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10dBV UNBAL PHONES PHONES o GB YAMAHA DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE Ol Gel HIGH STEREO R UTILITY MIDI SETUP FUNCTION PAN 9 YNAMICS EQ ATT Q DELAY ROUTING MEMORY FADER CoE EFFECT EFFECT2 OPTIONI O REMOTE 1 RETURN 2 Q SELEC
227. ereby opti mizing the digital output signal for use with lower resolution systems Since dither endows the digital signal with a noise floor close to the minimum theoretical limit some audio professionals choose not to use it for applications with a wide dynamic range such as classical recording If in any doubt it s probably best to use it 01V Owner s Manual Digital Stereo In 213 Digital Stereo In Consumer format digital audio signals can be connected to the 1 using the Digital Stereo In Coaxial connection The digital output of a CD player DAT or MiniDisc deck could be con nected here or the Digital Stereo Out of another for cas cade operation See Cascading 01Vs on page 214 for more information 1 Use the PAN ROUTING button to locate PAN ROUT page 4 as shown below DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT IN OMNI OUT SELECT J OHNI 1 OMNIZ i OMNIS 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the FLIP and ON OFF switches and the ENTER button to set them FLIP This switch is used to flip the inputs of input channels 13 and 14 with the Digital Stereo In Normally analog inputs 13 and 14 feed input channels 13 and 14 and the Digital Stereo In feeds the Stereo bus When flipped analog inputs 13 and 14 feed the Stereo bus and the Digital Stereo In feeds input channels 13 and 14 ON OFF This switch is used to turn on or off the stereo cascade signal The source of the stereo cas
228. ereo input connector 23 emphasis 213 specifications 264 using 213 DIGITAL STEREO OUT 23 Digital stereo output connector 23 dither 212 specifications 266 stereo output 88 using 211 Dimensions 271 DIO definition 293 Display about 16 contrast 16 effects returns area 29 elements 30 faders 30 function area 28 memory area 29 messages 258 page area 29 parameter boxes 30 rotary controls 30 selected channel area 29 switches 30 DIST gt DELAY 156 DISTORTION 146 Dither 212 Dither page 212 Dither definition 293 DSP definition 293 DUAL PITCH 145 Ducking 169 DYNA FILTER 147 DYNA FLANGE 147 DYNA PHASER 148 Dynamic range definition 293 Dynamics edit page 164 165 166 Dynamics library about 173 MIDI bulk dump 232 number of programs 266 page 174 175 176 preset program list 163 recalling programs 175 01V Owner s Manual 299 Index storing programs 174 summary 6 titling 176 DYNAMICS page 1 164 165 166 DYNAMICS page 2 174 175 176 Dynamics processors about 162 aux sends 164 comp 167 compander 171 ducking 169 editing 166 expander 170 gate 168 input channels 164 library 173 parameters 177 stereo output 165 using 164 E EARLY REF 138 ECHO 142 Edit buffer 185 definition 294 Edit indicator 185 Editing dynamics processors 166 effects 136 EFF definition 294 EFFECT page 1 123 124 136 137 157 EFFECT page 2 132 133 134 135 EFFECT page 3 125 Effects about 120 block diagra
229. ery for memory back up For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Do not throw away the battery Instead hand it in as small chemical waste Important Information Read the Following Before Operating the 01V Warnings Do not locate the 01V in a place subject to excessive heat or in direct sunlight This could be a fire hazard Do not place the 01V in a place subject to excessive humidity or dust This could be a fire and electrical shock hazard Connect the 01V power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner s Manual or as marked on the 01V Failure to do so isa fire and electrical shock hazard Do not plug several devices into the same AC outlet This can overload the AC outlet and can be a fire and electrical shock hazard It may also affect the performance of some devices Do not place heavy objects on the power cord A damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit Liquid or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard If the power cord is damaged i e cut or a bare wire is exposed ask your dealer for a replacement Using the 01V in this condition is a fire and
230. eu b e Or PES peti 173 Storing Dynamics Programs 174 Recalling Dynamics Programs 175 Editing Dynamics Program Titles i e e phas 176 Preset Dynamics Program 5 177 01V Owner s Manual 162 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors About the Dynamics Processors Input channels 1 through 16 the aux sends and the stereo output all feature powerful dynamics processors offering compressor limiter gate ducker and compander func tions See the Block Diagram on page 24 for the exact location of each dynamics pro cessor Input channel processors can be self triggering 1 the signal being processed is used as the trigger signal or triggered by a signal from another input channel Dynamics settings are stored as programs in the dynamics library which contains 40 preset programs and 40 user programs See Dynamics Library on page 173 for more information Dynamics settings are also stored in scene memories See Storing Mix Scenes on page 186 for more information Dynamics processors are edited on DYNAMICS page 1 as shown below Use the DYNAMICS button to locate this page CH1 DYNAMICS EDIT TYPE EOMP KEYIN SELF THRESHOLD OUT GAIN HALL CHORUS 898 i Q ATTACK E RELERSE 3 2580ms The name of the type of dynamics processor appears in the
231. eviation for channel Clipping The unwanted distortion effect caused by inputting too large a signal to an audio circuit Coaxial The electrical connection for transmitting and receiving consumer format digital audio typically using phono connectors See also Consumer format Consumer format The consumer digital audio format developed by Sony and Philips for transferring digital audio data between consumer type digital audio equip ment such as CD players DAT DCC and MiniDisc decks Two channels of digital audio left amp right are carried in one connection usually a phono connection This format is also referred to as IEC60958 formerly 958 and S PDIF See also Coaxial Control Change A type of MIDI message providing real time parameter control Typical Control Changes include Modulation Volume Pan and Portamento D A converter An electronic device for converting digital signals to analog signals De emphasis See Emphasis DlO Abbreviation for digital input and output Dither The process of adding low level random noise to audio signals in order to reduce A D converter quantization noise Dither techniques are also used for digital audio wordlength reduction e g 20 to 16 bit conversion DSP Digital Signal Processor A chip designed specifically for processing large amounts of data at high speed and in real time This type of processor is ideal for han dling digital audio data Dynamic
232. ex monitoring 88 muting 90 omni outs 88 option I O 88 solo 88 specifications 265 viewing settings 89 STORE CONFIRMATION preference 203 Storing dynamics programs 174 effects programs 133 EQ programs 68 MIDI bulk dump 232 scene memories 186 SW user define 238 Swapping channel settings 59 Swapping input channels 51 Switches display 30 Switching off the 01V 11 Switching on the 01V 11 SYMPHONIC 143 System examples ADAT interface recorder 242 general 10 Pro Tools 250 Tascam interface recorder 246 Two ADAT interface recorders 244 Two Tascam interface recorders 248 System exclusive definition 296 parameter control 231 T Tamper proof cover 259 Tempo effects parameter 137 THD definition 296 Title edit dialog box 37 Titling dialog box 37 dynamics programs 176 effects programs 135 EQ programs 70 scene memories 190 TO HOST about 222 about the connector about 23 using 223 Top panel 14 Transmit local control 234 MIDI bulk dump 232 Transmit channel MIDI 225 Transport control MMC 236 TREMOLO 144 Troubleshooting 253 Turning off the 01V 11 Turning on the 01V 11 U Undoing mix scene recalls 189 Unity gain definition 296 Unlatch user define 238 User define page 238 User defined MIDI controllers 238 UTILITY page 1 202 UTILITY page 2 203 V VIEW page 1 57 86 89 98 127 130 VIEW page 2 57 86 89 98 127 130 VIEW page 3 59 Viewing settings aux sends 98 effects returns 130 e
233. ffects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time Feedback gain plus values for normal phase zi 0 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform Reverb and flanged reverb balance 0 flanged 0 REV BAL 0 100 reverb 100 reverb HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ Bet ddd te d ded d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 REV SYMPHO Reverb and symphonic effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV 0 3 99 9 5 Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY
234. ffects sends 127 input channels 57 stereo output 89 W Web site 291 Width 01V dimensions 271 Wordclock about 206 definition 296 important information 11 setting 209 Wordclock select page 209 Wordlength 212 X XLR inputs 20 01V Owner s Manual YAMAHA YAMAHA CORPORATION Pro Audio amp Digital Musical Instrument Division P O Box 3 Hamamatsu 430 8651 Japan 01 09 2000 AP Printed in Japan
235. fic applications and instruments and provides a good reference and starting point when using the effects processors See page 121 for a complete list of the preset effects programs The effects library is controlled from the library page shown below Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to locate it Although the effects library can be accessed using either button the effects library is in fact common to both effects processors When the library page is selected using the EFFECT 1 button store and recall operations affect Effect 1 When the library page is selected using the EFFECT 2 button store and recall operations affect Effect 2 EFFECT1 LIBRARY J STORE RecALL EE No TITLE TYPE B2 Reuerb Room 8 REVERB ROOM HALL pA Reverb Hall E 4 REvERB HALL The top half of the library page contains the STORE RECALL and TITLE EDIT switches Below these is the library window which can be scrolled using the PARAME TER wheel The R icon next to a preset program means read only The meters indicate effects returns signal levels for the selected effects processor 01V Owner s Manual Storing Effects Programs 133 Storing Effects Programs Custom effects settings can be stored in user programs 43 through 99 1 Use the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to locate the library page as shown below To store the effects settings of Effect 1 use the EFFECT 1 button to locate the library page To stor
236. figured a stereo pair but the signal sounds out of phase Make sure that the phase of both input channels in the stereo pair is set the same Phase settings are not linked when channels are paired See Changing the Input Phase on page 42 for more information Signals sound delayed Make sure that the Channel Delay function is set correctly See Delay ing Channel Signals on page 45 for more information Added faders to a fader group but grouping does not work Make sure that the fader group is enabled See Grouping Faders on page 55 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Troubleshooting 255 Symptom Added channels to a mute group but group muting does not work Advice Make sure that the mute group is enabled See Grouping Mutes on page 56 for more information Cannot store an EQ program EQ settings cannot be stored to preset programs 1 through 40 Try storing to user programs 41 through 80 See Storing EQ Programs on page 68 for more information EQ settings of channel 17 through 24 can not be stored Cannot recall EQ programs to input channels 17 through 24 EQ programs cannot be recalled to input channels 17 through 24 Cannot locate the aux send panpots The bus master level faders work in unison Aux send panpots are only available when aux sends are paired See Pairing Aux Sends on page 101 for more information Probably because the
237. for the fol lowing formats ADAT Tascam and AES EBU Various Option I O cards with analog inputs and outputs are also available See the Yamaha PA Web site for news of other 01V Option I O cards 01V Option I O cards are not interchangeable with the YGDAI cards used by the Yamaha 02R and 03D Digital Recording Consoles lt http www yamaha co jp product proaudio homeenglish gt 8 The MY8 AT card has two Alesis Optical Digital Interface con nectors and is used to connect 8 track digital multitrack recorders such as the Alesis ADAT Alesis ADAT XT or Fostex D 90 Hard Disk Recorder MY8 TD Tascam The MY8 TD card has a Tascam Digital Audio Interface TDIF 1 25 pin D sub con nector and is used to connect 8 track digital multitrack recorders such as the Tascam DA 88 or DA 38 MY8 TD cards feature a device selector switch that should be set according to the type of recorder connected EXT 88 for use with a Tascam DA 88 INT 38 for use with a Tascam DA 38 or other recorder MY8 AE AES EBU The MY8 AE card has a 25 pin D sub connector and is used to connect digital audio equipment with AES EBU format digital inputs and outputs MY4 DA Analog Output The MY4 DA card features four analog XLR outputs With this card you could for example assign the four bus outs to the Omni outputs and the four aux sends to the MY4 DA analog outputs for a total of eight analog outputs MY8 AD 8 Analog Input Th
238. found to be the source of interference which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference Utilize power outlets that are on different branch circuit breaker or fuse circuits or install AC line filter s In the case of radio or TV interference relocate reorient the antenna If the antenna lead in is 300 ohm ribbon lead change the lead in to coaxial type cable If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product If you can not locate the appropriate retailer please contact Yamaha Corporation of America Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave Buena Park CA 90620 This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which i
239. fter Parameter Range Description PITCH L 24 to 24 semitones Left channel pitch shift FINE L 50 to 50 cents Left channel pitch shift fine LEVEL L 100 to 100 Left channel level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase PITCH R 24 to 24 semitones Right channel pitch shift FINE R 50 to 50 cents Right channel pitch shift fine LEVEL R 100 to 100 Right channel level plus values for normal phase minus values for reverse phase DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time NOTE 1 va in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Left channel feedback gain plus values for FB GL 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time NOTE R 1 i in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY Right channel feedback gain plus values for FB GR 99 to 99 normal phase feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback MODE 1 10 Pitch shift precision Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 TEMIRO 29 209 Dps determine DELAY L and DELAY R 1 FB h Pa d 4 4 3 Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 ROTARY Rotary speaker simulator Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP START Rotation stop start SPEED SLOW FAST Rotation speed
240. fully digital recording system with the 16 mic line inputs and eight digital tape returns providing up to 24 inputs during mixdown System Components 01V Digital Mixing Console MY8 TD Option I O card 8 track digital tape recorder or 8 track hard disk recorder such as the Tascam DA 38 Tascam DA 88 Tascam DA 98 or Akai DD8 Tascam PW 88D digital audio cable See Installing Option I O Cards on page 218 for MY8 TD installation instructions Wordclock Configuration For digital audio transfer digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized see About Wordclocks on page 206 In this example the digital multitrack recorder is wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves The 01V derives its wordclock from the Option I O digital input The DAT derives its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V The wordclock frequency which is the same as the sampling rate is set when the digital multitrack tape is formatted or first recorded For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorder the DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01V and digital multitrack recorder as wordclock slaves In this case the 01V would derive its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection Since the digital multitrack recorder cannot derive a wordclock signal from its digital inputs a BNC cable is used to supply a word clock signal from the 01V Note th
241. g inputs 51 swapping settings 59 viewing settings 57 Input jacks 20 Input meter page 83 Input swap page 51 Inputs and outputs 20 Internal parameter page 194 Interval time MIDI bulk dump 232 Inv gang pan mode 48 L Latch user define 238 LCD definition 294 LED definition 294 Level diagram 257 Level setting aux sends 99 bus outs 109 effects returns 131 effects send masters 128 input channels 46 stereo output 90 Libraries dynamics 173 effects 132 EQ 67 LIBRARY LIST ORDER preference 204 Line inputs 20 Line level signal definition 294 Link port about 222 selecting 224 using 224 Linking 01Vs 239 LISTEN monitoring 78 solo 80 Local control 234 Locate points MMC 236 LO MID button 63 LOW button 63 Low level signal definition 294 LPF 62 LSB definition 294 M Mains lead 11 Memory area display 29 MEMORY page 1 186 187 189 190 MEMORY page 2 191 MEMORY page 3 190 MEMORY page 4 192 Messages display 258 Metering aux sends 83 bus outs 83 effects returns 83 effects sends 86 input channels 83 main stereo output meters 84 metering point 85 omni outs 84 option I O 85 peak hold 84 stereo output 84 Metering point page 85 Mic inputs 20 MIDI about 222 about the connectors about 23 bulk dump 232 bulk page 232 bulk setup 226 control change page 229 control change setup 225 data format 280 definition 294 implementation chart 290 linking 01Vs 239 local control 234 local control page 234 MMC 236 paramete
242. g to user programs 41 through 80 See Storing Dynamics Programs on page 174 for more information Cannot store to scene memory 00 Scene memory 00 is a read only memory See Scene Memory 00 on page 185 for more information Cannot store mix scenes Is the selected scene memory protected See Protecting Scene Mem ories on page 189 for more information Cannot recall mix scenes Only scene memories that contain data can be recalled Help I recalled a mix scene by mistake Use the Undo function to return to the previous mix settings See Undoing Mix Scene Recalls on page 189 for more information The scene memory number keeps flashing This is because a scene memory other than the one last recalled has been selected but not recalled See Scene Memory Display Area on page 185 for more information Recalling a mix scene doesn t update some channels Perhaps these channels are safe channels See Recalling Scene Data Safely on page 192 for more information The specified fade time has no effect Fade Time settings must be stored in mix scenes before they take effect See Setting a Fade Time on page 191 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 256 Troubleshooting Symptom Fader movements are inconsistent Advice Try calibrating the faders See Calibrating the Faders on page 204 for more information DIGITAL IN Sync Error
243. gnal back into the mix The following three sec tions explain how to send signals from input channels 1 through 16 17 through 24 and the effects returns to effects processors The final section explains how to return the processed signal back into the mix For Input Channels 1 16 1 Press the HOME button and then raise the fader of the channel to which you want to apply an effect This step is necessary because effects sends are initially configured as post fader sends If the channel fader is not raised no signal is fed to the effects sends See Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends on page 125 for more information 2 Press the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to select an effects processor An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears and faders now function as effects send controls TYPE REVERB HALL REM TIME INI OLY HI RALIO 3 Raise the channel s fader i e effects send level control This sends the channel signal to the selected effects processor The effects return meters display the level of the effects return signal Since each effects processor has a mono input the signals of input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are summed into a mono mix before being fed to an effects pro cessor When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their effects send controls are linked For Input Channels 17 24 1 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION
244. grams As each program is selected its dynamics curve is displayed The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 4 Usethe cursor buttons to select the RECALL switch and then press the ENTER button The Dynamics program is recalled If the RECALL CONFIRMATION option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 a confirmation dialog box appears In this case select OK and then press the ENTER button to confirm the recall 01V Owner s Manual 176 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Editing Dynamics Program Titles User program titles can be edited using the Title Edit function 1 Usethe DYNAMICS button to locate the Library page as shown below DYNAMICS LIBRARY J No TITLE TYPE DYNAMICS InitData DOMED HALL Comp d OG 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a user program from 41 through 80 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the TITLE EDIT switch and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears 4 Edit the program title See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information 5 Select OK and then press the ENTER button The program is stored with its new title 01V Owner s Manual Preset Dynamics Program Settings 177 Preset Dynamics Program Sett
245. hannels 1 through 12 feature balanced XLR 3 31 type and balanced phone jack connectors both with a nominal input range of 60 dB to 10 dB Phantom powering 48 V is supplied to the XLR connectors with master on off switches for connectors 1 through 6 and 7 through 12 Phone jacks which can also be used with unbalanced phone plugs have priority over the XLR type connectors so when a phone plug is inserted the XLR type connector is disconnected Inputs 1 through 8 can be swapped with inputs 17 through 24 See Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 on page 51 for more information Input Channels 13 16 13 15 14 16 Phone jacks INPUT balanced Apart from being stereo input channels 13 14 and 15 16 offer the same features as input channels 1 through 12 Nor mally the input signals for input channels 13 and 14 are derived from phone jack inputs 13 and 14 By using the CH13 14 FLIP function on PAN ROUT page 4 however the DIGITAL STEREO IN signals can be fed to input chan nels 13 and 14 See Digital Stereo In on page 213 for more information Similarly the input signals for input channels 15 and 16 are normally derived from phone jack inputs 15 and 16 By using the 15 16 2TR IN switch however the 2TR IN signals can be fed to input channels 15 and 16 See Two track Input 2TR IN on page 77 for more informa tion Input Channels 17 24 OPTION I O Input channels 17 through 24 do not have analog input connectors a
246. identification The EQ library can also be used to transfer settings from one EQ to another For example the stereo out EQ settings could be stored as a library program and then recalled to an aux send EQ The unique collection of preset EQ programs are designed for specific applications and instruments and provide a good reference and starting point when making EQ adjustments See page 71 for a complete list of the preset EQ programs The EQ library is controlled from the EQ Library page shown below Use the EQ ATT button to locate this page E amp g LIBRARY J No TITLE 00 82 5 Drum 2 HALL pA Bass Drum 1 Ad RE spes ree As each program is selected its EQ curve appears in the EQ CURVE window Above this are signal level meters for the selected channel Preset EQ Program List Title Title 01 Bass Drum 1 21 A G Stroke 2 02 Bass Drum 2 22 A G Arpeg 1 03 Snare Drum 1 23 A G Arpeg 2 04 Snare Drum 2 24 Brass Sec 05 Tom tom 1 25 Male Vocal 1 06 Cymbal 26 Male Vocal 2 07 High Hat 27 Female Vo 1 08 Percussion 28 Female Vo 2 09 E Bass 1 29 Chorus amp Harmo 10 E Bass 2 30 Total EQ 1 11 Syn Bass 1 31 Total EQ 2 12 Syn Bass 2 32 Total EQ 3 13 Piano 1 33 Bass Drum 3 14 Piano 2 34 Snare Drum 3 15 E G Clean 35 Tom tom 2 16 E G Crunch 1 36 Piano 3 17 E G Crunch 2 37 Piano Low 18 E G Di
247. igital input on a DAT or MiniDisc deck for stereo mix recording See Digital Stereo Out on page 211 for more infor mation Option I O amp the Stereo Output The stereo output signal can be assigned to the Option I O digital outputs See About Option I O Cards on page 216 for more information Omni Outs amp the Stereo Output The stereo output signal can be assigned to the omni outs See Assigning Omni Outs on page 116 for more information Solo amp the Stereo Output The Mixdown Solo modes work in conjunction with the stereo output See Solo Setup on page 80 for more information DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT IN Monitoring the Stereo Output The stereo output can be monitored using the monitor out or phones See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Metering the Stereo Output 89 Metering the Stereo Output Stereo output signal levels can be metered using the L STEREO R meters or HOME page 4 meters See Metering Signal Levels on page 83 for more information Routing Signals to the Stereo Output Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects return can be routed to the stereo output See Routing Input Channels on page 49 for more information Viewing Stereo Output Settings Settings for the stereo output can be viewed and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW pages 1 and 2 1 Press the HOME button and then the MASTER SEL button ST appea
248. ign Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters boxes and the PARAM ETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Available functions for the faders and ON buttons are listed in the subsequent tables Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK switches and then press the ENTER button to activate the selected bank The switch of the active bank appears highlighted Custom assignments are stored in their respective banks when other banks are selected and banks can be stored using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information To reset a bank back to its initial assignments make it the active bank select the INI TIALIZE switch and then press the ENTER button A confirmation dialog box appears Select OK and then press the ENTER button to confirm your action The selected bank is reset to its initial assignments 01V Owner s Manual Fader Assignments Assigning Faders amp On Buttons 195 Faders 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to the following parameters Parameter Channel ASSIGN CH1 12 CH13 14 15 16 CH17 24 RETURN1 RETURN2 MASTER 1 4 BUS1 4 EFFECT1 EFFECT2 ST OUT CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 CH17 24 AUX1 SEND AUX2 SEND RETURNI RETURN2 FADER CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 RETURN1 AUX3 SEND AUX4 SEND RETURN CH1 12 CH13 14 CH15 16 CH17 24
249. ings Title Type Parameter Value Description Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 2 5 Compressor intended to reduce Attack ms 60 the overall volume level Use it 01 Comp COMP on the stereo output during mix Out gain dB 0 0 down It can also be used with Knee 2 the stereo input Release ms 250 Threshold dB 26 Range dB 56 02 Gate GATE Attack ms 0 Gate template Hold ms 2 56 Decay ms 331 Threshold dB 23 Ratio 1 1 7 Attack ms 1 03 Expand EXPAND Expander template Out gain dB 3 5 Knee 2 Release ms 70 Threshold dB 19 Range dB 22 04 Ducking DUCKING Attack ms 93 Ducking template Hold ms 1 20 5 Decay ms 6 32 5 Threshold dB 10 Ratio 1 3 5 Attack ms 1 05 Compander H COMPAND H Hard knee compressor template Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 6 Release ms 250 Threshold dB 8 Ratio 1 4 Attack ms 25 06 Compander S COMPAND S Soft knee compressor template Out gain dB 0 0 Width dB 24 Release ms 180 Threshold dB 24 Ratio 1 3 Attack ms 9 Compressor program for use 07 A Dr BD COMP with acoustic kit s bass drum Out gain dB 5 5 Knee 2 Release ms 58 Threshold dB 11 Range dB 3 Gate program for use with acous 08 A Dr BD GATE Attack ms 0 tic kit s bass drum Hold ms 1 93 Decay ms 400 01V Owner s Manual
250. ion REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV CHO 0 100 ple and chorus balance 0 chorus 100 HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ FPR TE 442 h d 4 4 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 149 Effects Parameters REV gt CHORUS Reverb and chorus effects in series Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 5 Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE pl Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform Reverb and chorused reverb balance 096 chorused REV BALS 05100 reverb 100 re
251. it doesn t work Try adjusting the contrast See Display Selected Channel Controls amp Meters on page 16 for more information Make sure that the 48 V phantom power is turned on for that input If a phone plug is plugged into the same input channel the XLR input is disabled See Input Channel Overview on page 40 for more infor mation The SELECTED CHANNEL PAN and EQ F and G controls adjust the wrong channel Use the SEL buttons to select channels See SEL Buttons on page 32 for more information Input channel signal levels are too low or too high Make sure that the GAIN control and PAD switch are set correctly See Gain and Pad on page 41 Use the HOME pages to check signal levels See Metering Signal Lev els on page 83 for more information Faders don t function as expected Make sure that you have selected the right fader mode See Faders plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information SEL buttons don t function as expected Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode See SEL Buttons on page 32 for more information SOLO buttons don t function as expected Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode See Solo Buttons on page 33 for more information ON buttons don t function as expected Make sure that you have selected the correct fader mode See ON Buttons on page 34 for more information
252. itle mix scenes EQ programs dynamics programs and effects programs Program titles can be up to 12 characters scene memory titles up to 8 characters EJ IDEC JBass Drum tas PRESS ENTER TO STORE 5 1 Use the cursor buttons to position the cursor in the title window 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel to select characters 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the following switches and press the ENTER button to execute their functions INS Insert a space at the cursor position and moves subsequent characters to the right Characters moved beyond the right edge of the title window are lost DEL Delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left 4 Use the 1 INC button to enter a space at the cursor position Use the 1 DEC button to toggle the character at the cursor position between uppercase lowercase and numerals 6 Press the ENTER button to store 01V Owner s Manual Input Channels 39 Input Channels In this chapter Input Channel Overview on Vea die o do ud 40 Phantom Powering avene a at OA AAAS RES JC NES NGC 41 Pad Switches Ried 41 Setting Input Channel Gain eo e P ceo CR C dO t huis 41 de aq duct 41 Changing the Input Phase hed OO 42 Attenuating Input Channel Signals n on
253. k 3 199 Channel Control Parameter 1 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM1 2 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM2 3 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM3 4 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM4 5 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 5 6 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM6 7 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM7 8 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM8 9 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM9 10 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM10 11 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM11 12 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM12 13 14 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM13 15 16 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM14 MAS ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT1 PARAM15 01V Owner s Manual 200 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 15 Other Functions Initial Assignments for Bank 4 These are the initial fader and ON button assignments for Bank 4 Channel Control Parameter 1 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader EFFECT EFFECT2 PARAM1 2 ON button NO ASSIG
254. k EQ ing select Lo MiD a channel and use the EQ controls Q et For Input Channels 1 16 1 Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select channels 2 Usethe HIGH HI MID LO MID and LOW buttons to select EQ bands and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain respec tively If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Prefer ences on page 203 the EQ page shown below appears and the Home fader mode is selected This page can also be located using the EQ ATT button Ea 106 1 D 8 8 6 78 6 76 H SHELF G HALL CHORUS The EQ can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select param eters and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them For Input Channels 17 24 1 Press the OPTION I O button 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels 3 Use the HIGH and LOW buttons to select EQ bands and the F and G controls to adjust the frequency and gain respectively If the EQ AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Prefer ences on page 203 the OPTION page shown below appears This page can also be located using the OPTION I O button CHI CONTROL J ROUTE FADER EFFECT D i eao OH HRLL CHORUS co i o i o co E125 1 0 Ok
255. kHz 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 1 2 5 1 3 1 3 5 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 8 1 RATIO 10 1 20 1 15 steps THRESHOLD This determines the input signal level at which compression and expansion are applied Signals at a level below the sum of the threshold and width are attenuated by the expander Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter OUT GAIN This sets the compander s output signal level It can be used to compen sate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes WIDTH This determines how far below the threshold level expansion is applied The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to 90 dB ATTACK This determines how soon the signal is compressed and expanded once the compander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is companded almost immediately With a slow attack time however the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Attack times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start RELEASE This determines how soon the compressor and expander return to their normal gains once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold If the release time is too short the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping 1 noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too
256. l 202 Chapter 15 Other Functions Using the Oscillator The 01V features a useful audio oscillator with 100 Hz 1 kHz and 10 kHz sine wave tones and pink noise and burst pink noise It can be assigned to individual aux sends bus outs effects sends or the stereo output and is useful for calibration or diagnostic purposes Assigning burst noise to an effects send is a convenient way to audition reverb settings Use the UTILITY button to locate UTILITY page 1 as shown below BUS RATNIRTNZ Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 and 1 INC buttons to set them ON OFF This switch is used to turn the oscillator on or off Note To prevent sudden tone burst surprises in your monitors or headphones set the oscillator level stereo output aux sends bus outs or effects returns to a minimal level WAVEFORM This switch is used to select the type of waveform generated by the oscillator 100 Hz 1 kHz or 10 kHz sine wave tones pink noise or burst pink noise which consists of 200 ms pulses at four second intervals LEVEL This control is used to adjust the output level of the oscillator from 0 dB to 96 dB ASSIGN These switches are used to assign the oscillator to individual aux sends bus outs effects sends or the stereo output The Oscillator page also features level meters for the aux sends bus outs and effects returns
257. l vi Contents 12 13 14 01V Owner s Manual EITGGES purs ppt Se E 119 About the Onboard Effects 120 Preset Effects PrOSTAmis Vade pO dob ace Re 121 Usg a iios aca ce anc at CR Qn 123 Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends 125 Viewing Effects Send Settings 127 Metering Effects Sends pere da ha MA NA at AM E e a a 127 Setting Effects Send Master Levels 128 Mutine Sende doge a oti eee eas 129 Viewing Effects Returns Settings 130 Metering Effects Beturnso shane gens ovS Sx ae E E EE 130 Applying EQ to Effects Returns 130 Muting Effects Returns ans ue ee Sv qc de Re SO 130 Setting Effects Returns Levels 131 Panning Effects Returns 131 Routing Effects 131 Monitoring Fffects Returns voee se cas ars 131 Effects Returns amp Aux 131 Effects ibrary RE CR a RR RUM E ena wea 152 Storing Effects 133 Recalling Effects Programs 134 Editing Effects Program
258. l Gain GAIN controls adjust the gain of the input channel preamps They re used to optimize the input signal level for the best signal to noise performance and should be set in con junction with the level meters on the HOME pages Ideally the GAIN control should be set so that the signal level is relatively high and it s okay for it to reach CLIP occa sionally If CLIP is reached often however back off the GAIN control a little otherwise signal distortion may occur The GAIN control should be set with care If it s set too low the signal to noise performance will suffer If it s set too high unpleasant signal clip ping and distortion may occur The GAIN controls on input channels 1 through 12 are designed for use X with microphone signals and have an input sensitivity of 16 dB to 60 dB Used in conjunction with the 26 dB PAD switches however 16 80 BEGANEH these channels can also be used with line level signals and hot micro phone signals With the pad switch on input sensitivity is 10 to 34 dB detented action allows for accurate repeat setting The GAIN controls on input channels 13 through 16 are designed for use with line level signals and have gain range of 10 dB to 20 dB GAIN control settings are not stored in scene memories Metering Input Channels Signal levels can be metered on the HOME pages See Metering Signal Levels on page 83 for more infor
259. l can be fed back from left to right and right to left Modulation type Effects Title Type Description 13 Chorus CHORUS Three phase stereo chorus 14 Flange FLANGE The well known flanging effect 15 Symphonic SYMPHONIC A Yamaha proprietary effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than chorus 16 Phaser PHASER Stereo phaser with 2 16 stages of phase shift 17 Auto Pan AUTO PAN An effect which cyclically moves the sound between left and right 18 Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo 19 HO Pitch HO PITCH Only one note is pitch shifted but a stable effect is produced 20 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shift with left and right pitches set independently 21 Rotary ROTARY Simulation of a rotary speaker 01V Owner s Manual 122 Chapter 12 Effects Title Ring Mod Type RING MOD Description An effect that modifies the pitch by applying amplitude modulation to the frequency of the input On the 01V even the modulation frequency can be controlled by modulation 23 Mod Filter MOD FILTER An effect which uses an LFO to modulate the frequency of the filter Guitar Effects 24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar Amp Simulator Dynamic Effects Title Type Description 26 eser mer orara conei Report 1 MDI Nt 27
260. l level change caused by the expansion process KNEE This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold point When set to hard expansion at the specified ratio is applied as soon as the input signal level falls below the specified threshold For knee settings from 1 to 5 however expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold creating a more nat ural sound ATTACK This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is expanded almost immediately With a slow attack time however the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected Attack times from 1 to 5 milliseconds are a good place to start RELEASE This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold If the release time is too short the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping i e noticeable gain fluctuations If it is set too long the expander may not have time to recover before the next low level signal appears and it will be expanded incorrectly Release times from 0 1 to 0 5 seconds are a good place to start RATIO This determines the amount of expansion That is the change in output sig nal level relative to change in input signal level For a 2 1 ratio for example 5 dB change in input level below the threshold results in a 10 dB change in output level For 5 1 ratio
261. l of the effects return you want to send to the aux send If the aux send is configured post fader Pre fader Post fader Aux Sends on page 97 youll have to raise the effects returns regular control as well To do this press the HOME button and then turn up the rotary control Pre fader Post fader Aux Sends 97 Pre fader Post fader Aux Sends The aux sends on input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be configured individually as pre fader or post fader sends Pre fader means that signals are sourced before and are not affected by the regular channel fader Post fader means that signals are sourced after and are affected by the regular channel fader With a post fader send the regular channel fader can be used to control the channel level and the aux send level simultaneously For Input Channels 1 16 amp the Effects Returns 1 Use the AUX buttons to locate an AUX PRE POST page as shown below RUx1 PRE POST J RUX 1 MRSTER ES 2 4 4 7e Di pus zum HRLL CHORUS D o The value below each PRE POST switch indicates the position of the aux send fader The position of the corresponding aux send master fader is displayed at the top of the page 2 Usethe SEL buttons or cursor buttons to select the PRE POST switches and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them The PRE POST switches on input chan
262. l wordclock slaves are synchronized to the master wordclock Some devices have front panel indica tors to show when they are wordclock synchronized Refer to the instructions for each device The following system examples show three typical wordclock setups with the 01V For detailed system examples with specific equipment see System Examples on page 241 01V Owner s Manual About Wordclocks 207 Digitally Recording to DAT 01V wordclock master DAT wordclock slave DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT Digital In In this system the 01V s stereo output signal is digitally transferred to a DAT recorder The 01V works as wordclock master and the DAT works as wordclock slave The 01V is set to internal wordclock The DAT derives its wordclock signal from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out connection of the 01V Both devices operate at a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz Multitrack Recording 01V wordclock slave Digital multitrack wordclock master Digital In OPTION I O Digital Out DAT wordclock slave DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT 00 00 00 00 Digital In In this syste
263. lug Ring cold anced or unbalanced phone plugs can be connected They output the monitor sig nals and should be connected to the inputs Sleeve ground on a monitor amplifier The monitor signal source is set using the MONITOR 2TR IN switch and SETUP page 2 and the output level is set using the MONITOR LEVEL control 2 PHANTOM 48V ON OFF Switches The CH 1 6 and CH 7 12 PHANTOM 48V ON OFF switches are used to turn on and off the 48 V phantom power for XLR inputs 1 through 6 and 7 through 12 respectively 3 OMNI OUTs These are balanced 1 4 inch phone jacks Tip hot with a 4 dB nominal output level Bal 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring cold anced or unbalanced phone plugs can be connected These outputs can be config ured individually as analog bus outs aux sends stereo outs or direct outs for input channels 1 through 16 Bus outputs are typ ically connected to multitrack recorders while aux sends are typically used to feed external effects processors foldback ampli fiers and so on Sleeve ground 01V Owner s Manual Inputs amp Outputs 23 STEREO OUT These are balanced XLR 3 32 type 2 hot connectors with a 4 dB nominal output level They are wired pin 1 ground pin 2 hot and pin 3 cold They output the main ste 1 ground reo mix 3 cold If you need to connect the balanced ST OUT to an unbalanced phone jack input use a cable with the following wiring scheme i e
264. m BUS AUX 1234123412 ST LR Meter Meter AUX 1 master fader 4 Band Meter Meter AUX 2 master fader 4 Band A Meter Meter AUX 3 master fader 4 Band A Meter Meter AUX 4 master fader 4 Band A MONI LR Meter AUX 1 3 OUTPUT p SELECT c LISTEN OPE Meter AUX 2 OUTPUT ON SELECT c LISTEN AUS Meter AUX 3 3 OUTPUT ON SELECT c LISTEN mE Meter AUX 4 3 to OUTPUT ON SELECT c LISTEN S to MONITOR 01V Owner s Manual 105 Stereo Pair Aux Send Block Diagram Stereo Pair Aux Send Block Diagram xnv xnv SNVO NVd uM oyi a xnv Nvd Z LXNY Ong den c RECEN O3d oF X z Naisn i pueg y LI s E NO Jape 151 Nvd Z LXnv O3d peBueuoun HO Jopej H xnv X pi e L EL 1SOd 3Hd HO 333 Xnv NULL A 0 0 2338 _____ if T pueg y 5 i H 1 sh
265. m audio is recorded to and mixed from the digital multitrack recorder The 01V s stereo output signal is digitally transferred to the DAT recorder The digital mul titrack recorder is wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves The 01V derives its wordclock from the Option I O digital input The DAT derives its wordclock signal from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out connection of the 01V The sampling rate is the same as that used when the digital multitrack tapes were for matted or recorded 01V Owner s Manual 208 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs 01V Owner s Manual Multitrack Recording with Digital DAT Source 01V wordclock slave Digital multitrack wordclock slave Digital In OPTION I O Digital Out DAT wordclock master DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN 00 00 00 00 Digital Out In this system audio is recorded to and mixed from the digital multitrack recorder The DAT output signal is digitally transferred to the 01V for recording to the digital multitrack recorder The DAT recorder is wordclock master and the 01V and digital multitrack recorder are wordclock slaves The 01V derives its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In
266. m 159 edit page 123 124 136 137 157 editing 136 library 132 library page 132 133 134 135 parameters 138 pre post page 125 summary 6 using 123 Effects library about 132 MIDI bulk dump 232 number of programs 266 preset program list 121 recalling programs 134 storing programs 133 titling programs 135 Effects returns aux sends 131 EQ 64 level setting 131 metering 83 monitoring 131 muting 130 panning 47 131 routing 49 specifications 264 viewing settings 130 Effects returns area display 29 Effects sends master level settings 128 metering 86 muting 129 pre post fader 125 viewing settings 127 Emphasis definition 294 digital stereo input 213 option I O 216 ENTER button 31 EQ about 62 adjusting 63 aux sends 64 bypassing 66 effects returns 64 input channels 63 library 67 library page 67 68 69 70 page 63 64 65 resetting 66 specifications 267 stereo output 65 summary 5 EQ AUTO SCREEN preference 203 EQ library about 67 MIDI bulk dump 232 number of programs 266 preset program list 67 preset program parameters 71 recalling programs 69 storing programs 68 titling programs 70 EQ page 43 EQ page 1 43 63 64 65 EQ page 2 67 68 69 70 Error messages 258 Expander 170 F F control 63 FAD user define 238 Fade time definition 294 mix scenes 191 Fader modes 32 Faders about 19 calibrating 204 display 30 fader modes 35 grouping 55 mode buttons 17 nominal indicator 30 reassigning 194 stereo o
267. mands an MMC compatible recorder can be controlled from the 01V ON buttons 1 through 6 can be used to control transport functions while SEL buttons 1 through 6 can be used to locate six definable locate points MMC commands are transmitted via MIDI Use the REMOTE button to locate REMOTE page 2 as shown below CONTROL m M p z m 5 06 60010 2 E TRANSPORT cono OAE While this page is displayed controls other than ON buttons 1 through 6 and SEL buttons 1 through 6 are disabled Use the cursor buttons to select the DEVICE No parameter and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a device number The device number which can be set from 1 through 127 or ALL should be set to match that of the recorder you want to control When set to ALL all MMC compatible recorders connected can be controlled together Use ON buttons 1 through 6 to transmit the following transport com mands to a recorder On Button Function MMC Command Value 1 Rewind 05 2 Fast Forward 04 3 Stop 01 4 Play 02 5 Pause 09 6 Record 06 Use the cursor buttons and PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set the locate times in hours minutes seconds and frames Use SEL buttons 1 through 6 to transmit the locate commands to the recorder Locate points can be stored using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump
268. mation 01V Owner s Manual 42 Chapter 5 Input Channels Changing the Input Phase 01V Owner s Manual The Phase switches available on input channels 1 through 16 reverse the phase of input signals by 180 degrees This can be used to compensate for incorrectly wired balanced cables and microphones Also when a snare drum is miked top and bottom the chan nel connected to the bottom microphone can be phase reversed to prevent signal can cellation Use the DELAY button to locate DELAY page 1 as shown below 1 2 8 4 56 7 es Pod i d2 1 4 15 16 125 i HALL CHORUS TEE Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select channels Phase switches can also be selected using the cursor buttons Use the ENTER button or the 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set the phase of the selected channel to normal or reversed Normal phase EE Reversed phase The Phase switches on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are not linked and can set independently When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their Phase switches continue to work independently Input channels 17 through 24 do not have Phase switches Attenuating Input Channel Signals 43 Attenuating Input Channel Signals Input channels 1 through 24 are fitted with digital attenuators which can be used to attenuate input signals from 0 dB to 96 dB in 1 dB steps
269. memories are emptied and the faders are calibrated Calibrating the Faders If the 01V is not used for a long time it s moved to a new location or fader movements have been obstructed the faders may need calibrating The calibration process calcu lates the torque required by each fader motor to drive its fader accurately and smoothly Turn off the 01V While holding down the ENTER button turn on the 01V Release the ENTER button The fader calibration process starts When the faders return to their original positions calibration is complete Do not attempt to use the 01V before calibration is completed 01V Owner s Manual Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs 205 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs In this chapter About Wordcl cks EE E 206 Setting EE OL OA ates 209 stereo QUE oco eC RUD ERROR 211 UU Dither v orioneu ea e ec Dd ud al coa P Gt o 212 Digital Stereo DH qoc daba ode ore oaa p tur 219 Cascading eu b e Ord P SA ea 214 About Option I O Cards s iude n Rede e ane tans da a c n eene 216 Installing Option I O Cards teet use te ep RR EAE pated das 218 Assigning Option I O Digital 219 Option I O Block Diagram zy qoa Kk C So eNO OCIO 220 01V Owner s Manual 206 Chapter 16 Using the Digital Inputs amp Outputs About
270. memory 00 isaread only memory When a scene memory other than the one recalled last is selected the scene memory number flashes If the scene memory that was recalled last is selected again or a different scene memory is recalled the number stops flashing Also in the Memory area are the MIDI and HOST indicators which appear when MIDI data is received at the MIDI IN or TO HOST port respectively See MIDI Receive Indicators on page 224 for more information InitData 01V Owner s Manual 186 Chapter 14 Scene Memories Storing Mix Scenes 1 Mix scenes be stored in scene memories 1 through 99 Caution When storing mix scenes make sure that there are no mix settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store Perhaps some settings have been adjusted acciden tally or by someone else If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer s exact contents recall the last mix scene make the adjustments that you really want and then store the mix scene You may want to store the current mix settings to an unused scene memory just in case Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 1 as shown below MEMORY J TITLE EDIT SG Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a scene memory from 1 through 99 The scene memory list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 Use the cursor buttons t
271. mics Compressor Gate Ducking Expander Compander Fader 60 mm motorized ON OFF Monitor ON OFF AFL PFL Displayed on LCD Met MUS Peak hold ON OFF Stereo Out EQ 4 band PEQ Low Lo Mid Hi Mid High Fader 60 mm motorized Balance Dynamics Compressor Gate Ducking Expander Compander ON OFF Delay 0 300 ms fs 44 1 kHz Monitor ON OFF AFL PFL Metering 12 element x 2 LED meters post fader and displayed on LCD DA converter 20 bit linear 8 times oversampling Omni Out 1 4 Output select CH 1 16 BUS 1 4 AUX 1 4 STEREO STEREO Delay 0 300 ms fs 44 1 kHz DA converter 18 bit linear 8 times oversampling 01V Owner s Manual 266 Appendix B Specifications Monitor Out Solo Solo trim 6 to 60 dB 1 dB steps Mono DA converter 18 bit linear 8 times oversampling SELECT switch MONITOR 2TR IN Level control Analog rotary control Phones level Analog rotary control Digital Stereo Out ON OFF Word length 16 24 bit Dither Option I O Output need optional card OPTION OUT 1 BUS 1 CH 1 CH 9 AUX 1 ST OUT L OPTION OUT 2 BUS 2 CH 2 CH 10 AUX 2 ST OUT R OPTION OUT 3 BUS 3 CH 3 CH 11 AUX 3 ST OUT L Output select OPTION OUT 4 BUS 4 CH 4 CH 12 AUX 4 ST OUT R TD AT OPTION OUT 5 BUS 1 CH 5 CH 13 AUX 1 STOUTL OPTION OUT 6 BUS 2 CH 6 CH 14 AUX 2 ST OUT R OPTION OUT 7 BU
272. middle of the page next the dynamics curve To the left is the processor on off switch Below these are the dynamics parameters the number of which vary depending on the type of processor selected The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied to the selected channel Next to this are level meters for the selected channel and its neighbor 01V Owner s Manual Preset Dynamics Programs 163 Preset Dynamics Programs The following table lists the preset dynamics programs See Preset Dynamics Program Settings on page 177 for detailed parameter information No Title Type Title Type 01 Comp COMP E Guitar COMP 02 Gate GATE A Guitar COMP 03 Expand EXPAND Strings1 COMP 04 Ducking DUCKING Strings2 COMP 05 Compander H COMPAND H Strings3 COMP 06 Compander S COMPAND S BrassSection COMP 07 A Dr BD COMP Syn Pad COMP 08 A Dr BD GATE SamplingPerc COMPAND S 09 A Dr BD COMPAND H Sampling BD COMP 10 A Dr SN COMP Sampling SN COMP 11 A DrSN EXPAND Hip Comp COMPAND S 12 A Dr SN GATE Solo Vocal COMP 13 A Dr SN COMPAND S Solo Vocal2 COMP 14 A Dr Tom EXPAND Chorus COMP 15 A Dr OverTop COMPAND S Click Erase EXPAND 16 E B Finger COMP Announcer COMPAND H 17 E B Slap COMP Limiter COMPAND S 18 Syn Bass COMP Limiter2 COMP 19 Pianol COMP Total Comp1 COMP 20 Piano2 COMP Total Comp2 COMP
273. n in n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000100 04 multiple linking DATA Ommfffff mf data format bit6 5 status bit4 0 contents Oddddddd ddO data 0 Oddddddd data 1 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive Function Note 0x00 scene recall Recall the specified memory number Store to the specified memory number with title Assign the same title to all If the title was modified make it the same make it OxOl scene store 0x02 scene title edit match 0x48 solo mode Match the solo mode bit6 enable disable bit5 on off bit2 recording mixdown bit1 sel mix last bitO after fader pre fader 0x60 display call When the screen Fader Mode is changed make it match Make the meter points match Make the meter Peak Hold ON OFF match 0x61 metering point 0x62 peak hold 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Data Format 285 PARAMETER CHANGE type 0x05 remote meter When the following request is received to enable transmission the specified parameter data will be transmitted at 30 msec intervals for five seconds If you want meter data to be transmitted continuously you must continue transmitting requests less than five seconds apart Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON and the Rx CH matches the Device Channel that is included in the SUB STATUS this message is received When LOCAL OFF is ON the incoming meter data will be dis
274. n to locate MIDI page 2 as shown below L PROGRAM CHANGE J HALL CHORUS 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the CHG column and then use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a Program Change 3 Usetheright cursor button to select the NO TITLE column and then use the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a scene memory scene memory to Program Change assignment table is provided on page 273 To reset the assignments to their ini Hill Initialize 5 table tial settings use the cursor buttons to select the INITIAL enonsa tas IZE switch and then press the ENTER button The dialog box shown here appears Click OK to initialize ARE YOU SURE The current scene memory to Program Change assignment table can be stored to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information If a scene memory is assigned to two or more Program Changes the lowest Program Change is transmitted when that scene memory is recalled If a scene memory that is not assigned to a Program Change is recalled a System Exclu sive Parameter Change Scene Recall message is transmitted See System Exclusive Parameter Control on page 231 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 228 Chapter 17 MIDI 01V Owner s Manual Using Program Changes In the following example scene memory
275. n use this for fade outs DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice over applications in which the background music z level is reduced automatically when an 10 announcer speaks Ducking is achieved by triggering a compressor with a different 10 sound source For example a ducker is patched into the background music channel and the KEY IN signal is sourced from the Threshold 20dB Output Level dB announcer s microphone channel When the so announcer s microphone level exceeds the 60 Range 3098 specified threshold the background music 70 level is reduced automatically allowing the 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 announcer to be heard clearly The same Input Level dB technique can also be used for vocals in a mix For example ducking backing sounds such as rhythm guitar and synth pad during vocal phrases allows the vocals to be heard more clearly This can also be used to bring solo instruments up in a mix Parameter Range THRESHOLD 54 dB to 0 dB 55 steps RANGE 70 dB to 0 dB 71 steps 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz HOLD 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 2 44 1 kHz ATTACK 0 120 ms 1 ms steps 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz DECAY 6 ms 46 s fs 44 1 kHz THRESHOLD This determines the level of trigger signal KEY IN required to acti vate ducking Trigger signal levels below the threshold do not activate ducking Trigger signals at and above the threshold level howe
276. nd s volume envelope The following sec tions explain the COMP GATE DUCKING EXPAND COMPANDER H and COMPANDER S dynamics processors their parameters and general applications COMP The COMP processor is a compressor that attenuates signals above a specified threshold providing automatic level control Vocalists that tend to move toward and away from the microphone while singing produce fluctuat ing signal levels sometimes loud sometimes soft Likewise acoustic instruments with a large dynamic range produce sound levels from pianissimo very soft through to fortis simo very loud In these situations it is often difficult to set an average fader level that will allow a voice or instrument to be heard clearly throughout a song or piece of music This is where the compressor comes in with Compression ratio 2 1 Threshold 20dB hard Output Level dB 40 50 60 70 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 Input Level dB automatic level control By automatically reducing high levels thus effectively reducing the dynamic range the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher therefore improving signal to noise performance The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter which is essentially a compressor with a high ratio setting Compression ra
277. nd Of Exclusive The valid range of addresses is 0x0000 0x03FF Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS PARAMETER CHANGE byte operation for type 0x01 system memory Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON this message is received if the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this is echoed When this is received the specified parameter will be controlled STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change or response n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000001 01 byte operation for system memory type DATA 440 5 high 7 bits of 14 bits address Qaaaaaaa ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address 0000dddd dd2 data H high 4 bits of 8 bits data 0000dddd data L low 4 bits of 8 bits data E continuous address datas EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The system memory will depend on the address as follows 0x0000 0x007F setup memory 128byte 0x0080 0x0147 backup memory 200byte 0x0200 card type Ibyte PARAMETER CHANGE bit operation for type Ox41 system memory Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON this message is received if the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS When Parameter Change
278. nds 50 01V Owner s Manual iv Contents 01V Owner s Manual Input Channels amp the Omni Outs 50 Input Channels amp the Option I O 50 Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 51 Pairing Input Channels 52 Grouping Faders Aceh o eb dad ped ne t dopa adc toe 55 Gro ping Mutes cos cerei we o i n eS 56 Viewing Input Channel Settings eL RE RE RR EN 57 Copying amp Swapping Channel Settings 59 Input Channel Block Diagram 60 EQ eres eae LS Beale 61 Aboutthe EQ 2 12 so teh ar ade setae 62 Adjusting the EQ ER C OC FT led 63 EQ SPES MERECE ER ee RN A gia 66 Bypassing the EQ ont o pode CIO 66 Resettine the EQ aan DICH PD M ROC I RON E 66 sit oe n vd d Ceo E OCA cp xe go eec dotes 67 Preset EQ Program rr eb eG 67 Storing EQ Seba da es Me Es EA A 68 Recalling uis sah xo DE CE A CC OX 69 Editing EQ Program Titles 70 Preset EQ Program Parameters 71 Solo Monitors amp Meters 75 About
279. nector DIGITAL 60958 2 0 5 V pp STEREO OUT ERAIN Consumer Use 75 Phong 1 Channel status Type 2 audio channels Category code 2 channel PCM encoder decoder Copy prohibit No Emphasis No Clock accuracy Level 1 000 ppm Sampling rate depends on internal configuration 2 Dither wordlength 16 24 bit Option I O Cards Card Format Inputs Outputs MY8 AT ADAT 8 IN CH 17 24 8 OUT BUS AUX ST CH direct MY8 TD TASCAM 8 IN CH 17 24 8 OUT BUS AUX ST CH direct MY8 AE AES EBU 8 IN CH 17 24 8 OUT BUS AUX ST CH direct MY4 DA Analog out 4 OUT BUS AUX ST CH direct MY8 AD Analog in 8 IN CH 17 24 ui MY4 AD Analog in 4 IN CH 17 20 01V Owner s Manual 270 Appendix B Specifications Control I O Connection Format Level Connector TO HOST RS 422 8 pin mini DIN MIDI IN MIDI 5 pin DIN MIDI THRU MIDI 5 pin DIN MIDI OUT MIDI 5 pin DIN 01V Owner s Manual 01V Dimensions 271 01V Dimensions OJOJOJOJOJOJ OJ O O O O W 430 Specifications and external appearance are subject to change without notice For European Model Purchaser User Information specified in EN55103 1 and EN55103 2 Inrush Current 4A Conformed Environment E1 22 and E4 01V Owner s Manual Scene Memory to Program Change
280. nels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are perma nently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired or when aux sends are configured as stereo pairs Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their PRE POST switches are linked For Input Channels 17 24 1 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 as shown below ELS ne Bk 2 p 59 588 8 048 2 Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the AUX PRE POST switches and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them When aux 1 and 2 are paired Pairing Aux Sends on page 101 the PRE POST switches are linked 01V Owner s Manual 98 Chapter 9 Aux Sends Viewing Aux Send Settings Settings for the aux sends can be viewed and certain parameters adjusted on VIEW pages 1 and 2 Use the AUX buttons to select an aux send and then press the MASTER SEL button AUX appears on the display indicating that an aux send is selected 2 Usethe VIEW button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below RuUx1 VIEW J ROUTE DELAY FADER a HALL CHORUS GROUP PAIR 2 AUX 1 VIEW J FADER 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them Parameters are explained in the following sections 01V Owner s Manual Setting Aux Send Master Levels 99 Setting
281. nforma tion 1 Use the AUX buttons to select an aux send An AUX page similar to the one shown below appears AUX 1 PRE POST J AUX 1 i xut e 4 i 5 i Ez En Ez E E i i e i i a 1 11 12 14 15 16 IRTNZ POST POST POST POST POST POST POST POST i i i i i i HALL CHORUS The MASTER ON button now functions as aux send master on off switch for the selected aux send 2 Use the MASTER ON button to turn the aux send on or off When aux sends are paired Pairing Aux Sends on page 101 their on switches are linked The aux send master switches can be viewed and set on the VIEW pages See Viewing Aux Send Settings on page 98 for more information Applying EQ to Aux Sends Each aux send features a four band parametric EQ See EQ on page 61 for more information The EQ can be turned on or off and the EQ curve viewed on the VIEW page See Viewing Aux Send Settings on page 98 for more information Aux Send Dynamics Processors Each aux send features a dynamics processor See Dynamics Processors on page 161 for more information The dynamics can be turned on or off and the dynamics curve viewed on the VIEW page See Viewing Aux Send Settings on page 98 for more infor mation 01V Owner s Manual Pairing Aux Sends 101 Pairing Aux Sends Aux sends 1 and 2 and aux sen
282. nnel delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left 1 NOTER channel DELAY L Feedback gain plus values for normal phase E 0 enn 27 10 422 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback DELAY R 0 0 1000 0 ms Right channel delay time Used conjunction with TEMPO to determine right NOTER 1 channel DELAY R DLY HI 0 1 1 0 Delay high frequency feedback ratio FB DLY 0 0 1000 0 ms Feedback delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine NOTE FB 1 EB DLY 06 DLY REV 0 100 Delay and reverb balance 0 reverb 100 delay REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency Used in conjunction with NOTE parameters to 2 E lt 255300 bps determine DELAY L DELAY R and FB DLY 1 H b JJ ddd Ja d 4 4 d Maximum value depends on the tempo setting 2 For more information about the DELAY NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 155 Effects Parameters DELAY gt REV Delay and reverb effects in series Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time Used in conjunction with T
283. nsmitting Program Change mes sages to the 01V Configure the 01V to receive MIDI Program Change messages See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information Assign Program Change messages to scene memories See Program Change Scene Recall on page 227 for more information If the Program Change Tx switch is turned on MIDI Setup on page 224 the 01V transmits a Program Change message each time a mix scene is recalled This could be used to recall programs on other MIDI equipment for example effects program on an external effects processor or a voice on a synthesizer Recalling scene memory 10 for example would recall voice 10 on a synthesizer Program Change messages transmit ted by the 01V can be recorded to a MIDI sequencer for automated scene changes 01V Owner s Manual Undoing Mix Scene Recalls 189 Undoing Mix Scene Recalls Mix scene recalls can be undone using the Recall Undo function 1 Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 1 as shown below 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the RECALL UNDO switch The RECALL UNDO switch appears gray until a mix scene is recalled after the 01V is initialized 3 Press the ENTER button The 01V returns to the mix settings that were active before the mix scene was recalled Pressing the ENTER button again redoes the mix scene recall Pressing again undoes it and so on Recall Undo is useful when a mix scene is recalled by mistake but can
284. o 225 on off 225 Parameter control system exclusive 231 PARAMETER wheel 31 Parameters Dynamics processors preset programs 177 effects preset programs 138 EQ preset programs 71 PCM definition 295 Peak hold 84 Peaking definition 295 EQ 62 PEQ definition 295 PFL definition 295 PFL AFL See AFL PFL PHANTOM 48V ON OFF switches 22 Phantom powering 41 Phantom powering definition 295 Phase 42 Phase page 42 PHASER 143 Phone inputs 20 PHONES jack connector 21 using 77 PHONES LEVEL control about 15 using 77 Pink noise definition 295 pink noise 202 Ports about 222 MIDI 23 selecting 224 TO HOST 23 using MIDI 223 using TO HOST 223 Post fader definition 295 Power cord 11 POWER switch 23 Powering down the 01V 11 Powering up the 01V 11 Pre fader definition 295 Pre post aux sends 97 effects sends 125 monitoring 78 solo 80 Preferences 203 Preferences pages 203 Preset programs dynamics list 163 dynamics parameters 177 effects list 121 effects parameters 138 EQ list 67 EQ parameters 71 Pro Tools system 250 Problem solving 253 Program change definition 295 echo 225 MIDI bulk dump 232 omni 225 on off 225 page 227 scene memory assignment table 273 scene memory assignments 227 scene recall 227 using 228 Programmable mixer 01 parameter to control change assignment table 277 Programs dynamics list 163 dynamics parameters 177 effects list 121 effects parameters 138 EQ list 67 EQ parameters 71 Protecting scene
285. o MONITOR See Using Monitor on page 78 for more information Make sure a monitor SOURCE is selected on SETUP page 2 See Mon itor Setup on page 78 for more information Make sure that the MONITOR OUT LEVEL or PHONES LEVEL control is turned up Also check the MONI TRIM parameter on SETUP page 2 See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information Solo mode is selected but nothing can be heard Make sure that the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR See Two track Input 2TR IN on page 77 for more information Make sure that the MONITOR OUT LEVEL or PHONES LEVEL control is turned up and that the SOLO TRIM control on SETUP page 2 is turned up See Using Solo on page 81 for more information Solo doesn t function as expected and the SOLO button indicators light up instead of flashing Check whether or not the Solo function is enabled See Solo Setup on page 80 for more information Channels seem to run out of headroom especially when EQ boost is applied Use the Attenuator function on the EQ page to reduce the level See Attenuating Input Channel Signals on page 43 for more informa tion The Digital Stereo Coaxial In signal appears on input channels 13 and 14 Probably because the Digital Stereo Coaxial In is flipped with inputs 13 and 14 See Digital Stereo In on page 213 for more information Cannot hear signals connected to inputs 13 an
286. o control change assignment table 277 DEC amp 1 INC buttons 31 15 16 2 IN switch 2TRIN 77 about 15 input channels 40 2TR IN about 21 using 77 2TR OUT about 21 using 88 44 kHz sampling rate 209 A A D converter definition 293 About aux sends 94 bus outs 108 dynamics library 173 dynamics processors 162 edit buffer 185 effects 120 effects library 132 EQ 62 EQ library 67 input channels 40 interface 28 MIDI amp the 01V 222 monitor amp solo 76 omni outs 116 option I O cards 216 scene memories 184 stereo output 88 wordclocks 206 AFL definition 293 AFL PFL monitoring 78 solo 80 Aliasing definition 293 AMP SIMULATE 147 Analog controls 15 Analog input specifications 268 Analog output specifications 268 Anti aliasing definition 293 Assigning faders amp on buttons 194 input channels 49 omni outs 116 option I O digital outputs 219 oscillator 202 Attenuator 43 Auto navigate wordclock source 209 AUTOPAN 144 AUX page 1 95 96 97 99 100 AUX page 2 102 Aux pan page 102 Aux pre post page 95 96 97 99 100 Aux sends about 94 block diagram 104 dynamics processors 164 effects returns 131 EQ 64 input channels 50 level setting 99 metering 83 monitoring 94 muting 100 omni outs 94 option I O 94 pairing 101 panning 102 pre post fader 97 specifications 265 stereo pair block diagram 105 using 95 viewing settings 98 B Balancing the stereo output 90 Balancing definition 293 Banks inte
287. o select the STORE switch and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the Title Edit dialog box does not appear and the mix scene is stored Title the mix scene See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information Select OK and then press the ENTER button The mix scene is stored to the selected scene memory the scene memory number stops flashing and the EDIT indicator disappears 01V Owner s Manual Recalling Mix Scenes 187 Recalling Mix Scenes Mix scenes can be recalled from scene memories 0 through 99 manually or remotely using MIDI Program Change messages Note When recalling mix scenes be aware that volume levels may change suddenly as channels are turned on and fader levels adjusted Nobody likes sudden loud noises or speaker damage 1 Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 1 as shown below TITLE LEDIT SG 2 Use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select scene memories As each scene memory is selected its title and number flash on the display The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 3 Usethe cursor buttons to select the RECALL switch and then press the ENTER button The mix scene is recalled the scene memory
288. ocate PAN ROUT page 2 as shown below aa aa aA Ba iBTNZ Oe OQ aAA Use the SEL buttons to select channels Use the cursor buttons to select the Routing switches and the ENTER button to set them For Input Channels 17 24 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 as shown below CH1 CONTROL J ptf ta md hone FUR EFFECT a mme i A E i HALL CHORUS co 5 3 E iG 8 096 8 098 3 CENTER ED ED 227 Ea PEE Sir Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels Use the cursor buttons to select the Routing switches and the ENTER button to set them A highlighted Routing switch indicates that a channel has been routed Input channels 1 through 12 have four bus out routing switches 1 2 3 4 E stereo out routing switch ST and a direct out routing switch D The latter switch is turned on automatically when an input channel is selected as the source for an Option I O out on OPTION page 4 Likewise when an input channel is selected as the source for an Option I O out on OPTION page 4 the corresponding D switch on the PAN ROUT page is turned on See Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information g Input channels 13 through 24 and the effects returns have four bus out rout aw ing switches 1 2 3 4 and a stereo out routing switch ST BBE
289. of a stereo signal is 100 16 R16 15 16 With both controls set at CENTER as shown here the width of the stereo signal is zero i e mono 15 16 Setting the controls to positions in between these two extremes allows you to set the width of the stereo signal To maintain a central balance however you must set both controls to corresponding values For example 18 and R8 or L10 and R10 Pan Modes The three Pan modes INDIVIDUAL GANG and INV GANG determine how the panpots operate on input channels 13 14 15 16 and the effects returns and paired input channels 1 through 12 Since input channels 17 through 24 cannot be paired they are not affected by the Pan modes Use the cursor buttons to select the MODE parameter and the PARAM ETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a mode INDIVIDUAL In this mode panpots function independently CENTER CENTER GANG In this mode panpots are ganged 1 linked together amp yx 3 INV GANG In this mode panpots are ganged together but operation is L R inverted 1 panpots move in opposite directions 01V Owner s Manual Routing Input Channels 49 Routing Input Channels The Routing switches available input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns are used to route signals to the four bus outs stereo out and direct outs For Input Channels 1 16 amp the Effects Returns Use the PAN ROUTING button to l
290. of digital Audio John Watkinson Focal Press Butterworth Group 1990 essential read for digital audio professionals but only for the serious The MIDI Ins Outs amp Thrus Jeff Rona Hal Leonard Publishing 1992 An excellent introduction to MIDI with many illustrations for easy understanding MIDI Systems amp Control Francis Rumsey second edition Focal Press 1994 Covers all MIDI topics in detail and looks at how MIDI can be used to control systems 1 digital mixers synths THE MIDI BOOK Steve DeFuria with Joe Scacciaferro Hal Leonard Books A good introduction for anyone new to MIDI THE MIDI RESOURCE BOOK Steve DeFuria with Joe Scacciaferro Hal Leonard Books 1988 Following on from THE MIDI BOOK this one looks at the real nuts and bolts of MIDI including the MIDI specification and how to read MIDI Imple mentation Charts Yamaha Sound Reinforcement Handbook Gary Davis and Ralph Jones second edi tion Hal Leonard Publishing Corporation 1990 Although primarily concerned with sound reinforcement many of the subjects covered also apply to studio audio applications The second edition also includes a comprehensive section on MIDI Yamaha Web Site Information on Yamaha professional audio products can be found at the Yamaha Pro fessional Audio Web site lt http www yamaha co jp product proaudio homeenglish gt 01V Owner s Manual Glossary 293 Glossary A D converter An electronic
291. ograms Preset Effects Programs The following table lists the preset effects programs See Effects Parameters on page 138 for detailed parameter information Effects programs that use the HQ PITCH or FREEZE type effects can be used only with Effect 2 Reverb type Effects Title Type Description 01 Reverb Hall REVERB HALL a simulating a large space such as a concert Reverb simulating the acoustics of a smaller space 02 Reverb Room ROOM room than REVERB HALL 03 Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed with vocals mind 04 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Simulation of a metal plate reverb unit producing a feeling of hard edged reverberation An effect which isolates only the early reflection ER 05 Early Ref EARLY REF component from reverberation A flashier effect than reverb is produced 06 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB A type of ER designed for use as gated reverb 07 Reverse Gate reverse playback type ER Delays Title Type Description 08 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Mono delay with simple operation Use when you don t need to use complex parameter settings 09 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Stereo delay with independent left and right 10 Mod delay MOD DELAY Mono delay with modulation 11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR Three tap delay L C R Stereo delay with additional parameters for more 12 Echo ECHO detailed control The signa
292. ollers 01V Owner s Manual Getting Started 9 Getting Started In this chapter Systema aie cake pa motor un 10 Important Wordclock Information 0 0c cece eee 11 Connecting the Power Cord x KR ODER 11 T rf ng On the usaron ore rci cad tac 11 Turine OTE aate bd uad X Mop tat ic ope a cac 11 01V Owner s Manual 10 Chapter 2 Getting Started 01V System Example This example shows the kind of system possible with the 01V Personal computer running MIDI software PHONES MONITOR OUT o YAMAHA Digital out DAT recorder Digital in 00 00 00 00 DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL interface Digital out Guitar processor ge 0000 Hal Bass processor FOL 0000 RH MIDI keyboard MIDI IN MIDI OUT 01V Owner s Manual Important Wordclock Information 11 Important Wordclock Information Unlike analog audio equipment digital audio equipment must be word
293. only to Effect 2 LOW BATTERY The internal battery voltage is getting very low Back up the Setup data Bulk Dump on page 232 and ask your dealer to replace the battery Memory Protected Cannot execute as selected scene memory is protected MIDI IN Framing Error An incorrect signal may have been input to the MIDI IN MIDI IN Data Overrun An incorrect signal may have been input to the MIDI IN MIDI Rx Buffer Full The 01V is probably receiving too much MIDI data MIDI Tx Buffer Full The 01V is probably transmitting too much MIDI data NO DATA Cannot execute as no data has been stored Now Fading Fade Time OPTION IN Sync Error Local Control cannot be turned off while a mix scene fade is in progress Fade Time This warning message appears if the Option input dig ital signal is not wordclock synchronized with the 01V Make sure that all digital equipment is wordclock synchro nized to a common wordclock source See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information This warn ing message can be disabled by turning off the DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION option in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 Read Only Cannot execute as selected scene memory is read only Selected channel CHxx CHxx is the selected channel Preparing to LOCAL OFF The MIDI Local Control function is preparing for use TO HOST Framing Error
294. ontrol Change Assign Table amp Request P rx tx Program Change Assign Table amp Request Q TX tx Equalizer Library amp Request D rx tx Dynamics Library amp Request E rx tx Effect Library amp Request 01V Owner s Manual 286 MIDI Data Format SCENE MEMORY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00010000 10 2048 2038 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 00001010 00 01001100 4c T 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 d 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 13 00110100 34 4 DATA NAME 01001101 4D M Ommmmmmm mm m 0 99 127 Scene Memory No 0 99 edit buffer Receive is effective No 1 99 127 DATA Oddddddd ds Scene Memory 10 1014 2 bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The ten bytes at the beginning are the ID title and are 7 bit data The subsequent 1014 bytes are all split into 4 bit data SCENE MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c L 01001101 4D M 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 0
295. opy and Swap can be used with input channels 1 through 16 1 Use the VIEW button to locate the VIEW page shown below DELAY HALL CHORUS DYNAMICS cee 2 Use the cursor buttons and PARAMETER wheel to select the SOURCE and DESTINATION channels 3 Use the cursor buttons and ENTER button to select a CATEGORY input channel settings EQ EQ settings DELAY Delay settings DYNAMICS Dynamics settings FADER Fader settings 4 Use the cursor buttons to select COPY or SWAP and the ENTER button to execute the function 01V Owner s Manual 60 Chapter 5 Input Channels Input Channel Block Diagram BUS AUX EFF ST 1 6 to lt lt 48V Meter 1234 1234 12 LR 7 12 PHANTOM Meter INPUT CH Fader PAN BAL Dynamics Delay 1 12 9 d AUX EFF PRE POST OUTPUT SELECT PRE POST to OUTPUT TTE SELECT DIGITAL CE vo 12 Lee P ON OFF to MONI to MONI Meter 4 Band AD fg PEQ Same as INPUT 13 i V _______ 15 INPUT 1516 CH Fader PAN De emphasis or DC Cut This section is available only when optional Option card is installed AUX EFF 1 PRE POST PAN INDIVIDUAL GANG INV GANG 01V Owner s Manual 61 In this chapter
296. or An EFFECT page similar to the one shown below appears and effects returns rotary controls now function as effects returns effects send controls EFFECTIEDITY TITLE Reverb Hall TYPE REUERBE HALL J REV TIME INI DLY 14 3 _ HALL CHORUS D A Turn up the effects return RETURN level control i e effects send level control This sends the effects return signal to the selected effects processor The effects return meters display the level of the effects return signal Returning Processed Signals The final stage to applying effects is to return the processed signal back into the mix Press the HOME button Faders now function as regular channels faders Turn up the effects return control corresponding to the effect that you are using Return 1 for Effect 1 Return 2 for Effect 2 The processed signal is returned into the mix Set the EQ pan and so on for the effects return channel Effects programs can be recalled from the effects library See Recalling Effects grams on page 134 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends 125 Pre fader Post fader Effects Sends Effects sends on input channels 1 through 24 and effects returns 1 and 2 can be config ured as either pre fader or post fader sends Pre fader means that signals are sourced before and are not affected by
297. ories Memory locations used to store mix scenes See also Mix scene Shelving A type of EQ circuit used to cut and boost frequencies above or below set frequency It produces a shelf looking response curve High and low EQs are usually of the shelving type Contrast with Peaking Signal to noise ratio S N In an audio system the difference between the oper ating signal level and the residual noise floor expressed as a decibel ratio commonly used to measure a system s noise performance Snapshot See Mix scene ST OUT The 01V stereo output System Exclusive A type of MIDI message for exclusive use with a particular device See also Bulk Dump THD Total Harmonic Distortion The measure of distortion introduced by an audio system relative to the audio signal expressed as a percentage Compared to third harmonic distortion which is the measure of a single harmonic total harmonic distortion is the sum of distortions produced at all harmonics Unity gain A gain of one Wordclock A clock signal used to synchronize the data processing circuits of all devices connected in a digital audio system The wordclock frequency is the same as the sampling rate 01V Owner s Manual Index 297 Index Symbols 48 V phantom powering 41 Numerics 01V benefits 4 cascading 214 dimensions 271 features 3 initializing 204 level diagram 257 preferences 203 rack mounting 259 sonic performance 5 03D parameter t
298. ory is recalled If two or more program numbers have been assigned to the memory number which was recalled the lowest numbered program number will be transmitted This message is echoed if Program Change ECHO is ON If a memory number which is not specified in the Midi Program Change Assign Table is recalled the Parameter Change Function Call described below will be transmitted STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change DATA Onnnnnnn nn Program No 0 127 1 2 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE FO F7 1 2 1 MOTION CONTROL STATE MCS MMC STOP PLAY FORWARD REWIND RECORD PAUSE Transmission In the REMOTE MMC page this is transmitted by key operations The DEVICE specifies the transmission destination STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Command mcc sub id cc Command String 1 Stop 2 Play 4 Fast Forward 5 Rewind 6 Record Strobe 9 Pause EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive 1 2 2 MOTION CONTROL PROCESS MCP MMC LOCATE target Transmission In the REMOTE MMC page this is transmitted by key operations The DEVICE specifies the transmission destination The ID of the receiving device must be set STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive Device ID Oddddddd dd Destination 00 7E 7F all call
299. ositions effects dynamics and so on There are 100 scene memories and 1 through 99 can be titled for easy identification The Recall Undo function can be used to undo accidental scene memory recalls or for quick A B mix comparisons Crossfades from 0 to 25 seconds can be set up using the Fade Time function Individual channels can be set as safe channels so their settings remain unchanged when a mix scene is recalled Scene memories can be stored and recalled in two ways Manually on MEMORY page 1 Remotely using MIDI Program Change messages from a computer or MIDI sequencer Scene memory data can be backed up to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information scene memory to Program Change assignment table is provided on page 273 Mix scenes are stored and recalled on MEMORY page 1 as shown below Use the MEMORY button to locate it MEMORY J TITLE EDIT n AH HALL CHORUS 5 The area to the left of the page contains the TITLE EDIT RECALL and STORE switches Next to these is the scene memory list which can be scrolled using the PARAMETER wheel If the INC DEC MEMORY RECALL option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the 1 DEC and 1 INC but tons can also be used to select and recall scene memories Scene memory 00 contains the initial se
300. oth To operate a switch use the cursor buttons to select it and the ENTER button or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to turn it on or off Rotary Controls Some parameters appear as rotary controls as this example from 1 the PANPOT page shows To adjust a rotary control use the cursor buttons to select it and use the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC CENTER and 1 INC buttons to adjust it Parameter Boxes Some parameters appear in parameter boxes REM HI BRTIO i e dotted line boxes as this example from 5 weal the EFFECT1 EDIT page shows To adjust a L 4 parameter box parameter use the cursor FYB BLY tons to select it and the PARAMETER wheelor 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set it Parameter boxes that require you to confirm new settings flash until you press the ENTER button Faders Pages such as VIEW and BUS MASTER display faders graphi cally To adjust a fader use the cursor buttons to select it and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set it Fader knobs appear highlighted when set to the nominal posi ipo 00 Nominal 01V Owner s Manual Cursor Buttons 31 Cursor Buttons The cursor buttons are used to move the cursor CURSOR around the display pages selecting parameters and options The cursor appears as a flashing box making 4 it easy to see which parameter or option is currently selected Holding
301. ough CH24 Input channels 1 through 24 ST Stereo output 1 RTN2 Fffects returns 1 and 2 AUXI through AUX4 Aux sends 1 through 4 EFF1 EFF2 Effects sends 1 and 2 The bus outs can be turned on or off on PAN ROUT page 4 ON button Fader Mode 1 8 9 12 13 14 STEREO RETURN 1 2 17 24 15 16 MASTER STEREO OUT HOME On Off AUX 1 AUX 1 master On Off AUX 2 AUX 2 master On Off AUX 3 AUX 3 On Off master On Off RETURN 1 2 AUX 4 On Off AUX 4 master On Off EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1 master On Off EFFECT 2 EFFECT 2 master On Off CH 17 24 STEREO OUT OPTION I O On Off On Off REMOTE 1 Assigned internal parameters REMOTE 2 MMC 1 6 REMOTE 3 User defined MIDI controllers On buttons 1 through 16 and master can be assigned to various internal parameters on REMOTE page 1 or used as MIDI controllers on REMOTE page 3 See Assigning Fad ers amp On Buttons on page 194 and User Defined MIDI Controllers on page 238 for more information Input Channel ON button Examples To turn on or off input channel 3 press the HOME button and then press ON but ton 3 If a fader mode other than Option I O or Remote is selected it s not necessary to press the HOME button To turn on or off input channels 13 14 press the HOME button and then press ON button 13 14 If a fader mode other than Option I O or Remote is sel
302. out the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 REV gt PAN Reverb and auto pan effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth DIR 2 Panning direction WAVE Sine Tri Square Modulation waveform Reverb and panned reverb balance 0 panned n 0 REV BAL 0 100 reverb 100 reverb HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF a Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FPR TE Rb 442 h d 4 4 2 L lt gt R L gt R L lt R Turn L R 3 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 152 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 12 Effects DELAY ER Delay and early reflections effects in parallel Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0 0 1000 0 ms Left channel delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left 1 NOTER channel DELAY L Feedback
303. outs See Omni Outs on page 115 for more information Note that OMNI OUTS are not affected by the D switches on the PAN ROUT page 2 Input Channels amp the Option I O Outs Input channels 1 through 16 can be selected as sources for the Option I O outs See Routing Input Channels on page 49 and About Option I O Cards on page 216 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 51 Swapping Inputs 1 8 amp 17 24 The inputs to channels 1 through 8 can be swapped with those of input channels 17 through 24 either individually or altogether This allows signals from the Option I O digital inputs to make use of the 4 band EQ dynamics processors and other functions of full feature input channels 1 through 8 1 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 5 as shown below INPUT SWAP J 17 18 19 28 WOPTIWgp GLOBAL SBE 1 ser 21 22 23 24 OH FADER CEHTER 2 Usethecursor buttons to select the GLOBAL or individual SWAP switches and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Swap switches appear highlighted when channels are swapped When channels are swapped their meter numbers appear highlighted on HOME page 1 and OPTION page 1 as shown below When a swapped channel is selected the selected channel area of the display alternately shows the channel number and SWAP also shown below E INPUT METER
304. p style Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level Use it on the stereo output during mix down It can also be used with the stereo input A variation on program 39 with greater compression 01V Owner s Manual Scene Memories 183 Scene Memories In this chapter About Scene Memories Waco 184 What s Stored in Scene Memories 184 About the Edit Butter amp Indicator 185 Scene Memory OO eed bt d Rame eame dA 185 Scene Memory Display Area cba got do t bat 185 Stotine Mix Scenes aad hoe Ee d ee ee 186 Recalling NIDCSCEBES euo e Ee e A RU RR A EUR e 187 Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages 188 Undoing Mix Scene Recalls 189 Protecting Scene Memories 189 Editing Scene Memory Titles 190 Renumbering Scene Memories s uad nex e Saas 190 Setting Fade Time enaner aiana 191 Recalling Scene Data Safely 2 Les sanus y Uto qf 192 01V Owner s Manual 184 Chapter 14 Scene Memories About Scene Memories Scene memories are memory locations that are used to store mix scenes A mix scene consists of all 01V mix settings 1 EQ fader p
305. pansion ratio of 2 1 and a hard knee setting The one on the right shows an expander with an expansion ratio of 2 1 and a soft knee setting of 5 10 Expansion ratio 2 1 10 Expansion ratio 2 1 0 0 5 A gp y 3 20 7 Threshold 1098 Ta Threshold 20dB 3 pute tage Benge eem te 5 ee ceca qme eed 5 50 ee set seni d 60 60 n noc m _ uM vanno e 3p dr edm ESPERE CUERO 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 410 420 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 410 420 Input Level dB Input Level dB Parameter Range THRESHOLD 54 dB to 0 dB 55 steps OUT GAIN 0 0 dB to 18 0 dB 0 5 dB steps KNEE hard 1 2 3 4 5 ATTACK 0 120 ms 1 ms steps 5 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz RELEASE 6 ms 46 s fs 44 1 kHz 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 1 2 5 1 3 1 3 5 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 8 1 RATIO 10 1 20 1 1 16 steps THRESHOLD This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander Signals above the threshold pass through the expander unaffected Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter Processor Types 171 OUT GAIN This sets the expander s output signal level and can be used to compen sate for the overal
306. play pages with up to five related pages being grouped together For example the MIDI Setup and Program Change pages are grouped together under MIDI Parameter selection and editing is car ried out using the CURSOR ENTER 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons and PARAMETER wheel which is detented for precise and accurate editing Display The 320 x 80 dot LCD display provides clear indication of mix settings and operating status As well as showing parameter values numerically faders and rotary controls are represented graphically so you can actually see pan and fader positions The display also shows EQ curves and signal level meters The various sections of the display are explained below Page area Function InitData EDIT Effects HRLL CHORUS Returns GO GO Memory Selected chann Function This area of the display shows the of the function selected using the Function and Fader mode buttons Functions are FQ divided into pages which are identified by numbered tabs as shown here In this example page 1 of the VIEW function is selected The fol lowing functions can be selected Function Buttons Fader Mode Buttons UTILITY EFFECT 1 MIDI EFFECT 2 SETUP OPTION I O VIEW REMOTE DYNAMICS AUX 1 EQ ATT AUX 2 DELAY AUX 3 PAN ROUTING AUX 4 MEMORY HOME 01V Owner s Manual Display 29 Memory This area of the display shows the number an
307. played In other cases it will be ignored Transmission When transmission is enabled by a request this will be transmitted every 30msec on the Rx CH channel for five seconds Transmission will be disabled when the power is turned on and when PORT settings have been modified STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n n 0 15 Tx Rx Channel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000101 05 remote meter DATA Osgttttt tt meter no s special bit g gr bit Ommmmmmm mmO Ommmmmmm mm1 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive In the Meter no bit 6 is the special bit and bit 5 is the gr bit When the Gr bit is on the single byte gr will be added uniformly to the end of the data string When the Special bit is on the two bytes stLED L R will be added uni formly to the end of the data string When both are on gr comes first and stLED L R come later PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST type 0x05 remote meter This message is used to obtain meter data from the 01V It is used in LOCAL OFF MODE to display the meter of the remote device or to display the meter on the screen of a personal computer etc In order to obtain meter data the meter whose data is required must be displayed in the LCD of the remote device This means that before transmitting this request you must first transmit the above described 4 6 4 11 PARAM
308. put channels 70 dB CH 1 12 Crosstalk at 1 kHz Adjacent input channels 60 dB CH 13 16 Input to output 70 dB 01V Owner s Manual 262 Appendix B Specifications Analog controls PAD 0 26 dB INPUT 1 12 GAIN 16 to 60 PHANTOM 48 V switched CH 1 6 7 12 INPUT 13 14 GAIN 10 to 20 GAIN 10 to 20 INPUT 15 16 INPUT SELECT 15 16 2TR IN MONITOR SELECT 2TR IN MONITOR OUTPUT MONITOR LEVEL CONTROL PHONES LEVEL CONTROL Digital controls ON amp SEL buttons CH 1 12 CH 13 14 CH 15 16 STEREO MASTER AUX 1 4 EFFECT 1 2 RETURN 1 2 Faders CH 1 12 CH 13 14 CH 15 16 STEREO MASTER AUX 1 4 EFFECT 1 2 Encoders RETURN 1 2 SOLO buttons CH 1 12 CH 13 14 CH 15 16 RETURN 1 2 FADER MODE buttons SELECTED CHANNEL EQ buttons Encoders HOME EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 OPTION I O REMOTE AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 HIGH HI MID LO MID LOW PAN F EQ G EQ Input control buttons EQ ATT DELAY DYNAMICS PAN ROUTING VIEW Setup buttons UTILITY MIDI SETUP MEMORY Data entry Encoder Buttons PARAMETER 24 detents 1 INC 1 DEC ENTER CURSOR buttons LEFT RIGHT UP DOWN Display LCD LED 320 x 80 dot Graphic LCD w backlight and contrast control ST OUT meters 12 elements x 2 SOLO mode indicator Power requirements U S A amp Canada 120 V AC 60 Hz Europe 230 V AC
309. py the settings of input channel 1 to input channel 2 CH 2 1 Copy the settings of input channel 2 to input channel 1 RESET BOTH Reset both input channels to their initial settings Use the cursor buttons to select a pairing mode and then press the ENTER button The highlighted switch and STEREO label show that the input 1H 2 5 49 4 channels are now configured as a stereo pair STEREO Pairing Input Channels 53 Releasing Input Channel Pairs Press the SEL button of both input channels simultaneously OR On SETUP page 4 use the cursor buttons to select the paired channel switch and then press the ENTER button The following dialog box appears Will Release CH1 2 Pair ARE YOU SURE Select OK and then press the ENTER button The stereo pair is broken and both input channels operate independently 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Input Channels 54 Input Channel Pair Block Diagram ANI ONVS IVWNGIAIGNI 1 Asda xXnv 4 sjauueyo Z LAdNI HO 01V Owner s Manual Grouping Faders 55 Grouping Faders Input channel faders 1 through 16 can be grouped together in fader groups for multi channel control using a single fader Three groups are available A B and C Making Fader Groups 1 Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 3 as shown below GROUP 123
310. r s Manual 264 Appendix B Specifications Option I O Inputs 17 24 need optional card De emphasis Automatic de emphasis filter 15 us 50 us Input swap Normal CH 17 24 Swap CH 1 8 Attenuator 0 to 96 dB 1 dB steps EQ 2 band PEQ Low High ON OFF Fader 60 mm motorized AUX EFFECT send AUX 1 AUX 2 EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 pre post fader Solo ON OFF AFL PFL Pan 33 positions L1 16 CENTER R1 16 Routing STEREO BUS 1 4 Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold ON OFF Digital Stereo In De emphasis Automatic de emphasis filter 15 us 50 us Input select Cascade in Normal CH 13 14 Flip DIGITAL STEREO IN ON OFF to STEREO BUS Return 1 2 Internal Effect 1 2 EQ ON OFF 4 band PEQ Level control Rotary encoder INPUT AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 EFFECT 1 2 AUX EFFECT send AUX 1 4 EFFECT 1 2 pre post Solo ON OFF AFL PFL ah 33 positions 11 16 CENTER R1 16 Routing STEREO BUS 1 4 Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold ON OFF 01V Owner s Manual 1 4 1 4 265 Master level ON OFF Monitor ON OFF AFL PFL BUS to STEREO ON OFF PAN to STEREO 33 positions 11 16 CENTER R1 16 Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold ON OFF Aux 1 4 EQ 4 band PEQ Low Lo Mid Hi Mid High Dyna
311. r NO ASSIGN 15 16 ON button NO ASSIGN Fader NO ASSIGN m ON button ON MASTER ST OUT Fader FADER MASTER ST OUT 01V Owner s Manual 198 01V Owner s Manual Chapter 15 Other Functions Initial Assignments for Bank 2 These are the initial fader and ON button assignments for Bank 2 Channel Control Parameter ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH1 Fader DELAY TIME CH1 5 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH2 Fader DELAY TIME CH2 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH3 Fader DELAY TIME CH3 ON button DELAY CHANNEL DELAY TIME CH4 ON button DELAY CHANNEL 5 DELAY TIME CH5 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH6 Fader DELAY TIME CH6 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH7 Fader DELAY TIME CH7 s ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH8 Fader DELAY TIME CH8 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH9 Fader DELAY TIME CH9 30 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH10 Fader DELAY TIME CH10 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH11 Fader DELAY TIME 11 5 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH12 Fader DELAY TIME CH12 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH13 14 Fader DELAY TIME CH13 14 ON button DELAY CHANNEL CH15 16 Fader DELAY TIME CH15 16 MAS ON button NO ASSIGN Fader NO ASSIGN Assigning Faders amp On Buttons Initial Assignments for Bank 3 These are the initial fader and ON button assignments for Ban
312. r and can be selected by repeatedly pressing a button The name of the selected function and its page number appear in the top left corner of the display Button Pages UTILITY Oscillator Preferences 1 Preferences 2 MIDI MIDI Setup Program Change Control Change Bulk Local Control SETUP Word Clock Select Monitor Solo Setup Group Pair Dither VIEW Channel View Fader View CH Copy DYNAMICS Dynamics Edit Dynamics Library EQ ATT EQ Edit EQ Library DELAY Phase Input Delay 1 8 Input Delay 9 16 Output Delay PAN ROUTING Panpot Routing Bus Master Omni Out Select MEMORY Memory Fade Time Memory Sort Recall Safe Fader Mode Buttons FADER MODE EFFECT1 EFFECT2 OPTIONI O REMOTE c mil AUX 1 AUX2 AUX 3 AUX 4 HOME Fader mode buttons are used to select the following fader modes and display pages Pressing buttons repeatedly selects the various pages that are available for a mode The name of the selected function and its page number appear in the top left corner of the display Button Pages EFFECT 1 Effect1 Edit Effect Library Effect Pre Post EFFECT 2 Effect2 Edit Effect2 Library Effect2 Pre Post OPTION 1 0 eam hee Control Option Out Meter Option Out REMOTE Internal Parameter MMC Control User Define AUX 1 Pre Post Aux 1 2 Pan AUX 2 Pre Post Aux 1 2 Pan AUX 3 Pre Post
313. r change setup 225 parameter control 229 ports 222 program change page 227 program change setup 225 receive channel 225 receive indicators 224 scene recall 227 setup 224 setup page 224 summary 7 system exclusive parameter control 231 transmit channel 225 01V Owner s Manual Index 301 user define page 238 user defined controllers 238 using ports 223 MIDI data format 280 MIDI Device Number definition 294 MIDI page 1 224 MIDI page 2 227 MIDI page 3 229 MIDI page 4 232 MIDI page 5 234 Mix parameter input delay 45 Mix scenes definition 294 Mix scenes See Scene memories Mixdown solo mode 80 MMC 236 definition 294 MMC control page 236 MOD DELAY 140 MOD FILTER 146 Modulation definition 294 MONI TRIM 78 MONITOR OUT about 22 using 77 MONITOR OUT LEVEL control about 15 using 77 Monitor setup page 78 MONITOR 2TR IN switch about 15 using 77 Monitoring about 76 AFL PFL 78 aux sends 94 block diagram 79 bus outs 108 D A converters 77 effects returns 131 input channels 50 MONITOR OUT 22 MONITOR 2TR IN switch 77 mono stereo 78 setup 78 specifications 266 stereo output 88 using 78 MONO DELAY 139 Motorized faders 5 MSB definition 295 MULTI FILTER 156 Muting aux sends 100 bus outs 109 effects returns 130 effects send masters 129 grouping channels 56 input channels 46 stereo output 90 MY4 AD 4 Analog Input 216 MY4 DA Analog Output 216 MY8 AD 8 Analog Input 216 MY8 AE AES EBU 216
314. r easy iden tification The unique collection of preset EQ programs are designed for specific applications and instruments and provide a good reference and starting point when making EQ adjustments The EQ library cannot be used with the 2 band EQs on input channels 17 through 24 See EQ Library on page 67 for more information The EQs on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are permanently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52 their EQs are linked The EQ parameters and response curve for input channels 1 through 16 the effects returns aux sends and stereo out appear on the EQ page shown below The EQ parameters and response curve for input channels 17 through 24 appear on the OPTION page shown below LECHI CONTROL J ROUTE FADER AUN EFFECT WIE PA 2i SER Er 4 bas HALL CHORUS i eco i co oo i co EE Q E E72 esteem tee The quickest way to adjust the EQ is by using the SELECTED CHANNEL controls shown below SELECTED CHANNEL 01V Owner s Manual Adjusting the EQ 63 Adjusting the EQ EQ can be adjusted using the SELECTED CHANNEL controls the quickest method or the EQ pages in conjunction with the cursor buttons DEC and INC buttons and PARAMETER wheel eno HI MID F For quic
315. r respective holders and are hereby acknowledged Package Contents The 01V package should contain the following items Make sure that you have them all 01V Digital Mixing Console Owner s Manual Contact your Yamaha dealer if anything is missing Keep this manual for future reference 01V Owner s Manual Contents iii Contents Welcome to the OIV 1 WeleaiiedO the Ul Vt 225 ata tes irae t pius eve d darts 2 About this Owner s Manual 2 OIV Installation VE place ewer Peel ma 2 au E REIN OR qd 3 Key Feature Discussion 5 4 Getting Started ese TRE ore Y aces xoa S 9 01V System Example cca a pop cba Dae reci i 10 Important Wordclock Information 11 Connecting the Power Cord 22 rau dasa hae C RERO CR 11 Turning the Qly s a wre ae a e EM 11 Turnin OI tie DV second ask xot Red due DR Eo e eH oie mdr 11 Touring the OTV is users voce hs eee eos 13 acai eR Ae Cate RR 14 Inputs dete Saeed vt 20 Block anny pak Cd RIO CRUS BON Eee ROCK ECC 24 Getting Around the User Interface 27 About the User Interfaces 404 dog ouo o ERN ELA EX Q
316. rnal parameters 194 MIDI bulk dump 232 user define 238 Benefits of a Digital Mixer 4 Block diagrams aux sends 104 aux stereo pair 105 bus outs 112 bus outs stereo pair 113 complete 24 effects 159 input channels 60 monitoring 79 omni outs 118 option I O 220 paired input channels 54 solo 82 stereo output 92 Books 291 Boosting the EQ 63 Bulk dump definition 293 interval time 232 setup 226 using 232 233 burst pink noise 202 Bus master page 109 110 Bus outs about 108 block diagram 112 bus to stereo 110 level setting 109 metering 83 monitoring 108 muting 109 omni outs 108 option I O 108 pairing 111 specifications 265 stereo pair block diagram 113 Bus definition 293 Bypassing the EQ 66 C Calibrating the faders 204 Cans See PHONES Cascade delay 215 Cascade definition 293 01V Owner s Manual 298 Index Cascading the 01V 214 CH copy page 59 CH definition 293 CH13 14 flip page 213 CHORUS 142 Clipping definition 293 Coaxial definition 293 Coaxial digital input See Digital stereo input Coaxial digital output See Digital stereo output Comp 167 Compander 171 Configuration summary 4 Connectors 2TRIN 21 2TR OUT 21 DIGITAL STEREO IN 23 DIGITAL STEREO OUT 23 INPUT BAL 1 12 20 INPUT BAL 13 16 20 MIDI 23 MONITOR OUT 22 OMNI OUT 22 PHONES 21 STEREO OUT 23 TO HOST 23 Consumer format definition 293 Contrast control 16 Control change 01V parameter assignment table 274 03D parameter as
317. rol to pan the selected channel If the PANPOT AUTO SCREEN option is turned on in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the OPTION page shown below appears This page can also 01V Owner s Manual 48 Chapter 5 Input Channels be located using the OPTION I O button Foe M 9 FADER PS EFFECT i Ea n bas E am cm 125 HALL CHORUS p i wee em 3 gres jQ 3 6 006 0 006 ue center ED EQ oc SEFE SHELF CHI Panpots can also be adjusted on this page by using the cursor buttons to select the PAN control and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set it Including center there are 33 pan positions Hard left Center Hard right 116 13 12 11 1 gt R2 R35 R16 Input channels 1 through 12 and 17 through 24 feature single panpot as center shown here 15 16 Input channels 13 14 and 15 16 and the effects returns feature dual pots with the inner panpots being odd numbered channel pans 13 and 15 effects returns left and the outer panpots being even numbered channel pans 14 and 16 effects returns right When working with stereo signals these dual panpots can be used to adjust the width of stereo signals as shown below LIG RIG 15 16 With the inner control set at 116 and the outer control set at R16 as shown here the width
318. rs To adjust the level of an input channel from 1 through 16 press the HOME button and then operate a fader from 1 through 16 To adjust the level of an input channel from 17 through 24 press the OPTION I O button and then operate a fader from 17 through 24 Faders operation depends on the selected Fader mode See Faders plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information The selected fader mode is shown on the display See Display on page 28 for more infor mation The faders on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are permanently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Chan nels on page 52 their faders are linked Faders can be grouped together for multi channel control using a single fader See Grouping Faders on page 55 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Panning Input Channels 47 Panning Input Channels The Panpots available on input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns are used to pan signals between the left and right channels of the stereo out and the odd and even bus outs Panpots can be adjusted using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN control the quickest method or the panpot pages in conjunction with the cursor but tons 2 DEC and INC buttons and PARAMETER wheel EQ HIGH For quick panning select _ PAN control Q LO MID LJ
319. rs on the display indicating that the stereo output is selected 2 Use the VIEW button to locate VIEW pages 1 and 2 as shown below 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them Parameters are explained in the following sections 01V Owner s Manual 90 Chapter 8 Stereo Output Setting the Stereo Output Level The stereo output level is controlled using the STEREO fader Since this fader is also used to control the aux and effects send master levels you may need to press the HOME button before adjusting the stereo output level See Faders plus Return Rotary Controls on page 35 for more information STEREO MASTER Muting the Stereo Output ON The stereo output can be muted using the STEREO ON button This but ton lights up when stereo output is on Since this button is also used to mute the aux and effects send master outputs you may need to press the HOME button before turning the stereo output on or off See ON But tons on page 34 for more information Balancing the Stereo Output The left and right channels of the stereo output signal can be balanced as follows 1 Press the HOME button and then the STEREO SEL button ST appears on the display indicating that the stereo output is selected 2 Use the PAN control to adjust the balance The balance can also be adjusted on the V
320. s The dynamics library is controlled from the library page shown below Use the DYNAMICS button to locate it DYNAMICS LIBRARY J DYNAMICS InitData 4 TITLE TYPE 82 8 GATE HALL CHORUS BA Comp E4 comp The top half of the library page contains the STORE RECALL and TITLE EDIT switches Below these is the library window which can be scrolled using the PARAME TER wheel The R icon next to a preset program means read only As each program is selected its dynamics curve is displayed The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied to the selected channel Next to this are level meters for the selected channel and its neighbor 01V Owner s Manual 174 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors Storing Dynamics Programs Custom dynamics settings can be stored in user programs 41 through 80 Select the channel whose dynamics processor settings you want to store as a program Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select the input channels 1 through 16 To select an aux send use the AUX buttons to select an aux send and then press the MASTER SEL button To select the stereo output press the HOME button and then the MASTER SEL button Use the DYNAMICS button to locate the Library page as shown below DYNAMICS LIBRARY J No TITLE TYPE DYNAMICS InitQata P
321. s sends 1 and 2 Simplified input channels 17 through 24 feature an attenuator two band parametric EQ and can be assigned to aux sends 1 and 2 and effects sends 1 and 2 Input channels 1 through 8 and 17 through 24 can be swapped so that Option I O dig ital input signals appear on full feature channels 1 through 8 Input delays can be used for microphone placement compensation while output delays can be used for delay compensation in multi speaker systems The number of input channels can be increased by digitally cascading two 01Vs together Option I O digital outputs can be configured as bus outs aux sends input channel direct outs or stereo outs So although the 01V is a four bus mixer assigning the four buses and four aux sends or the channel direct outs to the Option I O eight outputs allows eight track simultaneous recording Benefits of a Digital Mixer You re probably already familiar with the many benefits offered by digital audio but what exactly are the benefits for digital audio mixing Well an audio mixer has the job of combining audio signals from various sources at differing levels and impedances usually into a stereo mix And it must do this without introducing any new distortions and noise Analog mixers do a pretty good job but even with the best designs non lin ear effects caused by circuit components are unavoidable In the digital realm audio mixing consists of adding and multiplying binary numbers that represent
322. s marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE MUSIC U K LTD NEDERLAND Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back up Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18 G 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel 030 2828425 Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever hem in als KCA ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig handtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anvand samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin Havita kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti THE NETHERLANDS This apparatus contains a lithium batt
323. s split into 7 bit REMOTE User Define MEMORY BULK DUMP REQUEST FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n 0 15 Device Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump 01001100 4c LU 01001101 4D 00100000 20 x 00100000 20 i 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 00110100 34 4 01010101 55 U Obbbbbbb bb bb 0 3 bank no 1 4 EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive EQUALIZER LIBRARY BULK DUMP FORMAT STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0000nnnn On 0 15 Channel No 1 16 FORMAT No 01111110 7E Universal Bulk Dump BYTE COUNT HIGH 00000000 00 46 36 10 bytes BYTE COUNT LOW 00101110 2E 01001100 4 TL 01001101 4D MU 00100000 20 Nj 00100000 20 M 00111000 38 8 01000010 42 00110011 33 3 00110100 34 4 01010001 51 Q Ommmmmmm mm m 0 79 Equalizer Library No 1 80 96 124 ch1 12 13 14 15 16 RTN1 2 AUX 1 4 ST MAS ch17 24 Receive is effective No 40 79 96 125 DATA Oddddddd ds Equalizer Library Mem ory 12 12 2 bytes Oddddddd de CHECK SUM ee ee INVERT L M ds de 1 AND 7Fh EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The twelve bytes at the beginning are the title and are 7 bit data The following twelve bytes are all split into 4 bit data EQUALIZER LIBRARY BULK
324. s the amount of compression that is the change in output sig nal level relative to change in input signal level For a 2 1 ratio for example a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 5 dB change in output level For a 5 1 ratio a 10 dB change in input level above the threshold results in a 2 dB change in output level GATE gate or noise gate is essentially an audio A switch used to mute signals below a set 20 threshold level It can be used to cut back ground noise picked by open micro o PARAE phones noise and hiss from guitar valve 10 _ amps and effects pedals and leakage between drum microphones It also has many creative uses too For example gating a drum sound with a short decay time tightens up the s0 sound Also patching a gate into a droning bass synth channel and then triggering it from the kick drum channel allows the bass Range 30dB Output Level dB Range 70dB 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 synth through only when the kick drum is Input Level dB struck adding extra oomph on the beat Parameter Range THRESHOLD 54 dB to 0 dB 55 steps RANGE 70 dB to dB 71 steps 0 02 ms 1 96 s fs 48 kHz HOLD 0 02 ms 2 13 s fs 44 1 kHz ATTACK 0 120 ms 1 ms steps 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz DECAY 6 ms 46 s fs 44 1 kHz 01V Owner s Manual Processor
325. s to select the TITLE EDIT switch and then press the ENTER button The Title Edit dialog box appears 4 Edit the scene memory title See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information 5 Select OK and then press the ENTER button The scene memory is stored with its new title Renumbering Scene Memories Scene memories can be renumbered by using the Sort function 1 Usethe MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 3 as shown below MEMORY SORT J DESTINATION ON 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the list on the left and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select a scene memory 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the list on the right and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select the insertion point 4 Usethe cursor buttons to select the SORT switch and then press the ENTER button The selected scene memory is renumbered 01V Owner s Manual Setting a Fade Time 191 Setting a Fade Time Using the Fade Time function crossfades fade outs and fade ins from 0 to 25 seconds can be performed automatically by recalling mix scenes Fade Time settings must be stored with a mix scene before they have any effect Faders for input channels 1 through 16 the effects returns aux send masters bus out masters and the stereo output can be enabled for fading individually 1 Use the MEMORY button to locate MEMORY page 2 as shown below
326. scenes and library programs from being stored accidentally RECALL CONFIRMATION When this option is turned on a confirmation dialog box appears whenever a mix scene or library program is recalled useful for preventing mix scenes and library programs from being recalled accidentally DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION When this option is turned on a warning message appears if digital signals from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In or Option I O inputs are not wordclock synchronized with the 01V See Setting the Wordclock on page 209 for more information SELECTED CH MESSAGE When this option is turned on a message indicating the selected channel appears when the Fader mode is switched to and from Option I O DELAY UNITS Delay values for the input channel delay stereo output delay and omni out delay can be specified in milliseconds meters or samples See Delaying Channel Signals on page 45 Stereo Output Delay on page 91 and Omni Out Delay on page 117 INC DEC SCENE RECALL When this option is turned on the 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons can be used to select and recall scene memories while MEMORY page 1 is displayed As the 1 DEC or 1 INC button is pressed subsequent scene memories that contain a mix scene are selected and recalled See Recalling Mix Scenes on page 187 for more information 01V Owner s Manual 204 Chapter 15 Other Functions LIBRARY LIST ORDER When this option is set to UP EQ effec
327. se the REMOTE button to locate REMOTE page 3 as shown below USER FINE DEDE INITIALIZE While this page is displayed the SOLO and ON buttons and faders on channels 1 through 16 and Master transmit the assigned MIDI data when operated Other controls are disabled Use the SEL buttons to select channels 1 through 16 or Master and the cursor buttons and ENTER button to select the SOLO ON and FADER switches Controls can also be selected simply by operating them For example operating chan nel fader 5 automatically selects it The switch of the selected control appears high lighted The Master channel does not feature a SOLO button Use the cursor buttons to select the DATA parameters and the PARAM ETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them The following hexadecimal DATA values can be set Hex 00 SW SOLO and ON buttons 7F for 00 for OFF FAD Faders 00 7F END Completes the command Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK switches and then press the ENTER button to activate the selected bank The switch of the active bank appears highlighted In UNLATCH mode the SOLO and ON buttons function as momentary switches and the specified data is transmitted when they re pressed and then released SW is transmitted as 7F when buttons are pressed and 00 when they re released In LATCH mode the SOLO and ON buttons function as latching switches i e they r
328. se the VIEW button to locate VIEW page 1 or 2 VIEW pages for input channels 1 through 12 appear as below amour AAC HALL chorus MUTE 09 we FADER Tdi co o 00 o0 co co EFFECT NUR GROUP MUTE HALL cmoRus MUTE 5 2 Use SEL buttons 1 through 16 to select channels 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them 01V Owner s Manual 58 Chapter 5 Input Channels 1 2 3 01V Owner s Manual Input Channels 17 24 Use the OPTION I O button to locate OPTION page 2 as shown below LECHI CONTROL J ENDER BUS i zx i Ea 821111 HALL CHORUS o i o o i 8dB 0 096 BdB 3 SHELFIH S Use SEL buttons 17 through 24 to select channels Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC 1 INC and ENTER buttons to set them Most of the parameters for input channels 17 through 24 can be set only on OPTION page 2 Copying amp Swapping Channel Settings 59 Copying amp Swapping Channel Settings The Channel Copy function is used to copy input channel settings from one channel to another The Channel swap function is used to swap input channel settings between channels C
329. sethe MIDI button to locate MIDI page 1 as shown below Bx OMNI ECHO eon REIN e e ems leer rr leen chance oer 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 and 1 INC buttons to set them PORT LINK PORT The PORT parameter determines whether the TO HOST or MIDI ports are used for regular MIDI transmission The LINK PORT parameter used when linking 01Vs Linking 01Vs on page 239 is automatically set to the unused port If for example PORT is set to MIDI LINK PORT will be set to HOST and vice 01V Owner s Manual MIDI Setup 225 versa When using the TO HOST port PORT should be set to match the type of com puter connected to the 01V as follows Setting Computer Platform Port Transmission Speed MIDI Standard MIDI MIDI IN OUT THRU 31 25 kbps PCI NEC PC9800 Series TO HOST 31 25 kbps PC2 IBM PC compatible TO HOST 38 4 kbps Mac Macintosh clock 1MHz TO HOST 31 25 kbps Tx CH This parameter determines which MIDI Channel the 01V uses to transmit MIDI messages and can be set from 1 through 16 The device receiving MIDI messages from the 01V should be set to the same MIDI Channel When the 01V transmits MIDI data in response to a request that data is transmitted on the same MIDI Channel that the request was received on Rx CH This parameter determines which MIDI Channel
330. shock hazard Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting from an AC outlet Never pull the cord Damaging the power cord in this way is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard Do not place small metal objects on top of the 01V Metal objects inside the 01V are a fire and electrical shock hazard Do not block the 01V ventilation slots The 01V has ventilation slots on the top and rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising Blocked ventilation slots are a fire hazard Do not try to modify the 01V This could be a fire and electrical shock hazard The 01V operating temperature is between 5 C and 35 C 41 F and 95 F If lightning begins to occur turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible and unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet If there is a possibility of lightning do not touch the power cable plug if it is still con nected Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard If you notice any abnormality such as smoke odor or noise turn off the 01V immediately Remove the power cord from the AC outlet Confirm that the abnor mality is no longer present Consult your dealer for repair Using the 01V in this con dition is a fire and shock hazard Cautions Turn off all audio devices and speakers when connecting to the 01V Refer to the owner s manual for each device Use the correct cables and connect as specified If a foreign object or water gets inside the 01V turn it off imme
331. signment table 277 control change assignments 229 definition 293 echo 225 MIDI bulk dump 232 omni 225 on off 225 page 229 parameter control 229 programmable mixer 01 parameter assignment table 277 using 230 Control I O specifications 270 Control page option I O 43 47 49 58 63 95 97 123 126 Controls DEC amp 1 INC buttons 31 15 16 2TR IN switch 15 contrast 16 CURSOR buttons 31 ENTER button 31 fader mode buttons 17 faders 19 function buttons 17 GAIN control 15 MONITOR OUT LEVEL control 15 MONITOR 2TR IN switch 15 ON buttons 18 PAD switch 15 PARAMETER wheel 31 PHONES LEVEL control 15 POWER switch 23 Return controls 19 SEL buttons 18 SELECTED CHANNEL 16 SOLO status indicator 19 Copying channel settings 59 Crossfading mix scenes 191 CURSOR buttons 31 Cutting the EQ 63 D D switch routing 49 D A converter definition 293 DEC button 31 De emphasis digital stereo input 213 option I O input 216 Delay cascade compensation 215 effects parameter 137 input channels 45 omni outs 117 stereo output 91 DELAY LCR 141 Delay page 45 DELAY page 1 42 DELAY page 2 45 DELAY page 3 45 DELAY page 4 91 117 DELAY UNITS preference 203 DELAY ER 152 DELAY REV 154 DELAY gt ER 153 DELAY gt REV 155 Depth 01V dimensions 271 Device number MMC 236 DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION preference 203 Digital input specifications 269 Digital mixer benefits 4 Digital output specifications 269 DIGITAL STEREO IN 23 Digital st
332. simultaneously LISTEN This switches set the solo signal source to pre fader PFL or post fader AFL It affects input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns This switch is not effective in Mixdown Solo mode because the monitor out and phones signals are sourced from the Stereo bus In this mode the MONITOR SETUP LISTEN switch can be used to select either PFL or AFL SOLO TRIM This parameter is used to adjust the level of the solo signal from 60 dB to 6 dB 01V Owner s Manual Using Solo 81 Using Solo Input channels 1 through 24 and the effects returns can be soloed as follows 1 Connect monitoring system amp speakers to the MONITOR OUT 2 Make sure that the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR 3 Set the MONITOR OUT LEVEL control midway If you are using headphones set the PHONES LEVEL control midway 4 Usethe SETUP buttonto locate SETUP page 2 explained previously and configure as necessary For Input Channels 1 16 5 Use SOLO buttons 1 through 16 to solo channels For Input Channels 17 24 6 Press the OPTION 1 0 button 7 Use SOLO buttons 17 through 24 to solo channels For Effects Returns 1 amp 2 8 Use the effects returns SOLO buttons to solo effects returns 1 and 2 When a channel is soloed its SOLO button and the main SOLO indicator flash If SOLO SETUP LISTEN is set to AFL you must raise the soloed channel s fader Oth erwise you won t hear anything
333. solely to turn the EQ on and off 01V Owner s Manual 32 Chapter 4 Getting Around the User Interface Fader Modes 01V Owner s Manual The 01V SEL SOLO and ON buttons channel faders and STEREO MASTER fader are multifunction controls and their exact operation depends on the selected Fader mode Operation of these controls is shown in the following tables SEL Buttons The SEL buttons are used to select channels for EQ Pan Dynamics and Routing operations The following channels can be selected CH1 through CH24 Input channels 1 through 24 ST Stereo output 1 RTN2 Fffects returns 1 and 2 AUXI through AUX4 Aux sends 1 through 4 EFFI EFF2 Effects sends 1 and 2 1 16 MAS Remote function channels The SEL buttons are also used to make and release channel pairs and fader and mute groups Grouping Faders on page 55 and Grouping Mutes on page 56 SEL button Fader Mode 1 8 9 12 13 14 STEREO 1 2 17 24 15 16 MASTER HOME STEREO OUT select AUX 1 AUX 1 master select AUX2 AUX 2 master select AUX 3 AUX 3 CH 1 16 select master select RETURN 1 2 select AUX 4 AUX 4 master select EFFECT 1 EFFECT 1 master select EFFECT 2 ERPEGT 2 master select CH 17 24 STEREO select select REMOTE 1 Internal parameter assign select REMOTE 2 MMC 1 6 REMOTE 3 User defined MI
334. st 1 38 Piano High 19 E G Dist 2 39 Fine EQ Cass 20 A G Stroke 1 40 Narrator 01V Owner s Manual 68 Chapter 6 EQ Storing EQ Programs 1 EQ programs are stored on the EQ Library page You can store EQ settings to user pro grams 41 to 80 Preset programs 1 through 40 are read only Use the EQ ATT button to locate the EQ Library page shown below E amp g LIBRARY J Ho TITLE Use the SEL buttons to select the channel whose EQ settings you want to store as a program You can select input channels 1 through 16 the effects returns aux sends or stereo out You cannot select input channels 17 through 24 Use the PARAMETER wheel 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select programs The program list order can be set using the LIBRARY LIST ORDER option in prefer ences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 Use the cursor buttons to select STORE and then press the ENTER but ton The Title Edit dialog box appears If the STORE CONFIRMATION option is turned off in the preferences Setting 01V Preferences on page 203 the Title Edit dialog box does not appear and the EQ program is stored Enter a title for the EQ program See Title Edit Dialog Box on page 37 for more information When you ve finished select OK and then press the ENTER button The EQ program is stored 01V Owner s Manual Recalling EQ Programs 69 Recalling EQ Programs 1
335. t page 190 MIDI bulk dump 232 number of memories 266 program change assignment table 273 protecting 189 recall safe page 192 recalling 187 recalling via MIDI 188 renumbering 190 safe channels 192 storing 186 summary 7 titling 190 undoing recalls 189 what s stored 184 Security cover 259 SEL buttons about 18 fader modes 32 SELECT CH MESSAGE preference 203 Selected channel area display 29 Selected channel controls about 16 EQ controls 63 SETUP page 1 209 SETUP page 2 78 80 SETUP page 3 55 56 SETUP page 4 52 101 111 SETUP page 5 212 Shelving definition 296 EQ 62 Signal to noise ratio definition 296 Sine wave oscillator 202 Snapshot definition 296 fader modes 33 Solo setup page 80 SOLO status indicator 19 SOLO TRIM 80 Sonic performance 5 Specifications 280 analog inputs 268 analog outputs 268 aux sends 265 bus outs 265 control I O 270 digital inputs 269 digital outputs 269 digital stereo input 264 digital stereo output 266 effects returns 264 EQ 267 general 261 input channels 263 monitor out 266 omni outs 265 option I O inputs 264 option I O outputs 266 stereo output 265 ST out meter page 84 STEREO DELAY 140 Stereo meters about 16 using 84 STEREO OUT 23 Stereo output 2TR OUT 88 about 88 balancing 90 block diagram 92 connectors 23 D A converters 88 delay 91 digital stereo output 88 dynamics processors 165 EQ 65 fader 90 level setting 90 metering 84 01V Owner s Manual 304 Ind
336. tch to 2TR IN 2TR IN signals can be fed to input channels 15 and 16 for mixing with other sig nals Normally the input signals for these input channels EN derived from phone jack inputs 15 and 16 The 2TR OUT jacks are explained on page 88 01V Owner s Manual 78 Chapter 7 Solo Monitors amp Meters Monitor Setup The signal source for the monitor out and phones is selected using the MONITOR SETUP parameters on SETUP page 2 Selectable sources are the stereo output stereo cascade in aux sends 1 through 4 or bus outs 1 through 4 Since the Solo function has priority these sources can be monitored only when the Solo function is off i e no channels are soloed Signals can be sourced pre fader PFL or post fader AFL Other parameters include monitor trim and a mono stereo switch Use the SETUP button to locate SETUP page 2 shown below MONITOR SETUP MONI TRIM STEREO mili ex EEE rcascane m GIG 5010 SETUP J SOLO TRIM i RECORDING SOLO gt SETU InitDatas HRLL CHORUS GG Use the cursor buttons to select the MONITOR SETUP parameters and the PARAMETER wheel 1 and 1 INC buttons and ENTER but ton to set them SOURCE These switches are used to select the signal source for the monitor out and phones You can select the stereo out stereo cascade in aux sends 1 through 4 or bus outs 1 through 4 Several sources can be
337. the effects returns Effects settings are stored as programs in the effects library which contains 42 preset programs and 57 user programs See Effects Library on page 132 for more informa tion Effects settings are also stored in scene memories See Storing Mix Scenes on page 186 for more information Effects processors are edited on EFFECTI page 1 as shown below and EFFECT2 page 2 Usethe EFFECT 1 button to locate the EFFECTI pages and the EFFECT 2 button to locate the EFFECT2 pages When EFFECTI pages are selected the effects return 1 level icon is highlighted as shown below When EFFECT2 pages are selected the effects return 2 level icon is highlighted EFFECT EDIT J TiTLE Reverb Hall HALL _ IN DLY 2 B The title of the selected program and the type of effect it uses appear at the top of the page Below these are the effects parameters the number of which vary depending on the type of effect selected The type of effect is displayed above the effects returns level control icons On this page Effect 1 is using a HALL reverb while Effect 2 is using a CHORUS effect Up and down arrow icons like the down icon on this page indicate that more parameters are available and can be selected using the up and down cursor buttons The meters indicate effects returns signal levels for the selected effects proces sor 01V Owner s Manual 121 Preset Effects Pr
338. the 01V uses to receive MIDI messages and can be set from 1 through 16 The device transmitting MIDI mes sages to the 01V should be set to the same MIDI Channel When PROGRAM CHANGE OMNI or CONTROL CHANGE OMNI is turned on program change and Control Change messages can be received regardless of this setting PROGRAM CHANGE Program Change messages are used to recall mix scenes See Program Change Scene Recall on page 227 for more information The four ON OFF switches in this group are as follows Tx determines whether the 01V transmits Program Change messages when a mix scene is recalled Rx determines whether the 01V recalls mix scenes when Program Change messages are received OMNI determines whether the 01V receives Program Change messages on all 16 MIDI Channels ON or just the Rx channel OFF ECHO determines whether received Program Change messages are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port When ECHO is on the 01V receives Program Change messages and echoes them through to the MIDI OUT port regardless of the MIDI Channel set tings CONTROL CHANGE Control Change messages are used to control 01V parameters in real time See Control Change Parameter Control on page 229 for more informa tion The four ON OFF switches in this group are as follows Tx determines whether the 01V transmits Control Change messages when mix param eters are adjusted Rx determines whether the 01V adjusts mix parameters when Con trol Change messages
339. the Link Port In this system two 01Vs are linked together for simultaneous operation When for example mix scenes are recalled Program Change messages are transmitted via the port assigned as the Link Port for simultaneous scene recall on both 01Vs See Cascad ing 01Vs on page 214 for more information 01 sub mixer 01V B main mixer DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL OUT 2 2 2 2 ela 1 2 2 2 ci a x DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN x 28 YAMAHA TO HOST MIDI IN i MIDI OUT i Note When the MIDI ports and TO HOST ports of two 01Vs are connected together be sure to turn off the Program Change Tx and Rx switches Otherwise a MIDI loop will occur when mix scenes are recalled MIDI Receive Indicators When MIDI data is received via the MIDI IN port the MIDI receive indica tor shown here appears When data is received via the TO HOST port the HOST receive indicator shown here appears MIDI Setup MIDI parameters such as transmit channel Tx receive channel Rx omni and echo are set on MIDI page 1 1 U
340. ther Signals can be sourced pre fader PFL or post fader AFL Other parameters include solo trim and a solo enable switch See Solo Setup on page 80 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Monitor Outputs 77 Monitor Outputs Monitor and solo signals are output via the monitor out and phones connections Make sure the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set to MONITOR for monitoring See Two track Input 2TR IN on page 77 for more information Monitor signals are converted to analog using 18 bit 8 times oversampling D A converters and then output via balanced 1 4 inch phone jacks with a 4 dB nominal output level MONITOR OUT 4dB BAL R L The MONITOR OUT LEVEL control is used to adjust the level A of the monitor out signal LEVEL MONITOR OUT Phones A pair of stereo headphones can be connected to the PHONES stereo TRS phone jack The phones signal is the same as the monitor out signal PHONES The PHONES LEVEL control is used to adjust the level of the Ju phones signal 10 LEVEL PHONES Two track Input 2TR IN Signals connected via the 2TR IN jacks can be monitored via the MONITOR OUT and PHONES when the MONITOR 2TR IN switch is set to 2TR IN The stereo outputs of a master recorder can be connected here for confidence monitoring and master playback The 2TR IN uses phono jacks with 10 dBV nominal input level MONITOR 2TR IN By setting the 15 16 2TR IN swi
341. tion For digital audio transfer digital audio devices must be wordclock synchronized see About Wordclocks on page 206 In this example Pro Tools is wordclock master and the 01V and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves The 01V derives its wordclock from the Option I O digital input The DAT derives its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V The wordclock frequency which is the same as the sampling rate is set by Pro Tools For digital recording from the DAT recorder to Pro Tools the DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01V and Pro Tools as wordclock slaves In this case the 01V would derive its wordclock from the Digital Stereo Coaxial In connection and Pro Tools would derive its wordclock from the 01V s Option I O connection The sampling rate will be the same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded If a CD player is used instead of the DAT the sampling rate will be fixed at 44 1 kHz the indus try standard for music CDs System Notes The AES EBU connector on the MY8 AE card is connected to the XLR to 25 pin D sub splitter box using a 25 pin D sub cable Thesplitter box is connected to the 888 I O Audio Interface using AES EBU compat ible XLR cables The 888 I O Audio Interface is connected to the Pro Tools audio card using a special 50 pin Pro Tools cable The XLR to 25 pin D sub splitter box is custom made and not available from Yamaha A25 pin D sub to XLR break out ca
342. tios above 10 1 are considered to limit signals rather than compress them When an input signal exceeds the specified threshold level its level is automatically reduced to the thresh old level This means that the limiter s output level never actually exceeds the threshold level Limiters are often used to prevent sig nals from overloading amplifiers and tape recorders A limiter with a relatively high threshold for example could be used with the stereo outputs to prevent amplifier and speaker overload Compression ratio 20 1 Threshold 20dB Sayin Neve A TOME Ho ERR een SSeS Knee hard Output Level dB i 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Input Level dB 10 20 Parameter THRESHOLD 54 dB to 0 dB 55 steps Range OUT GAIN 0 0 dB to 18 0 dB 0 5 dB steps KNEE hard 1 2 3 4 5 ATTACK 0 120 ms 1 ms steps 5 ms 42 3 s fs 48 kHz RELEASE 6 ms 46 s fs 44 1 kHz RATIO 10 1 20 1 00 1 16 steps 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 5 1 1 7 1 2 1 2 5 1 3 1 3 5 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 8 1 01V Owner s Manual 168 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors THRESHOLD This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the com pressor Signals at a level below the threshold pass through the compressor unaffected Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount spe
343. to parameter assignments MIDI controllers can be used to control various 01V parameters MIDI keyboard o2 System Exclusive Parameter Control 231 In the following example input channel 5 fader movements are recorded in real time to a MIDI sequencer using Control Change 5 During playback the sequencer trans mits Control Change 5 messages back to the 01V and fader 5 moves accordingly This technique can also be used with ON buttons panpots and effects providing auto mated mixing MIDI Sequencer Recording AERE UAE MIDI Control Change 5 Playback MIDI Control Change 5 System Exclusive Parameter Control 01V mix parameters can also be controlled in real time using MIDI System Exclusive messages When a mix parameter is adjusted the 01V transmits a System Exclusive Parameter Change message The Transmit and Request functions on MIDI page 5 use System Exclusive messages to request parameter settings from other 01Vs When programs are recalled from the EQ dynamics or effects library System Exclusive Parameter Change Library Recall messages are also transmitted When channels are soloed System Exclusive Parameter Change Key Remote messages are transmitted If a scene memory that is not assigned to a Program Change is recalled a System Exclu sive Parameter Change Scene Recall message is transmitted
344. to quarter note Similarly changing the NOTE parameter to sixteenth note would automatically set the DELAY parameter to 125 5 milliseconds If the TEMPO parameter is changed the DELAY parameter is automatically recalculated The TEMPO can be set from 25 to 300 beats per minute although the range may be reduced if the DELAY parameter calculation exceeds the maximum delay time DELAY F6 GAIN The FREQ parameter for modulation type effects can also be set either manually or automatically For example with the TEMPO set to 120 beats per minute and NOTE set to quarter note the FREQ is automatically set to 2 00 hertz as shown below With the TEMPO still at 120 beats per minute changing the FREQ to 4 00 hertz would auto matically set the NOTE parameter to eighth note Similarly changing the NOTE parameter to sixteenth note would automatically set the FREQ parameter to 8 00 hertz If the TEMPO parameter is changed the FREQ parameter is automatically recalcu lated The TEMPO can be set from 25 to 300 beats per minute although the range may be reduced if the FREQ parameter calculation exceeds the maximum frequency NOTE The TEMPO parameter can be entered manually or by using the Tap Tempo function To use Tap Tempo select the TAP TEMPO switch and then press the ENTER button on each beat The TEMPO is calculated automatically based on the time between each button press
345. tored using the monitor out or phones See Monitor Setup on page 78 for more information Metering Aux Sends 01V Owner s Manual Aux send signal levels can be metered on the HOME pages See Metering Signal Lev els on page 83 for more information Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends 95 Sending Channel Signals to Aux Sends Signals from input channels 1 through 16 and the effects returns can be sent to aux sends 1 through 4 while those from input channels 17 through 24 can be sent to aux sends 1 and 2 For Input Channels 1 16 1 Use the AUX buttons to select an aux send The faders now function as channel aux send controls for the selected aux send and an AUX page similar to the one shown below appears RUX 1 MASTERS d 4 6 EN E 18 11 12 gos 15 16 IRTNI IRTNZ Too ceo roo c0 wep HRLL CHORUS Q o 2 Raise the fader of the channel you want to send to the aux send If the aux send is configured post fader Pre fader Post fader Aux Sends on page 97 you ll have to raise the channel s regular fader as well To do this press the HOME button and then raise the fader The aux send controls on input channels 13 and 14 likewise 15 and 16 are perma nently linked When input channels 1 through 12 are paired Pairing Input Channels on page 52
346. ts Editing Effects 01V Owner s Manual Effects programs can be edited and then stored as user programs Press the EFFECT 1 or EFFECT 2 button to locate EFFECT1 page 1 or EFFECT2 page 1 depending on which effect you want to edit EFFECT 1 page 1 is shown below EDITJ riTLE Reverb Hall 777 TYPE REUERBE HALL J TIME INI DLY HIRATIO 3 2 35 8 HALL CHORUS i Co m Use the cursor buttons to select the effects parameters and the PARAM ETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to set them Up and down arrow icons like the down icon on this page indicate that more param eters are available and can be selected using the up and down cursor buttons Effects parameters including variable range and description are listed on page 138 To store the edited program see Storing Effects Programs on page 133 Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters 137 Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters Delay parameters can be set manually by entering the delay time in milliseconds or automatically by entering the NOTE and TEMPO parameters For example with the TEMPO set to 120 beats per minute and NOTE set to eighth note the delay is automat ically set to 250 milliseconds as shown below With the TEMPO still at 120 beats per minute changing the DELAY to 500 0 milliseconds would automatically set the NOTE parameter
347. ts dynamics and scene memory lists appear with the lowest program scene at the bottom and the highest at the top When set to DOWN they appear with the lowest at the top highest at the bottom Initial Settings Preference Options Initial Setting EQ AUTO SCREEN ON OFF ON PANPOT AUTO SCREEN ON OFF ON STORE CONFIRMATION ON OFF ON RECALL CONFIRMATION ON OFF OFF DIGITAL IN SYNC CAUTION ON OFF ON SELECTED CH MESSAGE ON OFF ON DELAY UNITS msec meter sample msec INC DEC SCENE RECALL ON OFF OFF LIBRARY LIST ORDER UP DOWN UP Initializing the 01V The Initialization function can be used to reset the 01V to its factory settings clear all programs in the EQ effects and dynamics libraries empty all scene memories and reset the MIDI Program Change to scene memory and Control Change to parameter assignment tables Note If you want to reset just the mix settings and retain the programs and scene mem ories recall scene memory 00 instead See Scene Memory 00 on page 185 for more infor mation Turn off the 01V While holding down the MEMORY button turn on the 01V lt lt INITIALIZE MEMORY gt gt appears on the display Release the MEMORY button Press the 1 INC to initialize the 01V or the 1 DEC to cancel If you choose to initialize the 01V mix settings are reset to their factory settings all pro grams in the EQ effects and dynamics libraries are cleared the scene
348. ttings and is a read only memory which means it can only be recalled As each scene memory is selected the PROTECT switch indicates whether or not it s pro tected Below this is the RECALL UNDO switch for undoing mix scene recalls After intializing the 01V the RECALL UNDO switch appears gray until a mix scene is recalled because there is no data for undoing What s Stored in Scene Memories Virtually all 01V mix settings are stored in a scene memories Settings that are not stored consist mainly of analog controls and switches Namely the 26 dB PAD switches GAIN controls 15 16 2TR IN switch MONITOR 2TR IN switch MONITOR OUT LEVEL control PHONES LEVEL control display contrast control and on the rear panel the phantom power switches In addition the following data types are not stored 01V Setup data MIDI Program Change Map MIDI Control Change Map Scene Memory data EQ library Dynamics library and Effects library This data can be backed up to an external MIDI device such as a MIDI data filer using MIDI Bulk Dump See Bulk Dump on page 232 for more information 01V Owner s Manual About the Edit Buffer amp Indicator 185 About the Edit Buffer amp Indicator The Edit Buffer is the scene memory area inside the 01V that contains the current mix settings When a mix scene is stored the mix settings in the Edit Buffer are written to the selected scene memory When a mix scene is recalled the contents of the
349. ure that the 01V is configured to receive Control Change mes sages and that the MIDI Channels of the 01V and transmitting device match See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information Perhaps the Control Change being transmitted is not assigned to an 01V parameter Check the parameter to Control Change assignment table See Control Change Parameter Control on page 229 for more information Cannot receive MIDI Bulk Dump data Make sure that the BULK Rx switch on MIDI page 1 is turned on See MIDI Setup on page 224 for more information Controls have no effect on the 01V Perhaps the Local Control function on MIDI page 5 is turned off See Local Control on page 234 for more information MMC commands have no effect Make sure the device number matches that of the MMC compatible recorder See MIDI Machine Control on page 236 for more informa tion 01V Owner s Manual 257 General 01V Level Diagram Appendix 01V Level Diagram 061 SE olz ve 084 ce 002 od ee nie Os Ue tne den uo D dak thats es f Ee essei eva e bes O91 ths T cca DT 041 10015 dS 0617 ds 091 081 62 091 ez OLI ovi i 091 9c ogi Sc 091 ve 021 ez otl Oll ec ogi 001 ozi 6L 06 gi 0LL 08 Zk 001 8po9 indui vk 09
350. used to link aux send panpots to their corresponding channel panpots When this option is on pan settings made on the AUX PAN pages are reflected on PAN ROUT page 1 and vice versa Also the aux panpots are affected by the INDIVIDUAL GANG and INV GANG pan modes on PAN ROUT page 1 Including center there are 33 pan positions Hard left Center Hard right 116 13 12 11 1 9R29R3 R16 Input channels 1 through 12 feature a single panpot as shown here CENTER 1 55 Input channels 13 14 and 15 16 and the effects returns feature dual pan pots with the inner panpots being the odd left channel pans and the outer panpots being the even right channel pans When working with stereo sig nals these dual panpots can be used to adjust the width of stereo signals as shown below 16 16 15 16 With the inner control set at 16 and the outer control set at R16 as shown here the width of a stereo signal is 10096 15 16 With both controls set at CENTER as shown here the width of the stereo signal is zero 1 mono 01V Owner s Manual Pairing Aux Sends 103 1576 Setting the controls to positions in between these two extremes allows you to set the width of the stereo signal To maintain a central balance however you must set both controls to corresponding values For example L8 and R8 or L10 and R10 01V Owner s Manual 104 Chapter 9 Aux Sends Aux Send Block Diagra
351. ust be wordclock synchronized see About Wordclocks on page 206 In this example digital multitrack recorder A is wordclock master while digital multitrack recorder B the 01Vs and DAT recorder are wordclock slaves Digital multitrack recorder B derives its wordclock from the sync con nection with recorder A The 01Vs derive their wordclocks from their Option I O dig ital inputs and the DAT from the Digital Stereo Coaxial Out of the 01V The wordclock frequency which is the same as the sampling rate is set when the digital multitrack tape is formatted or first recorded For digital recording from the DAT recorder to the digital multitrack recorders the DAT recorder must be configured as wordclock master and the 01Vs and digital multi track recorders as wordclock slaves The sampling rate will be the same as that used when the DAT tape was recorded If a CD player is used instead of the DAT the sam pling rate will be fixed at 44 1 kHz the industry standard for music CDs System Notes The digital IN and OUT connectors on the MY8 AT cards are connected to the dig ital multitrack recorders using ADAT optical cables On Alesis 8 Track Digital Audio Recorders use the DIGITAL IN button to select the optical digital input Although the 01V is a four bus mixer a combination of bus outs aux sends and channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight track simulta neous recording See Assigning
352. ustry standard sampling rate for music CDs and can be used as wordclock master Alternatively it can be used as a wordclock slave synchronized to an external wordclock of between 44 1 kHz 10 and 48 kHz 6 Converting the sampling rate of digital audio is a complicated process so it s best to use the 44 1 kHz sampling rate especially if your work is destined for CD distribu tion Wordclock signals can be distributed via dedicated cables or derived from standard dig ital audio connections as shown below With AES EBU and Coaxial digital audio con nections a wordclock signal is transmitted even when no audio signal is present Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock In Digital Audio In Wordclock Out Wordclock master Wordclock In DAT 8 DAT 8 Ed Ed OO Wordclock slave Wordclock slave In a system where all devices share common wordclock it s important that all devices be turned on even when they re not being used Turn on the wordclock master first and then the slaves When shutting down the system turn off the slaves first and then the master Before commencing with a recording session make sure that al
353. ut and output connectors are located on the top and rear panels Top Panel PHANTOM 48V 82 08 PHANTOM 48V Bd INPUT BAL 660660000000 000000000000 1 INPUT BAL 1 12 Input channels 1 through 12 feature balanced XLR 3 31 type and balanced phone jack connectors both with a nominal input range of 60 dB to 10 dB Phantom powering 48 V is supplied to the XLR connectors with master on off switches for connectors 1 through 6 and 7 through 12 Phone jacks which can also be used with unbalanced phone plugs have priority over the XLR type connectors so when a phone plug is inserted the XLR type connector is disconnected With their high sensitivity and 26 dB PAD switches these inputs can handle a wide range of signals from condenser micro phones to hot line levels 1 ground Tip hot Male XLR plug 3 cold 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring cold 2 hot Sleeve ground 2 INPUT BAL 13 16 Input channels 13 through 16 feature bal Tip hot anced phone jack connectors with a 1 4 TRS phone plug Ring cold nominal input range of 20 dB to 10 dB These inputs are designed for use with line level sources and can also be used Sleeve ground with unbalanced phone plugs The stereo outputs of an external effects processor or other stereo device can be connected here 01V Owner s Manual Inputs amp Outputs 21 3 2TRIN These are phono jacks with a 10 dBV
354. utput 90 summary 5 FB gain parameter input delay 45 Features 3 FLANGE 143 FREEZE 157 Freq effects parameter 137 Function area display 28 Function buttons 17 Further reading 291 G G control 63 GAIN control about 15 using 41 Gang pan mode 48 Gate 168 GATE REVERB 139 General MIDI definition 294 General specifications 261 GR definition 294 Group page 55 56 Grouping faders 55 Grouping mutes 56 GUI interface about 28 summary 6 01V Owner s Manual 300 Index H Headphones See PHONES Height 01V dimensions 271 HIGH button 63 HI MID button 63 HOME page 1 83 HOME page 2 83 HOME page 3 84 HOME page 4 84 HOME page 5 85 Home page Yamaha web site 291 HPF 62 HQ PITCH 144 Implementation chart MIDI 290 INC button 31 INC DEC SCENE RECALL preference 203 Individual pan mode 48 Initial settings definition 294 Initializing 01V 204 internal parameter banks 194 parameter to control change table 229 scene memory to program change table 227 user defined MIDI controllers 238 INPUT BAL 1 12 20 INPUT BAL 13 16 20 Input channels 1 through 12 40 13 through 16 40 17 through 24 40 attenuator 43 aux sends 50 block diagram 60 copying settings 59 delay 45 dynamics processors 164 EQ 63 grouping faders 55 grouping mutes 56 level setting 46 metering 83 monitoring 50 muting 46 omni outs 50 option I O 50 overview 40 pairing 52 panning 47 phase 42 routing 49 specifications 263 swappin
355. uts for input channels 1 through 16 Each omni out features a variable output delay of up to 300 milliseconds Omni Outs Omni out signals are converted to analog using 18 bit D A converters and then output via balanced 1 4 inch phone jacks with a 4 dB nominal output level OMNI OUT 44 BAL 0000 Assigning Omni Outs Omni outs are initially assigned to aux sends 1 through 4 They can also be assigned to the bus outs the left and right channels of the stereo output or post fader direct out puts of input channels 1 through 16 1 Usethe PAN ROUTING button to locate PAN ROUT page 4 a shown below 2 Usethe cursor buttons to select the OMNI OUT parameter boxes and the PARAMETER wheel or 1 DEC and 1 INC buttons to select sources for the omni outs 3 Press the ENTER button to confirm your selection 01V Owner s Manual Omni Out Delay Omni Out Delay 117 The omni outs can be delayed individually by up to 300 milliseconds This can be used to compensate for delays in multi speaker sound reinforcement systems 1 Use the DELAY button to locate DELAY page 4 as shown below HALL CHORUS OUTPUT DELAY J stereo ouT L GEFJ iR err DELAY OMNI OUT 1 2 2 ERA 4 GEE DELAY 4 8 msec msec 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the delay parameters and the ENTER button PARAMETER wheel 1 D
356. ver activate ducking and the signal level 01V Owner s Manual 170 Chapter 13 Dynamics Processors 01V Owner s Manual is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter The trigger signal is sourced using the KEY IN parameter RANGE This determines the level to which the signal is ducked For a setting of 80 dB the signal is virtually cutoff For a setting of 30 dB however the signal is ducked by 30 dB For a setting of 0 dB the ducker has no effect HOLD This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level ATTACK This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered With a fast attack time the signal is ducked almost immediately With a slow attack time however ducking appears to fade the signal Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt DECAY This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold EXPAND An expander is similar to a compressor except that it works on signals below the thresh old level By reducing signals below the threshold level the expander attenuates low level noise effectively increasing the dynamic range and improving the sig nal to noise performance An expander set to an infinite ratio i e 00 1 is essentially a gate The following two graphs show typical expander curves The one on the left shows an expander with an ex
357. verb Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ 1 FP GU ddd 4 d gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 REV FLANGE Reverb and flanger effects in parallel Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0 3 99 9 s Reverb time INI DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI RATIO 0 1 1 0 High frequency reverb time ratio DENSITY 0 10096 Reverb density FREQ 0 05 40 00 Hz Modulation speed NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ DEPTH 0 10096 Modulation depth MOD DLY 0 0 500 0 ms Modulation delay time DN EN os WAVE Sine Tri Modulation waveform REV FLG 0 100 ies and flange balance 096 flange 10096 HPF Thru 21 Hz 8 0 kHz High pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50 Hz 16 0 kHz Thru Low pass filter cutoff frequency TEMPO 25 300 bps Used in conjunction with NOTE to determine FREQ B 44 P 4 4 3 gt 2 For more information about the FREQ NOTE and TEMPO parameters see Setting Delay Freq Note amp Tempo Parameters on page 137 01V Owner s Manual 150 Chapter 12 Effects REV gt FLANGE Reverb and flanger e
358. was recorded If a CD player is used instead of the DAT the sam pling rate will be fixed at 44 1 kHz the industry standard for music CDs System Notes The TDIF 1 connectors on the MY8 TD cards are connected to the digital multi track recorders using Tascam PW 88D digital audio cables MYS8 TD cards feature a device selector switch that should be set according to the type of recorder connected EXT 88 for DA 88 INT 38 for DA 38 or other recorder Although the 01V is a four bus mixer a combination of bus outs aux sends and channel direct outputs can be assigned to the digital outputs for eight track simulta neous recording See Assigning Option I O Digital Outputs on page 219 for more information 01V Owner s Manual Two 01Vs amp two Tascam Interface Recorders 249 Monitors Power Amp Headphones Personal computer running MIDI software 01V A MONITOR wordclock slave PHONES Digital multitrack A peep wordclock master TDIF 1 DAT recorder wordclock slave Serial port MIDI IN OUT Digital in DIGITAL STEREO interface 4 COAXIAL 00 00 00 00 Digital out TO HOST DIGITAL STEREO COAXIAL IN 885 DIGIT
359. x Send Dynamics Processors 100 Aux Sends aevo e Rr det rct 101 Aux Send Block Diagram 104 Stereo Pair Aux Send Block 105 E E ea 107 Dus OUTS cn ses Me Manette atte pe n ae 108 Option I O the Bus QUIS So eie reed eri RR eR ERE ERA 108 Omni Outs amp the Bus OUS iio oe lore a Ma e ace x Da 108 Monitoring Bus Outs na eoa aee oti e niae nat a aco x no Pu 108 Metering Bus ia dean eoe d alle ra dO RO e dO x 108 Routing Signals to the Bus 108 Setting Bus Out Master Levels 109 M ting Dus CUES vicis Mee uus acp DIE 109 Routing Bus Signals to the Stereo Bus 110 Paitin Dus ont Bauen ta Re Rs gi ec 111 Bus Out Block Diagram v a ec dd etc sone die eal 112 Stereo Pair Bus Out Block Diagram 113 Omni Outs ceo tee 115 About the dnos ets RE Ner 116 Ont OUTS coss leave RPS D PR MEE ARE OO ag aa SAREE 116 Assigning Omni Outs eue ewe Ra lege Rn oo e Reo Ce o pde 116 Omm Out Delaye coded abeat sanie dicam at pm tei Oa 117 Omni Out Block Diagram sa d Xe kr e EYE OO EE oa 118 01V Owner s Manua
360. y LEVEL 1 0 100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0 100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0 100 Filter 3 level RESO 1 0 20 Filter 1 resonance RESO 2 0 20 Filter 2 resonance RESO 3 0 20 Filter 3 resonance 157 Effects Parameters FREEZE Effect 2 only Basic Sampler with 2 9 second memory Parameter Range Description In MANUAL mode recording is started by pressing REC MODE MANUAL INPUT the ENTER button In INPUT mode recording is triggered by an input signal START Playback start point in milliseconds SAMPLE 0 131070 Playback start point in samples In MOMENT mode the sample plays for the moment that the ENTER button is pressed In CONT mode playback continues once the ENTER button has PLY MODE MOMENT CONTI been pressed In INPUT mode playback continues INPUT f once it s been triggered by an input signal The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter END 1 Playback end point in milliseconds SAMPLE 0 131070 Playback end point in samples LOOP NUM 0 100 Number of times the sample plays LOOP Loop start point in milliseconds SAMPLE 0 131070 Loop start point in samples TRG LVL 60 to 0 dB Input trigger level i e the signal level required to trigger recording or playback Recording delay For plus values recording starts after TRG DLY 1000 to 1000 ms the trigger is received For minus values recording starts before
361. ype OFFSET 0 100 Filter frequency offset RESO 0 20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0 100 Output Level DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY Filter frequency change decay speed 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz DYNA FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Delay time offset DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY Decay speed 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 5 fs 48 kHz 01V Owner s Manual 148 Chapter 12 Effects DYNA PHASER Dynamically controlled phaser Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT MIDI Control source input signal or MIDI note on velocity SENSE 0 100 Sensitivity Feedback gain plus values for normal phase 0 FB CAIN og t0422 feedback minus values for reverse phase feedback OFFSET 0 100 Lowest phase shifted frequency offset DIR UP DOWN Upward or downward frequency change STAGE 2 4 8 10 12 14 16 Number of phase shift stages DECAY Decay speed 1 6 0 ms 46 0 s fs 44 1 kHz 5 0 ms 42 3 s fs 48kHz REV CHORUS Reverb and chorus effects in parallel Parameter Range Descript
362. yphonic have 16 parts and 128 specific preset voices GR Abbreviation for gain reduction Initial settings The settings used when a device is first turned on after leaving the factory Also known as the default or factory settings LCD Liquid Crystal Display A type of display device that uses liquid crystals to generate characters and graphics LED Light Emitting Diode A type of diode that lights up when an electric cur rent is applied Line Level Signal A high level signal in the range from 20 dB to 20 dB Most audio equipment outputs signals at line level Contrast with Low Level Signal Low Level Signal A signal in the range from 100 dB to 20 dB Microphone and electric guitar signals are in this range Contrast with Line Level Signal LSB Least Significant Byte The byte ofa digital word that represents the lowest value Contrast with MSB MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface An internationally agreed stan dard that allows electronic musical instruments and audio equipment to communicate MIDI Device Number A numbering scheme used to identify individual devices in MIDI system commonly used for transmitting System Exclusive data Mix scene A set of mixer settings Just like a play a piece of music consists of various scenes each requiring different mixer settings Mix scenes are stored in scene memo ries and can be recalled manually or using MIDI Program Changes which can be sent from a
363. ystem Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n parameter request n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE O0tttttt tt 00 edit buffer 01 system memory type DATA 440 5 high 7 bits of 14 bits address Qaaaaaaa ddl address L low 7 bits of 14 bits address Oddddddd dd count EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive The system memory will depend on the address as follows 0x0000 0x007F setup memory 128byte 0x0080 0x0147 backup memory 200byte 0x0200 card type 1byte PARAMETER CHANGE type 0x02 function call Reception When Parameter Change RX is ON this message is received if the Rx CH matches the Device Channel included in the SUB STATUS When Parameter Change ECHO is ON this message will be ech oed When this message is received the corresponding mem ory library table will be recalled stored cleared STATUS 11110000 FO System Exclusive Message ID No 01000011 43 Manufacturer s ID No YAMAHA SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n parameter change n 0 15 Device Chan nel No 1 16 GROUOP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID MODEL ID 00000100 04 Device code 01V PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call DATA Oddddddd ddO function Oddddddd ddl number Oddddddd dd2 channel EOX 11110111 F7 End Of Exclusive function number channel Tx Rx 0x00 scene recall 0 99 memory 0 99 Ox7f

user manual - Warehouse Sound Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents